Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
A
SAN SK RIT PRIM ER
BASED ON THE
LEITFADEN
ELEMENTAR- CURSUS DES SANSKRIT
OF
JPROFESSOR GEORG BUHLER
OF VIENNA
EDWARD DELAVAN RERRY,OF COLUM BIA COLLEGE , N EW -YORK .
(a
’I/
BOSTON
GI N N AN D COMPAN Y
1 885 .
E n ter ed a cco rding to Act of Congress, in the year 1 885 ,
BY E . D . PERRY,
I n th e Offi ce of the L ibrar ian of Congress at W ash ington .
Qromposition fig iat rssfnork 11g
GEBRND ER U N GER , JOHN W I L SON AN D SON ,
SCHON EBERGER STRASSE , 1 7 A ,um vsnsn v p ness .
BERL I N , SW . CAM BRI D GE , M ASS .
Preface.
I n the p refa ce to th e work* o f whi ch th e following is a revi s ion,
Prof. B i iHLER w ri tes a s fol l ows :
The fol low ing L ei tf a den w a s w ri tten la st wi nter [1881
a n d, p ri nted i n m a nuscrip t form ,
w a s u sed i n the i nstructio n o f
qu i te a la rge number o f schola rs . I t i s ba sed upon th e p ure ly
p ra ctica l m ethod of Sa nskri t i n s tru cti on , which w a s i n troduced a t
HAUG’s a n d my own i n sta nce i nto the I ndia n seconda ry schools ,
a nd ha s become establ i shed there by mea n s o f R. G . BHK N D KRK AR’S
tex t- books . The a ttemp t to tra nsfer th i s method to Eu ropea n un i
versi ti es i s justified by the p ra cti ca l success which , a s my ex
p er ien ce shows, i s to be“
ga ined the rehy . F o r I ha ve fou nd tha t
begi nn ers ma ster th e firs t difficu l ti es o f Sa nskri t v ery ra p idly, a n d
tha t l ea rners take the m ost l ively a n d continued i n teres t i n the
s tudy,i f opportun i ty for a ctivi ty o n thei r own pa rt i s given them
from the very firs t , a nd th ey a r e. i n troduced a t on ce i n to the l ivi ng
la nguage . Moreover, the qu estion o f economy o f t im e i s m ade th e
m ore weigh ty by th e fa ct tha t the elem en ts of Sa nskri t form a n
Leitfa den f ii r den Elem en ta rcu rsu s des Sa n skri t ; m i tUebungsst ii cken un d zwei Glo ssa r en . Vo n GEORG BUI I LER . W i en , 1883 .
I ha ve tra nsla ted a bove a l i ttl e freely.
i v
importa n t a id to students o f Cla ssica l a nd Germ a ni c Philol ogy, ye t
to a la rge n umber o f su ch a r e a ccessibl e only when the subj ectc a n be ma stered i n a short time . On the other ha nd , th e disad
va ntages necessa ri ly en ta i l ed by th e pu rely pra ctica l method m ay
readi ly be removed la ter by a short methodica l expositi on o f th egramma r The verses i n th e exercises a re taken chi eflyfrom BOEHTL I N GK ‘
S I ndischen Sp r a chen ; the sentences a re i n pa r t
derived from va ri ou s Sa nskri t works,o r model l ed a fter pa ssages
conta in ed i n them . To the la st l essons no Sa nskri t exercises havebeen a pp ended, si nce the reading of the N ala or o f some otherea sy Sa nskri t work m ay very wel l be begu n a s soon a s the forma t ion of th e p erfect ha s been l ea rned .
”
After u sing the L ei tf a den for some tim e i n th e i nstru ction o f
a cla ss , I wa s convinced o f i ts grea t m erits a s a pra ctica l i n tro
duction to the la nguage ; whi l e o n the other ha nd i t seemed very
un fortuna te tha t i t held throughou t to the na tive sys tem of gramma r,whi ch
,si nce the a ppea ra nce o f Prof. W H ITNEY’S work , w e i n
America a t l ea s t h a ve l ea rned to distrust . Under these circum
sta nces i t seemed a dvi sabl e to a t temp t a comb i na tion o f BfiHLER’s
p ra ctica l exercises w ith W H ITNEY’S theory ; a n d to this e nd the
book ha s been rea l ly rewri tten . An i n troduction ha s bee n added,
givi ng a genera l vi ew o f th e s tructure o f th e la nguage ; the exor
ci ses ha ve been pruned he r e‘
a nd there , chiefly to remove forms
which seemed too unu sual or doubtfu l to ha ve a j us t cla im o n
th e beginner’s memory ; a nd the number o f l esson s ha s been r e
du ced from forty- eigh t to forty-five,by conden sing the descrip tion ,
n eedl essly ful l for beginners , o f the a ori st, p reca tive , a nd seconda ry conj uga tions . I ha ve endeavored to re ta i n nothing but wha twou ld supp ly th e rea l wa n ts o f those fonwhom the book i s de
signed ; ye t here and there , ha v i ng i n mi nd those who m ay tak e
up th is s tudy withou t a tea cher, I have a dded expla n a tion s which
I should o therw i se ha ve l eft fo r ora l commu n ica tion by the i nstructor.A deta i l ed exp la na ti o n of the cha nges i n the gramma ti ca l p a rt
o f the book wou ld requ i re to o much spa ce to be given here . Theym ay be summ a rized i n th e s ta temen t th a t I have striven to remove
all form s a t p resen t “n o n - quota bl e” . I n th e exp l ica t ion of the
ru l es I ha ve sought to be brief, bu t never to th e sa crifice of clea r
n ess . I n very m a ny ca ses n ot only the substa nce bu t a ls o the
words of Prof. W H I TN EY’
s ru l es ha ve been in corpora ted i n to those
o f the Primer, which wa s done wi th hi s sa nct ion . I t seemed qu i te
n eedles s to designa te allsu ch borrowings by qu ota t i on -ma rks .
Ma ny a cknow l edgments a r e due to those whose a id h a s m ade
p ossibl e th e a ppea ra nce of the work . Prof. B iiHLER’s rea dy gen e
r o sity i n consen ting to the rendering of h i s book i n to a ve ryd i fferen t form from tha t which he ga ve i t deserves most gra tefu l
m en ti on . To Prof. W H I TN EY I ow e deep gra ti tude fo r ma ny va lua bl e suggesti ons ; he wa s k i nd enough to l ook over the work i n
m a nu scrip t, a nd, la te r, to p u t a t my(
disposa l th e adva nce sheets of
hi s i nva lua ble collection o f verb - forms . To Prof. LANMAN I am
equa l ly i ndebte d ; a s w el l for m a ny u sefu l hi n ts a s for the a rduous
ta sk of l ook i ng over p roof- sheets , w hich be imposed o n himself
with cha ra cteris ti c readi n ess . M y pup i l , Mr . A . V . W . JACK SON ,
a ss i sted me no t a l i tt l e i n th e comp i la ti o n of the Glossa ries . My
a cknowl edgments a r e a l so due to th e p ri n ters , GEBE . UNGER
(Tu . GRI M M ) o f Berl i n , for the ca refu l m a nner in which thei r p a rt
o f th e work ha s been done .
F rom V . S . APTE’
s“Gu ide to Sa nskri t Composition” I ha ve
deri ved occa sion a l examp l es .
The appea ra nce of the book has been delayed considerablyb eyond the da te origina l ly p la nned for i t . The p rin ting wa s beguni n November la s t
,but w a s i n terrup ted by my i l l ness , a nd a r e
sulting stay of considerabl e l ength i n the W es t I ndi es .I sha l l es teem i t a fa vor i f a ny who m ay use thi s book w i l l
notify me of misp ri nts o r i na ccura cies of a ny sort which they mayrema rk .
Berl in,Augus t 1885 .
E . D . P.
Table of Contents,
in system atic gr amm a tical a rr a ngem en t .
Th e fi gu res i n h eavy typ e r e fe r to p a r agr ap h s.
I n tr oductory suggestions, p . xi .
I . Alph abet '
a nd Sou nds .Cha ra cters , —20 . Cla ssifica ti o n o f Sou nds, a nd Pronun cia ti on ,2I—47 . Light a n d H eavy Syl la bl es , 48 . Accen t
,5 6 .
I I . Chan g es o f Sounds . Guna a nd Vr ddh i .
49—54 .
I I I . Rules o f Euph on i c Comb i nation .
Ru les of Vowel Comb i na ti on , IO5 , l06 , I5 6—l6l, I64. G en era lLaw s concern ing F i na l s , 239—242 . Dea sp i ra ti on , 242 .
Tra nsferra l o f Asp i ra tion , 244 , 249, 428 Surd amLSo n a n t
Assimi la t ion, l47
,I4S
,266
,267 . Combina t i on s o f F i na l
8 a n d r, 95 , ll7—l23 , I29 . Conversi on o f s to s
, p . 27
l91, I92 , 342 , 35 2 . Conversion o f n to n, p . 32 (note M ) , I66 .
Convers ion of D en ta l Mu tes to L i ngua l s a nd Pa la ta l s, I49 , I5 O,p . 99 (note) , 342 . Combi na tion s of n , p . 29 (no te) , ISS— I40 ,I84 . Cha nge o f ch to c'
ck, p . 27 (note I65 . Combina ti on s
o f m, p . 29 (no te) . F ina l ii [a nd 73] IS4 . F i na l 16
, t, p ,266.
F i na l t,I4S—l5 l.
I V. Declen sion .
G ender, N umber, Ca s e , 83—89 . Ca se-endi ngs , 90 , 9I.
P a da -endi ngs,9l
,24I .
V. Substan t ives a nd Adj ecti ves .Vowel -s tems
S tems i n a, m . n .
,l03
,III . S tems i n i
, m II3 , II5 ; n .
,II4
,II5 .
S tems i n u,m .
,l28 ; n .
,l36 , |37 . Stems i n i a nd u
,f . ,
l85—I87 . Stems i n a,i,72 : (a ) Root-words . I n a
,2I2
,2 I3 ;
i n i,189
,2 I2
,2 I4 ; i n i t, l97, 2I2, 2 I4. (b) Deriva tive Stems , f.
I n a,I62 ; i n 5, I83 ; i n it , IQS. Stems i n r, 2OI—205 , 208 .
S tem s i n Diphthongs : go , 209 ; mi n ,m i
,277 .
Consona n t- stems
Genera l,237—242 . (a ) Roo t-stems , 243 , 244 , 246—25 0 .
(b) D eriva tive S tems . I n a s, is, us, 25 2—25 4 . I n a n (a n ,
m a n ,
va n) , 265 . I n in (in , m in ,s in) , 25 ! I n a n t (a n t, ma n t, va n t)
25 6—264. Perfect Pa rticip les i n va ns, 268 . Compa ra tive sin ga s, 25 5 .
I rregula r Nou ns : 269—284.
Comp a ri son , 337—345 .
F orma t ion of F em in i ne - s tems , l87 , 25 I, 25 5 , 262—264, 268 .
VI . Numer als.328—336 .
VI I . Pronouns .223—236
,28 5—28 8
, 413 .
VI I I . Con jugat ion .
Voice,Tense , M ode , Number , Person , 5 7 65 . Verba l Ad
j ectives a nd Nouns , 66—68 . Seconda ry Conj uga tion , 69—70 .
Mode a n d Tense - s tems, 7l.
I X. Pr esen t-System .
Conj uga t ion C la sses, 72—80 .
F i rs t Conj uga tion .
Genera l , 383—387 .
I . Root- cla ss (H i ndu second o r a d- cla ss) , 404—4I2, 4l4—429 .
I I . Redupl i ca ting Cla ss (H . th ird or bu o cla ss) , 430—440 .
I I I . Na sa l Cla ss (H. s even th o r r a dlz-cla ss) , 44l—446 .
IV. N u a n d u -Cla sses (H . fifth a nd eighth,or su a nd ta n
cla sses) , 38 8—395 .
V. N at-Cla ss (H . n i n th o r kr i - cla ss) , 399 403 .
Second , o r a -Conjuga t ion .
VI . a -Cla ss H . firs t or bli tz-cla ss) , 92—94, 97—l02, I34,135
,15 2- 4 5 4
,1782 182, ISS, l93—l96 , I99, 200 , 206,
207,210
,222 , 260 .
VI I . A ccented d-C la ss (H i ndu s ixth o r ta d- cla ss) , l07—IIO,I5 2—I5 4 etc . (a s for a -cla s s) .
VI I I . ya-Cl a s s (H . fourth or div- cla ss) , I24—I27 , I3I—l34,
l5 2—IS5 et c. (a s fo r a -cla s s) .IX . Accen ted yet
-C la ss o r Pa ssive Conjuga tio n,I68—l76
,
I8 8,I99
,200
,2I0 , 222 .
[Ca usa t ive a nd Denomina tive Conjuga tio n (pa r tly z H . ten tho r cur - cla ss) , I4I—I46, l5 2—I54 etc . (a s for a - cla s s) ;a lso 2l5—22l.]
X . Per fect-System .
447—47I, 474.
Periphra s ti c Perfect, 472, 473 .
X I . Aor i st-System .
G en era l , 48 6 . S imp l e Aoris t : Root-a ori st , 487 ; a -a ori s t,48 8 . Redup l ica ted Aoris t , 489, 490 . S ibi la n t Aori s ts-a ori s t , 49l; rig
- a ori st,492 ; sis
-a orist,493 ; sa -a orist
,494 .
Aoris t Pa s sive,495
, 496.
X I I . F utur e-System .
Genera l,475 . S imp l e F u ture , 476—48l. Condi tiona l , 482.
Periphra sti c F u ture , 483—485 .
XI I I .
(g er baI1Adj ectives a nd Substa’
n tive s : Par ti ci ples, I nfi n i tive,e run
Pa ssive Pa rti cip l e i n ta o r n a,289—3OI . Pa s t Active Pa r
tic iple i n ta va n t o r n a va n t,302
, 303 . G erunds : Absolu tives304—3 I3 . I nfin it ive
, 3 I4—322 . F u tu re Pa ssive Pa rticip l es
Geru ndives , 323—327 .
X IV. Der iva tive or Seconda ry Con jugat ion s .G enera l , 497 . Pa ss ive , 498 . Ca u sa t ive
,5 07 , 5 08 .
I ntens ive , 499—5 02 . Desidera tive, 5 03—5 06 . Denom inat ive
,5 09
,SIO.
XV. Per i ph r a st i c Con juga t ion .
Perfect,472
,473 . F u ture
,48 3—485 .
XVI . VerbalPrefi xes : Adve rbs and Pr eposi t ion s.S I
,82
,IS7
,l90, 395
—397.
XVI I . F orma tion of Compound Stem s .C la ssifica tion , 346—35 3 . Cop ula tive Compounds , 35 4—3 5 7 .
Determina tive Compou nds , 35 8 ; Dep endent , 35 9—3 6I ; Descriptive, 362—365 . Seconda ry Adj ective Compounds , 366370 Possess ive
,37l—377 ; w i th Governed F i na l M ember , 378 .
Adj ective Compou nds a s N ouns a n d Adverbs,35 0 , 379
—3SI.
[D va ndva - compou nds, p . 136 (note) ; Ta tp urusa - compou nds , p . 137
(note) ; K a rma dharaya-compou nds , p . 137 (note) ; D vigu
- com
p ounds , 380 ; B a huvr i hi - comp ounds , p . 142 (no te) ; Avyayi bhavacompounds ,
XVI I I . Synta cti calRules .Positi on of Modifiers
, p . 35 (note) . Rep eti tio n ofW ords , p . 67
Agreemen t of Adj ectives,245 . F orce of Ca ses
,
IO4,II2 . Preposi ti on s wi th Ca ses , 82, ISO. [rim w i th
I nstrumenta l (a nd Gen itive) , p . 89 (note) . Constru ction w i thComp a ra tives , 345 . Numera l s , 333 . Pronou ns
,225
,234
—236 . i ti , p . 47 (note) . F orce o f Tenses : Presen t,96 ;
I mp erfect, I8 2 ; Perfect, 474 ; Aori st , 48 6 . F orce of M odesI mpera tive , I94—I96 ; Op ta t ive , 207 . Ca u sa tive, 22l.
Pa ss ive, l77 . Pa s t Pa ssive Pa rti cip l e , 290 . Pa s t A ctivePa r ti cip l e, 303 . G erund, 3ll—SI3 . I nfini tive
,320—322 .
F u ture Pa ssive Pa rticip l e , 327 .
Appen dix .
H i ndu Names of Letters . Modern H indu Accen tua ti on o f
Sa nskri t .
Suggestions for using the Primer .
The Primer ca n be finished by ea rnes t s tuden ts i n s ixte en orseven teen w eeks
,reckon ing three lesson s p e r week , w i th here a n d
there a n hou r for revi ew . A fter tha t L AN MAN ’S Sa nskri t Rea der,a n i n troduction to which thi s work i s pa rtly i ntended to he , shouldbe ta ken up . Studen ts a r e s trongly recommended to p rovi dethemselves with W H I TNEY’S Sa nskri t G ramma r a t the ou tse t .
I t s eemed a dvi sa bl e to l ea ve the I n troductio n undivided i n tol e ssons , a s d ifferen t tea chers m ay prefer to impa rt th e a lpha bet ,etc . , to their schola rs a t d iff eren t ra tes o f sp eed . Some o f the
exerci se s for tra nsla tion m ay be found ra ther too long to be comple ted in one l esson . I n such ca ses i t wi ll p roba bly b e better,a fter requ i ri ng th e tra nsla tio n o f on ly so ma ny sentences a s thep up i l m ay rea so na bly be expected to ma ster in the prep a ra tio n ofo n e day
’s l esson,to p roceed directly to th e n ext l es so n i n the
fol low i ng ho ur,l eav i ng the u ntra nsla ted s e n ten c es for a revi ew .
The vocabu la ri es p refixed to ea ch exerci s e a r e n o t exhau s tive ,s i nce words which ha ve bee n trea ted o f i mmedia tely before a r esometimes omi tted from them . The glossa ries a t the e nd of th ebook wil l
,i t i s hoped , be found comp l ete for the exercises ; but
th e mea n ing o f compound words mu s t i n mos t ca ses b e l ea rn edfrom thei r el em en ts ; a n d proper names ha ve often been omitted,their Sa nskri t forms bei ng di scern ibl e from the tra nsl i tera tion .
The ta bl e o f con ten ts i n systema t i c gramma ti ca l a rra ngemen tis design ed to fa ci l i ta te the finding of a ny des ired a rticl e ; i t m ay
a l so be found u sefu l a s a n ou tl i n e for a ra p id gramma tica l revi ew .
Ar r an gemen t o f Vo cabula r i es . The voca bu la ri es a re a rra nged
i n strict a lphabeti c order (see bel ow) . All nouns , whether sub
sta n tives o r a dj ectives,a r e given in the s tem - form . Allverb-forms
a re pla ced under th e root ; p reposi tiona l compou nds o f verbs l ikew is e
,a n d no t in the a lpha beti c p la ce o f the p reposi ti on . Of
verba l a djectives a nd nou ns,some importa n t ones ha ve been given
i n thei r a lpha beti c p la ces, bu t the mea ning o f most o f them mu stbe l ea rned from their respective roots . Pronouns a r e given gen era l lyin the form o f th e nomina tive .
Alph abeti c Or der . The a lpha beti c order i s tha t given i n § I,bu t the fol low i ng poi n ts a r e to be noticed here :The visa rga sta nds n ex t a fter the vowels ; but a visa rga re
ga rded a s equ iva l en t to a s ibi la n t a nd excha ngeab l e w i th i t ha sthe a lphabeti c p la ce o f tha t s ibi la n t .The sign it
, represen ting “ the a nusva’r a o f more indep enden torigi n”
,ha s i ts p la ce before all th e m a tes etc. ; thus da iry a nd
danstra s ta nd before da ksa .
The sign n’
z,representing a n a ssimi la ted m ,
i s p la ced a ccordi ngto i ts phonetic va lue . 1 . I f n
'
z, resu l ting from the a ssimi la tion ofm to a semivowel , sibil a nt , o r 22, represen t a na sa l s emivowel o ra nusvar a
,then i ts p la ce i s l ike tha t of i t . Thu s p un
’
zs comes beforep unya a n d sa n
’
zpaya before sakrt. 2 . Bu t i f n'
z be the p roduct o fm a ssimila ted to a mu te
,rep resen ting a , n
, n, n,o r m
,then i ts
p la ce i s tha t o f the na sa l so rep resen ted.
Introduction .
Alphabet.
I . Sa n skri t i s commonly wri tten i n wha t i s ca l l ed the
D evan aga r i a lpha bet . The cha ra cters o f thi s,a nd the E urop ea n
cha ra cters which wil l be u sed i n tra nsl i tera ti ng them ,a r e a s fol lows :
n o r m .
gut tura l
pa la talMutes l i ngua l
d en tallabia l
Perry , Sanskr i t Pr imer .
Consonants.
G ish 71 9
6 0h W
3 th E d
W th . g d
I ntr oduct ion .
pa la ta l a y l i ngua l r
den ta l a z labia l a v.J
Sibi la n ts : p a l a ta l ‘11‘ c ; lingua l i t s; den ta l G s.4
A sp i ra tion ‘
g‘
h .
Sem ivowe l s
2 . The a bove order is tha t i n which the sou nds a r e ca ta l ogu edby na tive gramma ria ns ; a nd Europea n schola rs have a dop ted i ta s the a lpha beti c order, fo r dictiona ri e s , etc . The wri ting ru nsfrom left to right .
3 . The theory o f the deva naga r i mode o f wr i ting is syl la bi c .
a n d consona n ta l . Tha t is, i t rega rds a s the wri tte n u ni t,n o t the
s imp l e sou nd, bu t the syl lable ; a n d further, i t r ega rds a s the substa n tialpa r t o f the syllabl e the consona n t (o r th e con son a n ts) pr eceding th e vow el th is la t ter b e ing m erely imp l ied , a s i s theca se w i th short i t a , except when i n i tia l, o r
,if writ ten
,being
w ri tten by a subordina te s ign a t ta ched to the consona n t .4 . Hence fol low these two p ri n cip l esA . The forms o f th e vowel - cha ra cters given a bove a re u sed
only when the vowel forms a syl labl e by i tsel f, o r i s n o t comb i n edw i th a p recedi ng consona n t : tha t i s , when i t i s i n i tia l , o r p recededby a noth er vowel . I n combina t io n wi th a consona n t, other modesof representa tion a r e u sed .
B . I f more tha n o n e con sona n t precede a vow el, form ingw i th i t a s ingle syl la bl e, thei r cha ra cters mu s t be combined i n toa s i ngl e cha ra cter.
5 . Accordi ng to the H indu mode of d ivi d ing syl la bles , ea chsyl la bl e mus t end i n a vowel , o r i n‘sa rga , or a nusvar a , excep t a tthe en d o f the word ; a nd a s ordi na ry H i ndu u sa ge does no t d ividethe words o f a sen tence i n wri ti ng, a fina l con sona n t i s combinedi nto o n e syl lab l e wi th the in i tia l vowel or consona n t o f th e fol lowi ngword, so tha t a sylla bl e ends i n a con sona n t only a t th e end ofthe sen tence .
I n troduction .
Thus the sen tence ksetr esu sz'
ktabbir megha'
nam a dbkz’
r dbanya n'
i
p ra rz’
ldlzam‘by th e wa ter which drop s from the clouds upon the
field s the gra i n grows ta l l ’ wou l d be considered a s con sis ti ng o f
th e syl la bles hse tr e su sz’
kta bhi rm a gba n a m a dbhi r dha nga rn
p r a r z’
t dham . E a ch o f these syl lables wou ld be i ndi ca ted by a
s i ngl e group of s ign s , w i thou t a ny reference wha tever to the divi s ion o f the words comp osi ng the sen ten ce ; a nd th e sylla b lesa re a lways wr i tten i ndep enden tly, with m ore or l ess closeness o fa p proa ch ; ei ther l ike th is
fi fi g fn n t fn fi’
m am fis 'cir ai n ts e q o r ma tt ress
6 . I n Sa nskri t work s p rin ted in Eu rop e, the comm on pra cticei s to sepa ra te th e words so fa r a s th i s ca n b e done w i thou t a nya l tera tio n o f th e wri tten form . Thus , {W an : in dr aga n amalz;
bu tW W W ta t sa vi ta r va r enyam , beca u se th e fi n a l i t it a nd
“
g r a r e n o t w ri t ten w i th thei r fu l l forms . Bu t some few worksha ve been p ri n ted, i n which , by a free use o f a si gn ca l l ed vir ama
( see below ,the i ndividua l words a r e sep a ra ted . I n tr a nslite
ra ted tex ts there i s n o good rea son fo r p ri n ting oth erwise tha nw i th all the words sep a ra ted .
7 . Un der A. Vowel s combin ed w i th p recedi ng consona n tsa r e wri tten a s fol l ows1 . a : Short a ha s n o wri t ten sign a t all; the consona n t-s igni tsel f imp l i e s a fol lowing a
,u nl es s som e other vowel - sign i s
a tta ched to i t (o r el se the virama see below , Thusthe consona n t- sign s given a bove a r e rea lly the signs for ka ,
kba,ca
, cha , etc . (a s fa r a s“
3 ha ) .
2. a : $1 kit . i n ca . HT dba etc .3 . i a nd a: fig; ki . fir p i . fi r di n
‘
. an kt . t’
fi pz. vi} di e.
The bo ok a bove, turning to the l eft o r to the righ t , i s b i s torica l ly the essen tia l pa rt of th e cha ra cter , having been origina l ly
I n troduction .
th e whol e o f i t ; th e bo oks were only la ter p rolonged , so
a s to rea ch all th e way down beside the conson a n t . Observetha t th e i -hooks a n d th e u -hooks , resp ectively a bove a nd
below the l in e, a r e a na l ogou s i n tu rn i ng to the l eft for th eshort vowel a nd to th e right for the l ong.
4. u a n d it : 5 kn . q cu . Ed bu . i kfi . i on . 31 b . Ow i ngto the necessi t i es o f combina t ion
,con sona n t a nd vowel - sign
a r e sometim es di sgu i sed ; thus , g da, ii an ;
‘
Q r u , Q m ;“
go r hu
, 3“
1127.
5 . r a nd i“
:
i ikr . Ep r . kf . a i f . W i th the h- sign
,E
the vow el - hook i s u sua l ly a tta ched to th e middl e ; thus ,E hr . 6. 1:
7 . Diphthongs . e : E Ice. fi p s. a ye. at : at ka i . Watt.
0 : fl ko .
‘
Jfi‘ bho . (in : a
t
)”
kau .
“
(RTau .
I n some pri nted texts th e sign s for o a n d an a r e sepa ra ted ,the a . or being p l a ced over the consona n t-sign , a nd no t over th e
p erpend icu la r str oke ; _
thus, Q Tko, fi t kau .
8 . A con sona n t-sign m ay be m ade to signi fy th e sound o f
tha t con sona n t a l on e , wi thou t a n a dded vowel , by wri ting ben ea thi t a strok e ca l l ed the m’
rama res t ’, thus, ask, g h, g d .
Stri ctly, the vi rama shou ld be u sed only a t the en d of a sen ten ce ;but i t i s often used by scribes
,o r i n pr i n t, i n the middl e o f a word
o r sen tence , to a void awkwa rd or d ifficu l t combina ti on s ; thu s ,
m lidbkz’
lt,m li tsu .
9 . Under B . The combina t ions of consona n ts a r e i n gen era ln o t difficu l t. The perp endi cula r a nd horizonta l l i n es a r e commonto a lmos t all; a n d i f two o r m ore a r e to b e combi ned , th e fol low i ngmethod is pursued . The cha ra cteri s ti c pa rt o f a consona n t- signtha t i s to be a dded to a nother i s tak en (to the exclus i on of the
p erpendi cu la r o r of the horizon ta l framing - l i n e , or o f both) , a nd
they a re put together a ccording to conven ience, ei ther side by side,
6 I n troduction .
thus con ta i n ing r a s i ts firs t m ember is followed by o n e of thevowel s i , i , e
,0, at, (in
, wi th o r withou t a n a sa l symbol , th e 7'
sign must s ta nd a t the extreme right ; thus , af rke, a?rko ,‘
éfi rkau ,
fail“
rkz’
, all“rki
, éfi rkanz, afifi t rkansz‘
, zfl‘ rbhi ri i .
2 . I f p ronoun ced a fter a nother con son a n t o r consona nts, r i si ndica ted by a sla n ti ng strok e below
,to the l eft ; thu s , ‘
qgr a , 11 pm ,
3 er a, 31
? dr a . A n d, wi th modifica ti on s of the preceding consona n ts ign l ike thos e n oted a bove
, a tr a, 3 7 p m. I n the middl e o f a
group , r ha s the same sign a s a t the end ; thu s, yrga ,“
g srva .
3 . W hen r i s to be combined w i th a foll owing a; r , i t i sth e vowel which i s wri tten i n fu l l
,with i ts i ni tia l cha ra cter
, a nd
the consona n t i n subordi na tion to i t ; thu s , rgr , fi‘
ifi fa n irg'tz
’
.
14. Combina ti on s o f three, fou r , or even fi ve consona nts (thisla tter excess ively ra re) a r e m ade a ccording to the same rules ; thus,fl ttva
, 3 1 ddbya , g} dvya , 3Tdrya , YE psva ,‘
EQ'
tsya , w pcya ,
Ba stbya gnksva
, g] strya , F8 21"
tsmya FQRI r tsnya .
15 . Both MSS . a nd typ e-fonts d i ffer considera bly i n thei rm a na gemen t o f consona nt-combina ti ons, bu t a l i ttl e p ra cti ce w i l lena bl e o n e who is thoroughly fami l ia r with the simp l e s ign s andwi th the p ri n cip l es o f combi na tio n to decipher , a s well a s to m akefo r himsel f, allsuch group s .
16 . A sign (S) ca l led the a vagr a ha , or ‘sepa ra tor ’, i s used i n
p rinted texts to ma rk the el is ion o f i n i t i a l a a fter fina l 6 p r 0 (seebelow
,thu s Flqa
'
v'
t te‘br a c a n . Bu t some texts ,
especia l ly those p ri n ted i n I ndia , disp ense w i th th i s s ign .
I n o ur tra n sl i tera tion thi s sign w i l l be represen ted by th ei nverted comma , a s i n th e examp l e just given . I n th e MSS . th e at
i s a l so u sed a s a hyphen , a n d som etimes a s a m a rk o f hia tu s .
17 . The sign 0 i s used to m a rk a n omission o f someth ing ea si ly ;u nders tood (whether from the context , o r from p revi ous knowledge), l
I n troduction . 7
and thu s becomes a m a rk o f a bbrevia tion ; thus , t rai t 0“
oaa
ga ta s- tam - ten a , i . e . ga tam ga ten a etc.18 . The only sign s of punctua tio n a r e a nd ll
19 . The numera l figu res a r e
I n combina ti on , to express la rger numbers , th ey a r e u sed p reciselya s a r e Europ ea n digi ts ; thus , Q 3 24, 485
, S 630 7620 . Thissys tem o f nota ti on origin a ted i n I ndia , a nd wa s brought to E urop eby the Ara bs , who ca ll i t the I ndia n sys tem , a s we s tyl e i t theAra bic .
20 . I n wri ti ng Sa nskri t the H i ndus gen era l ly begi n a t the l efto f the l e tter
,a n d m ake th e horizonta l top - stroke la s t ; thu s , 7 , ‘I
,
i t; 9 , 31: a ; ch, 3 . Bu t often the horizon ta l strok e i s ma defirs t
, a nd th e p erp end icu la r s trok e a dded wi thou t ra i s i ng the p enfrom the pap er ; thus , 1 , a ; 1 , 3 !
System of Sounds : Pronunciation.
21. The Sa nskri t i s us ed i n I ndia to th i s day very mu ch a s
La ti n w a s used i n E urop e i n th e p revi ou s cen tury : i t i s a comm onmedium o f comm u n ica ti on be tween the l ea rn ed
,b e their na ti ve
tongu es wha t they m ay, a n d i t i s n o t th e verna cu la r of a ny di s tric twha teve r . Hence i t i s no t s tra nge tha t the p r on un cia tio n '
o f Sa n
skr i t words va ri e s grea tly amon g schola rs from d iff eren t pa rts ofI ndia ; a nd p roba bly n o on e sys tem rep resen ts th e true a ncie n tmode o f u t tera nce w i th mu ch exa ctn ess .
l. Vowels.
22 . A . The a,i, and u -vowels. These thre e occur both short
a nd long, a nd a re to b e p ron oun ced i n the ‘ I ta l ia n ’ m a nn er a s
i n (or -)ga n a nd f a ther , p in a nd p ique, p ulla nd rule, resp ectively . The
8 I ntroduction .
a vowel s ta nds i n n o r ela t io n o f kindre'd wi th a ny o f th e cla sseso f consona nta l sounds . Bu t the i vowel i s d is tin ctly p a la ta l , a nd
the u-vowel a s di sti n ctly l ab ia l .23 . B . The r and l- vowels. Both o f these a re p la in ly th e
resu l t o f a bbrevia ting syl labl es con ta i n in g a‘
g r o r i t I a l ong w i tha nother vowel : r i s to b e sounded l ike th e r e i n th e E ngl i sh fibr e,I l ike le i n a ble.
24. C . The di phthongs. 1 . The e a nd 0,which a r e a lways
l ong, shou l d rece ive the l ong e a nd o - sou nds of th e E ngli sh theya n d bon e, w i thou t true d iph thonga l cha ra cter . I n th ei r origin , bothwere doubtl ess i n th e m a i n p ure diph thongs (e a i
,o a u) ;
but they lost thi s cha ra cter a t a very ea rly p eriod.
2. The at a nd (in a re sp oken l ik e th e a i i n Engl i sh a isle a nd a n
i n Germ a n B a um (ou i n E nglish house) ; tha t i s , a s pu re d iphthongsw i th l ong p rior elem en t . They were origina l ly , doub tless , d i s ti n
guished from 6 a nd 0 only by the l ength of the firs t el em en t .
11. Consonants.
25 . A . M a tes. I n ea ch seri es o f mu tes there a r e two surdm emb ers
,two sona nts , a nd o n e n a sa l (a l so sona n t) ; e . g .
,i n th e
lab ia l s eri e s,th e surds p a n d p h, th e sona n ts b a nd bh
,a nd th e
son a n t m .
26 . The firs t a nd th ird m embers o f ea ch seri es a re th e ordi na rycorresp onding surd and sona n t m a tes of E urop ea n la ngua ges ; thus,k a nd g , t a nd d , p a nd b.
27 . Nor is th e cha ra cter of th e n a sa l a ny m ore doub tfu l .W ha t in i s to p a nd b, o r n i s to t a nd d , tha t i s a lso ea ch o therna sa l to i ts own seri e s of mu tes : a sona n t exp u l s i on o f brea th i n toa nd through the n os e, while the m ou th orga ns a r e i n the m u tecon ta ct .
28 . The second a nd fourth o f ea ch ser ies a re a sp i ra tes ; thus ,
I n troduction . 9
besi d e th e su rd mu te 10 we have th e corresponding su rd a Sp ira te
Ich, a n d b eside th e so n a n t g , th e corresp onding a sp i ra te gh. I t i s
u su alam ong E urop ea n schola rs to p ronou nce both cla s ses o f a Sp ira te s a s th e correspondi ng non a sp i ra tes wi th a very cl osely following h ; e . g .
,ih. n ea rly a s i n boa thouse, p h a s i n hap haza rd, dh
as i n ma dhouse. This i s ina ccu ra t e so fa r a s th e sona n ts a re concern ed ; but the ques ti on of thei r origina l s ound i s o n e o f grea tdi fficu l ty
, a nd s ti l l unsettl ed .
29 . The a sp i ra tes a r e no t doubl e l et ters .The severa l mu te-seri es w i l l n ow b e taken up i n deta i l .30 . 1 . Guttur als : k, kh, g , gh, 73 . These a r e th e ordina ry
E ngl i sh 10 a n d 9 (“ ha rd - sounds
,w i th their corresp ond ing a sp i ra tes
a nd na sa l ; the la s t, l ike ng i n singing.
31. 2 . Pala tals : 0 , ch, j , j h, ii . This whole seri es i s deriva t ive ,being gen era ted by th e corrup t ion o f origi na l gu t tu ra l s . (The pa la talm u te c a n d the s ib i la n t 9 often represent two su ccessive s tageso f corrup t i o n o f k , th e correspond ing degrees of corrup tio n o f 9 a re
both rep resen ted by j .) F o r th i s rea son th e euphon i c trea tm en to f th e p a la ta l s i s i n m a ny resp ects p ecu l ia r . The p a la ta l mu tesc a nd j a r e p ron ou nced w i th th e compoun d sounds o f E ngl i shoh a nd j , a s i n chur ch a nd j udge. See a l so 28 .
32 . 3 . L i n guals : t, th, 4, ah , n. The lingua l m a tes a r e sa i dto b e u ttered w i th the tip of the tongu e tu rn ed up a nd drawn ba cki n to th e dom e o f the p a la te , somewha t a s the Engl ish (o r ra therAm eri ca n) smooth r
, e . g . i n very i s p ronou nced . I n p ra cti ceE urop ea n Sa nskri tists m ak e n o a t temp t to distingu i sh th em fromth e den ta l s : t i s p ronou nced l ik e t, d l ik e d, a n d so o n .
33 . 4. Dentals: t, th
,d, dh, n . These a r e pra ctica l ly th e
equ iva l en ts o f o ur so - ca l l ed den ta l s t, d, n .
*
Bu t th eH indu s genera l ly use l i ngua l s to represen t the Engl i shdenta l s ; thus , m a landana
‘London .’
l0 I n troduction .
34. 5 . Lab ials : p , p h , b, bh, m . These a r e exa ctly the equ ivalen ts o f the E ngl i sh p , b, m .
35 . B . Sem ivowels : y, r , l, v. 1 . The pa la ta l s emivowel ysta nds i n the closes t re la tio nship wi th the vowel i (short o r l ong) :the two excha nge wi th one a nother i n ca ses i n numera ble . Very
proba bly the Sa nskri t 3; had everywhere m ore o f a n i- cha ra ctertha n o u r y.
3 6 . 2. The r i s cl ea rly a l i ngua l sound . I t thus resemblesth e E ngl i sh smooth r , a nd l ike th i s seems to ha ve been un tr illed.
37 . 3 . The li s a sound o f den ta l pos i tion , qu i te a s i n E ngl i sh .
38 . 4. The la bia l v i s p ronounced a s Engl ish o r F rench v bythe modern H indu s egrgpp t gwdhen p receded by a
_ c onspp gnt
(excgptfl the sam e syllgble , En l i h w ;a n d E uropea n schola rs fol low the same p ra ctice (w i th o r withou tthe same excep t ion) . But s tri ctly the v s ta nds rela ted to a n u
vow el p recisely a s y to a n i -vowel : tha t is, i t i s a w- sound i n theE ngli sh sense , or p erhap s more l ik e the on in F rench ou i . Theru l es o f Sa nskri t euphony a ff ecting thi s sound , a nd the n ame “ semivowel” ,
ha ve n o app l i ca tion excep t to su ch a w- sound : a v sound
(G erma n w) i s n o semivowel , bu t a sp i ra nt, l ike the E ngl ish ihsou nds a n d f .
39. C . Sib ila n ts : c, s, s. 1 . The s i s o f p la in cha ra cter : a
den ta l,a nd exa ctly l ike the E ngl ish 8 (a s i n lesson n ever a s
i n ca se) .
40 . 2. The s i s the s ibi la nt p ronou nced i n the l ingua l position .
I t i s , therefore, a k i nd o f sh-sound , a nd by E uropea ns is p ronounceda s ordina ry Engl i sh sh
,n o a ttemp t being made to give i t i ts
proper l ingua l qu a l i ty .
41. 3 . The 9 i s by all na tive au thori ti es described a s pa la ta l .I t i s the usua l sh sou nd of E ngl ish , though the H i ndu s a r e sa i d
I ntroducti o n . 1 1
to Sp eak i t s om ewha t differen tly n owa days . By Europ ea n s i t i sva riou s ly p ronounced p erhap s oftener a s 8 tha n a s sh .
42 . Al l three sib i la n ts a re a lways surd .
43 . D . Asp ir at ion : h . This i s u sua l ly p ronou nced l ike th eord ina ry Eu rop ea n surd a sp i ra t i on h . Bu t i ts true va l ue i n th eeuphony of the la ngua ge i s tha t of a sona n t . I t is no t a n origi na lsound o f the la ngua ge
,bu t comes i n m os t ca ses from a n older gh,
i n som e few ca ses from dh o r bh. I t app ea rs to in clude i n i tselftwo stages o f corrup t ion of gh z one correspondi ng wi th tha t o f kto c
,th e oth er wi th tha t of k to c.
.44 . E . Vi sarga : h. The h app ea rs to be m erely a surd brea thi ng
, a fi na l h sou n d (i n the E u rop ea n sen se o f h) , u ttered i n th ea rti cu la ting p os i tion o f th e p receding vowel . The visa rga i s n o torigin a l , bu t a lways a mere subs ti tute for fi na l 8 o r r .
45 . F . Anusvar a . The a nusva'
r a,it or in
,i s a n a sa l sound
l a ck i ng th a t cl osure of the orga ns wh ich i s requ i red to m ak e an a sa l m u te ; i n i ts u ttera nce there i s na sa l reson a nce a l ong wi thsome d egree o f op enness o f th e mou th .
’
E urop ea n schola rs givethe a n usvar a th e va lu e o f the n a sa l i n th e F rench - a n
,- on
,- eh ,
- i a,
etc . , which is a mere na sa l col ori ng o f th e p receding vowel .46 . Two d iff eren t s ign s , 3. a n d i i , a r e u sed i n the M SS . to
i ndica te th e a nusvar a . Most commonly is emp l oyed ; fl w i llno t ofte n be m et wi th i n p rin ted tex ts , excep t to ma rk the cha ngeo f a na sa l mu te to a n usvc
’
i r a before a fol low i ng semivowe l , p a rt icula rly 1; thus , may Gra m tafflla bdhan . C f . tag.
47 . I t i s conven ien t i n tra nsl i tera t io n to d i s ti ngu i sh the a ssim ils ted m (i n allca ses) by a specia l s ign i ii , from the a nusvara o f
m ore indep enden t origi n , represen ted by it .
I ? I ntroduction .
Light and Heavy Syllables.
48 . F o r m etrica l pu rp oses syl la bles (no t vowels) a re dis
ti nguished a s‘hea vy ’ a nd ‘l ight ’. A syl la ble i s hea vy if i ts vowel
i s long,or short a nd fol lowed by m ore tha n o n e consona n t (“ l ong
by Visa rga a n d a nusvar a a r e here cou nted a s ful l consona n ts . The a sp i ra ted m u tes
,o f course
,do pa t' co un t a s doub le
l etters .
Changes of Sounds. Guna and Vrddhi.
49. The cha nges to which both the vowels a n d the consona n tso f Sa nskri t a r e subj ect a r e very num erou s . Among th e vowelcha nges , the m ost regu la r a nd frequen t a r e the so - ca ll ed guna a nd
vgrddhi , which a r e o f frequ en t occu rrence i n der iva tion a nd i nflection .5 0 . The fol low i ng tabl e exhibi ts these cha nges :
5 1. Theoretica l ly the cha nges of T wou l d co in cide wi th th oseo f r, a n d the vrddhi o f ! wou l d be dl; but a ctual ca ses of thes ea r e qu i te u nknown . The guna of li s al (jus t a s tha t o f r is a r) ,
but i t occu rs on ly i n one roo t, klp . As wil l be seen i n the sequ el,
the guna - sound coi ncides wi th th e resu l t of the combina tio n o f
a n 3 1 a with the s imp l e vowel correspond ing to tha t guna ; thu s , 3 1 acombi nes wi th a fol lowing 3: i o r i 5 in to ‘
Q 6, which i s a l so the
guna o f { i a nd i i . The vrddhi , i n l ike ma n ner, i s ide nticalw i th the resu l t o f combin i ng a n 3 1 a wi th the corresponding
guna ; thus , 3 ! a comb in es with a fol lowing 11 6 i n to fi at, the
vrddhi o f 1 i a nd i . F o r the p resent the ta ble i s to be lea rnedo u tright .
5 2. In ”
all guna ti ng proce sses 3 a rema i n s uncha nged o r ,
14 I ntroducti on .
Accent.
5 6 . The phenom ena o f a ccen t a r e , by the H indu gramm a rianso f alla ges a l ike , described a nd trea ted a s dep ending o n a va ria tio no f ton e or p i tch ; of a ny d ifference o f s tress i nvolved, they m a ken o a ccoun t . These a ccen ts a r e m a rked only i n certa i n Vedic texts ,a nd emp loyed only i n their reci ta tion , wherea s th e a ccen ts u sednowa days by H i ndus i n the p ronu ncia t io n o f Sa nskri t (a n d l eftundenoted i n writing) a r e m a i nly ictu s-a ccen ts , i . e . va ria tions o fs tress . The p ri ncip les of the la tter system wil l be given i n a n
a pp endix . The older system o f a ccen ts ha s grea t etymologica l im
p orta nce ; the la tter none wha tever ; a n d only th e ol der systemwil l b e referred to i n the fol lowing . Here i t willbe enough to sta t etha t th e p rima ry tones o r a ccen t-p i tches o f the older sys tem a re
two : a higher, or a cu te ; a nd a low er , o r gra ve . A third,ca l led
sva r i ta,i s a lways o f seconda ry origin , being ordina rily the resu lt
o f a ctu a l combi na t io n o f a n a cu te vowel a nd a gra ve vow el i ntoo ne syl la ble . I t i s uniformly defined a s comp ou nd i n p i tch , a un iono f higher a nd l ow er ton e w i th i n the l imits of a singl e syl lab l e . I t
is thu s iden tica l i n physica l cha ra cter wi th the G reek a nd La ti nci rcumflex , a nd fu l ly en ti tled to be ca l l ed by the same name .W hen ever, i n the sequ el , a ccent i s m en tioned , withou t fur ther defi n i tio n ,
the a cu te a ccen t i s to b e u nders tood ; a nd i t w i l l b e design a ted by the ordi na ry a cu te sign .
Conjugation of Verbs.
5 7 . The Sa n skri t verb exhib i ts the closes t a na l ogy wi th tha to f Greek ,
being developed i n ten se -sys tem s , a s ou tgrowths o f certa i ntense- s tems . I n the o lder s tage of the la nguage , i . e . i n the so
ca l led Vedi c p eriod, the moda l ramifica ti on s o f ea ch tense - stema r e a s numerou s a s i n Greek ; but i n the la ter stage, th e Sa nskri t
p rop er (a l so ca l l ed the cla ss ica l la nguage), these ou tgrowths ha ve
I n troducti on .
b een l opp ed o ff to so very grea t a n exten t tha t w i th o n e i nsignifica n t excep ti on , the preca t ive o r a ori s t Op ta t ive, on ly the p resen tsystem stil l re ta i n s a ny moda l va ri ety wha tever .
5 8 . There i s a simp l e o r ord i na ry conj uga ti on o f verba l roots ,whi ch w e ca l l p r ima r y ; a n d there a r e certa i n more o r l ess fu l lydevelop ed secon da ry o r de r ivative conj uga ti on s5 9. Vo i ces. There a r e two vo ices , a ctive a nd middle , whi ch extend
throughou t th e whol e system o f conjuga ti on . F o r the p resen tsys tem a l on e th ere i s a Specialp a ssive i nflection ; the m iddl e formsou ts ide tha t sys tem ,
a n d sometimes even withi n i t , a r e l ia bl e tobe u sed l ikew i s e i n a pa ss ive sense . An a ctive form i s ca l l ed bythe H i n du gramma ria n s p a r a sma i p a dam ‘word fo r a nother’; am i ddl e form
,atma ne p a dam
‘word fo r one’s sel f.’ Some verbs a r e
conjuga ted i n both voices, others i n on e only ; sometimes some ofth e tenses a r e i nflected only i n on e voice, others only in the othervoice , o r i n both ; o f a verb u su a l ly i nflected i n o n e voice Sp ora d i cform s o f th e oth er occu r ; a nd sometimes the voice d i ffers a s theverb is compou nded w i th certa i n p rep os i ti ons.
60 . Per son s an d Number s. There a r e three p ersons : firs t,second , a n d th i rd ; a nd, a s w i th substa n tives , a dj ectives , a nd p r o
n ouns , three numbers : si ngu la r, dua l , a nd p l ura l . All th es e p erson san d numbers a r e m a de from every ten se a n d m ode—excep t tha tthe firs t p erson s o f the imp era tive a r e rea l ly subj unctive forms .
61. The na tive gramma ria n s den ote a s the firs t p erso n Wha twe ca l l th e th ird ; a nd a s we a re w on t to sp eak o f the verb Ae’ym,th e verb t’pxona z, the verb amo
,etc .
,so th e H i ndus use for i ns ta nce
unfi t bhdva ti (3rd s ing . p res . indie . of Vbhil) to s ign i fy th e whol esys tem o f verba l form s from tha t root , s ince “Hf? heads th e l i s to f form s i n the na tive gramma r
,a s Myer, o r i’pXoMm ,
o r a mo,does
i n Greek o r La ti n . The H i ndus even m ake substa n tives o ut o f
16 I n troduction .
such ca tchword form s , a nd inflect them a ccording to the n eeds o fexpression .
62 . I n th e fol lowing, the conjuga tion -cla ss o f verbs w i l l b ei nd ica ted by the 3rd si ng. p res . ind . , p la ced in pa ren thesi s a fterthe roo t ; thu s, 3! Nut (“Ra fa bha
'
va ti) .
63 . Ten ses 31d modes. The schem e o f tenses a n d modes p u tforth by the H indu s hol ds good only for the la ter l a nguage, a ndeven there u tterly confou nds the idea s o f m ode a nd tense .
64. The only logicala rra ngem en t o f th e modes a nd tenses i nSa nskri t i s shown i n the fol low ing ta bl e (which i ncludes only thecla ssi ca l sp eech) :
I . Pr esen t -System : a . I ndica tive . b. I mperfect . c. I mp era tive .d . Op ta tive . e. Pa rticip l e :
I I . Per fect-System . a . I ndica t ive . b . Pa rticip l e .I I I . Aor i st Systems (of trip l e forma ti on) . a . I ndica t ive . b . Op
ta tive (sometim esIV. Futur e System s.A . Sibi la n t F uture . a . I ndica tive . b . Preteri t (=
c . Pa rti cip l e .B . Pe r iphra sti c F u ture . a . I ndi ca tive .
65 . The tenses here d isti ngu i shed a s imp erfect, p erfect, a nd
a or i s t receive those n ames from thei r correspondence i n m ode o fforma tio n with tenses so ca l l ed i n other la ngua ges o f the family,esp ecia l ly i n Greek , a nd n ot a t all from a ny diff erences o f tim edesigna ted by them . I n no p eri od o f the Sa nskri t la n guage i sthere a ny exp ress i on o f imperfect o r p lup erfect tim e nor o f
p erfect time , excep t i n the older la nguage , where th e “a oris t ” has
th is va lu e ; i n the la ter sp eech , imp erfect, p erfect, a n d a orist (o fra re use) a re so m a ny undiscrim i na ted pa s t ten ses o r p rete rits .
I n troducti on .
‘
VerbalAdjectives and Substantives.
66 . Pa r t i ciples . The p a rti cip l es bel onging to th e ten se-system shave b een a l rea dy i nd ica ted i n th e tabl e a t § 64. There i s
,besides
,
a p a r ticip l e formed d i rectly from th e root o f the verb,whi ch i s
p reva i l ingly o f pa st a nd p a ssive (sometim es n eu ter) m ea n i ng .
Moreover, futu r e p assive pa rti cip l es , o r ger undives, o f s evera ld iff eren t forma t i on s
, a r e m a de,but withou t con nectio n with the
fu ture - s tem s .67 . I nfi n i tive. The cla ss i ca l Sa n skri t ha s a si ngl e i nfinit ive .
I t i s rea l ly a n a ccusa t ive ca s e o f a verba l n oun,havi ng n othing
wha tever to do with the tense-systems .68 . Gerund. A so -ca l l ed gerund, o r absolu tive , i s esp ecia l ly
frequ en t, a n d i s,l ike the infin i t ive
,a stereotyp ed ca s e - form (in
strum en tal) o f a deriva tive verba l n oun . I ts va lu e i s tha t o f a ni ndecl ina bl e a ctive p a rti cip l e , with indeterm i na te, but oftenes t p a s t,temporalforce .
Secondary Conjugationsi
69. The seconda ry conj uga ti ons a r e a s fol lows : 1 . Passive ;2 . I n ten sive ; 3 . Desider a t ive 5 4. Causa tive. I n thes e
,not the
s imp l e roo t , bu t a conj uga t io n- stem,underl ies the whol e system
o f i nflection s . Y et i n them alli s p la i n ly vi sibl e the cha ra cter o fa p resen t- system ,
exp a nded i nto a m ore o r l ess com p l ete conjugation ; the pa ss ive i s pa lp a bly a presen t- sys tem . Compa re 5 8—5 9 .
70 . U nder the same general hea d belong : 6 . Denom i nativeconjuga tion
,which resu l ts from the convers i o n o f n oun - stem s, both
substa n tive a nd adj ective,i n to conjuga tion- stems ; 7 . Compound con
j uga tion,resu l ting from th e pr efixi o u o f p reposi ti ons to roots , o r
from the a ddi tion of a uxi l ia ry verbs to nou n -stem s ; a nd 8 . Per iph r a st icconjuga ti o n, from the l ooser combi na t ion o f auxi l ia ri es w i th verbaln ouns a nd adj ect ives.
Perr y , San skr i t Pr imer .
18 I ntroducti on .
71. The chara cteri sti c o f a p rop er ( i . e . fini te o r p erson al)verb -form i s i ts p ersona l endi ng. By thi s a lone i s determin ed i tscha ra cter a s rega rds p erson a nd number , a nd i n p a rt a l so a s rega rdsmode a nd ten se . Bu t th e distincti on s o f mode a nd tens e a r e
ma i n ly m a de by the forma tion o f mode a nd tense—s tems,to which ,
i ns tea d o f to th e ba re roo t, th e persona l endi ngs a r e a ppended.
Conjugation Classes.
72 . Of the whol e conjuga ti on , th e p resen t - system i s the im
p orta n t a nd promin en t p a rt . I ts forms a r e very mu ch more froqu en t tha n those of all the other sys tems together . As there i sa l so grea t va ri ety i n th e m a n ner i n whi ch di ff eren t roots form thei r
p resen t- s tems , th i s , a s bei ng the ir most consp i cuous d i fference , i smade the ba s is of thei r p rin cipa l cla ssifica tion ; a nd a verb i s sa idto be o f th i s or tha t conjuga t ion , o r cla ss, a ccordi ng to th e w ay
i n wh ich i ts pr esen t ~stem i s made.73 . Of these conjuga t i on - cla sses th ere a r e n in e, i n cl udi ng th e
p a ssive, wh i ch i s rea lly a p resent- sys tem only . The firs t fi veexhibi t co incidences enough to j ustify their i n cl us io n i nto on e co n
juga tion , a nd the rema i n ing four wi l l compose l ikewise a s econdconjuga tion . The chief di s ti nction s between th e two group s a r ea s fol lows
74. I n the fi r st, the cla sses have i n common , a s thei r fundam enta l cha ra cteri sti c, a sh i ft of a ccen t : the to ne i s n ow up on the
p ersona l ending, n ow upon the roo t o r the cla ss - sign . Along w i ththi s goes a va ria tion in th e stem i tself, whi ch ha s a stronger
,or
ful ler,form when th e a ccen t rests up on i t, a nd a weaker
,or bri efer
,
form when th e a ccen t i s o n the ending. W e di s tingu i sh thes eforms a s the s trong a nd the w eak s tem -forms resp ectively.
75 . I n the second conj uga ti on , o n the contra ry, the a ccen tha s a fixed p la ce , rem a i n ing a lways upon the sam e sylla b l e o f the
I n troducti on . 19
stem ,a nd n ever b ei ng sh ifted to the e ndi ngs ; a nd th e disti n cti o n o f
s trong a nd weak forms i s u nknown . Moreover, th e presen t-stemo f every verb i n th e fou r cla sses o f th is conjuga ti o n ends i n 3 1 a .
There a r e a l so o ther po in ts o f difference .76 . The cla ssifica ti on cu rrent among th e Hi ndu
,a nd h i therto
among the Europea n , gramm a ria n s comp ri ses ten conj uga ti oncla sses
,a rra nged a ccord i ng to n o i n tel l igibl e p ri n cip l e wha tever .
The n a tive “ ten th cl a ss ” i s rea l ly no p resen t-cl a ss a t all, but a
cau sa tive,i . e . a deriva tive conj uga ti on , which extends beyond the
l im i ts of the presen t- system . Pr obably th e fa ct tha t by n o mea n sall conjuga tio n- s tems formed by th e ca u sa t ive s ign had rea lly a
ca usa tive va lue i ndu ced th e n a tives to a dop t su ch a p resen t cla ss .Th e H i ndu s ch em e a l so qu i te om i ts th e p a ssive .
77 . TheH i ndu firs t,six th
,fou rth
, a nd ten th cla sses form the soca l l ed firs t conjuga t io n of thei r sch eme
,which corresponds, excep t a s
rega rds th e t en th cla ss,with o ur second conjuga tio n . The rem a i nder
o f th e cla sses form the n a tives’ s econd conj uga ti on , which agreesi n the ma i n w i th o ur firs t .
78 . The cla sses a r e then a s follows
FirstIt “ ” M g
I . The r oot-cla ss ( second o r a d—cla s s , o f th e H i ndus) ; i ts
p resen t- s tem i s coi nciden t w i th th e root i ts el f ; thu s , a ged,‘ea t
’
;
i,
‘
go’; 5 1 dvis,
‘ha te ’.I I . The r edupli ca t i n g cla ss (th ird or hu - cl a ss) ; th e roo t i s
r edup l i ca ted to form the pres en t stem ; thu s , SISj uhu from Vi?hu ,‘ sa crifice ’; {31 da rk? from Vda, ‘give’.
I I I . The n a sal c la ss (seven th o r rudh- cl a s s ) ; a na sa l , extendedto the syl la bl e n a [na ] i n s trong form s , is i n serted before the fina lconsona n t of the root ; thus , “
( i t rundh (or “
(m r una dh) from
w r udh,
‘bi nder ’.
20 I n troducti on .
IV . a . The nu- class (fifth o r cu cla ss) ; th e syl la bl e a nu is
added to the root ; thu s , £13 sunu from V3 su,
‘
p ress .’
b . A very sma l l number o f roots (only ha l f-a -dozen) endin ga l ready i n a n
, a nd a l so on e very common a nd i rregu la rly inflectedroot no t so ending (3’hr , a dd 3 i t a l on e to form th e
p resent-s tem . This i s the eighth or ta n cla ss o f the H i ndu gramm a ria n s ; i t i s best ra nked a s a sub-cla ss , the u- cla ss ; thus , 773 ta nu
from V“ ta n,
‘s tretch .
’
V . The na cla ss (n in th o r kr i cla ss) ; the syl la bl e WT n ot (or,i n weak form s , 7h n
'
i ) i s a dded to the root ; thu s , W Tkr ina (o r
afiqfi‘ kr i ni ) from Va
’
fi kr i , ‘buy’. See note , p . 32.
Second Conjugation.
—éd (AA /é,
VI . The a - cla ss, or una ccen ted a - clpss (firs t o r bli tz-cla ss) ;the a dded cl a ss - sign is a s imp ly ; a nd th e root
,whi ch b ea rs the
a ccent,i s strengthened by guna throughou t , i f i t be capa bl e o f
tak ing guna (see 5 2 thus, Ha bha
'
va (through the i n termedia te stage bhd- a ) from V i bhu
,
‘be . ’
VI I . The a' class, or a ccen ted a c la ss (s ixth or tud cla ss) ;
thga ded cla ss- s ign is a, a s i n th e p receding cla s s ; bu t. i t ha s th e
a ccen t , a nd the u na ccen ted root i s not stre ngthened by guna ; thus ,
SS tuda' from V fig tud
,
‘ thru s t. ’
VI I I . The ya class (fou rth or div-cla ss) ; ya i s a dded to th eroot, which ha s the a ccen t ; thus , fi a t di vya from Vi i
-
1 div (by
the H i ndus given a s Q 3 ; div) ,‘
p lay .
’
IX . The p a ssive conjuga tion i s a l so p roperly a p res en t-systemonly
,having a cla ss-sign which i s not extended i n to th e other
systems ; though i t differs m a rk edly from the rema i n ing cl a ssesi n ha ving a sp ecific mea n ing, a n d i n being form abl e from alltra nsi tive verbs
,bu t wi th endings of the m iddle voice only. I t form s
22 I n troduction .
Declension.
83 . The decl ens io n o f substa n tives a nd tha t of a dj ectives correspond so closely tha t the two cla sses o f words m us t b e trea tedtogether . The pronoun s a nd num era l s , on the other ha nd , exhibi there a s i n th e k i ndred la ngu ages ma ny strik i ng p ecu l ia ri ti es .
84 . Number s a n d Gender s. There a r e three numbers , s i ngu la r,dua l
,a nd p lura l ; a nd the u sua l three genders , ma scu l in e , femin i n e ,
a nd n eu ter. The dua l i s u sed m uch more extens ively tha n i nGreek
,where i t a ppea rs i n a m oribund sta te .
8 5 . Ca ses . The ca ses a r e eight i n number, given gen era l ly i n thefol lowing order : nomin a tive , a ccusa tive , i nstrumen ta l , da t ive, a bla tive ,geni tive, l oca tive , a n d voca tive . The obj ect sough t i n th e a rra ngem en t i s s imp ly to set n ext to o n e a nother those ca ses w hi ch a r e
to a grea ter o r l ess ex ten t,i n o n e number o r a no ther
,iden tica l i n
form ; a nd, pu tt ing the n om i na tive firs t , a s l ea ding ca se , there i s
n o o th er order by which tha t obj ect cou ld be a tta i n ed.
F o r the u ses of th e ca ses i n deta i l s e e W h . 267—305 .
8 6 . The s tem s of substa ntives a nd adj ectives m ay fo r conveni encebe cla ssified a s fol lows : I . Stems in 3 1 a . I L Stem s i n { i a nd 3 u .
I I I . S tems i n an d, Q
‘
i,a n d
l
m n : namely, A . ra dica l s tems, a n d a
few others i nflected l ike them ; B . deriva tive stems . I V. Stem s i n
23 r (o r a t o r) . V . Stems i n cOn so n a n ts.
87 . S tr on g an d weak ca ses . I n s tems ending i n consona n ts,
a nd those i n a r (or 3 1K a r ) , there i s seen a d is tinctio n o f stemform i n differen t ca ses . Sometimes the stem - forms a r e two
,when
they a r e ca l led s trong a nd weak resp ectively ; sometimes three :s trong
,middl e
,a nd weakes t . As is the ca se w i th verbs , th i s va ria tion
o f s tem -form ofte n goes ha nd - i n -ha nd with a sh ift o f a ccen t .8 8 . I n the m a scu l i n e a nd feminin e , th e s trong ca ses a r e the
n om . a nd a cc . ,both si ng . a nd dua l , a n d the n om . pl. The rest
I n troduction . 23
a re weak ; or , i f there be th e d is ti nction o f three stem - forms,then
the i nstr . , da t. , abl. , gen . , a nd lo c . si ng .,th e gen . a nd l oc . da . ,
a nd the gen . pl. ( allof which tak e en d ings begin n ing w i th a vowel) ,a r e weakest ; a nd the in str. , da t. , a n d ab] . du .
,the i n str . , da t. , abl. ,
a nd l oc . pl. (whos e endings begin wi th conson a n ts) , a r e middl e .8 9 . I n the n eu ter
,th e only s trong ca s es a r e th e nom . a nd
a cc . pl. ; i f th ere be the tr ip l e di s ti nctio n , then th e n ow . a nd a cc .
s i ng. a r e middl e , a nd the sa me ca ses i n the dua l a r e weakest .Otherwise the ca ses a r e cla ssified a s i n the ma scul ine .
90 . Ca se-en di ngs . The n orma l schem e of ca s e - endings , a s
r ecogn iz ed by the n a tive gramma ria ns (a nd conven ien tly to bea s sum ed a s the ba s i s of sp ecia l descrip tion s), is th is
S ingul a r Dua l Pl ura lm . f. n . m . f. n . m . f. n .
N s m au a s
A . am d u a s
I d bhydm bhis
D e bhyam b’
hya s
Ab . a s bhyam bhya s
G . a s as am
L . i as su
I t a pp l i es en ti re to con sona n t-s tems , a n d to the ra di ca l d ivi s iono f i a nd u- s tems ; u nd to other vowel- stems
,wi th considera bl e
va ria t i on s a n d modifica tions . The endi ngs wh ich have a l most o r
q u i te u nbroken ra nge, through stems of allcla sses , a r e bhyam a nd
0 8 of the dua l,a nd bhis
,bhya s, am,
a nd su o f the p lura l .91. Pada-en di ng s. The ca se-endi ngs bhyam,
bhie,bhya s, a nd
cu i . e . those of the middl e ca ses a r e ca l l ed p a daend ings . The trea tmen t of s tem -fin als be fore them i s gen era l ly thesam e a s i n the combina tions o f words with o n e a nother.
24 Lesson I .
L esson I .
92 . Verb s. Pr esen t I nd i cat ive a ctive. Un a ccen ted a -cla ss. A
number o f roots conj uga ted i n this cla s s have m edia l short i t a .
I n a smuch a s“3 1 a i s i ts own guna ” , th ese roots merely a dd a n
“
a a
to form the p resen t-s tem ; e . g.
, Hg va d, p resen t-s tem 3g va
'
da .
The fina l 3 1 a of the s tem i s l engthened i n th e three first p erson s .
S ing . Dua l . Plura l .I . W va
'
dam i W E va’
dava s m va’
ddma s
2. W va'
da si m vdda tha s m va'
da tha
3 . W va’
a’a ti W vdda tas “ f in va
'
dan ti
93 . The ending o f the 3rd p lur. i s p rop erlywfi fl a n ti ; i t suff ersa bbrevia t ion , however, by the l oss o f i ts “
5 : a , i n verb s whose s temends i n a a .
94. As a h eavy sylla ble ending in a co n so n a n t ca n n o t’
be guna ted,a root l ik e Ghq j i v m akes i ts 3rd si ng. Gfiafi t j iva ti ; fi g
“
n ind
m akes fi g fi t n inda li , etc. See 5 3 .
95 . Euphon i c r ule. At the en d o f a word sta nding i n th efina l p osi tio n of a sen tence, or a lone ,
“
Q s a nd 1: r a lways becomevisa rga h; a nd gen era l ly a l so before i k
, g Ich, q p , q; p h, a n d
before s ib i la n ts [i t p, i t s, Q whether these sta nd i n the sameword
,o r a s i n i tia l i n the fol lowing word ; e . g . a3m B
ergva da ta s p un a r becomes a lways 3 3 71: Ha : va da ta h p un ah.
96 . F or ce of the p r esen t , The pres en t i ndi ca tive sign ifies1 . Presen t time . ‘
2. Imm edia te futurity . . 3 . Pa s t time,i n l ively
na rra tion (“ his torica l
Vocabulary 1.
Verbs to be con jugated like Hg va d
fl ca r (i n tr . ) go , wa nder, graze “I t p a t fa l l ; fly. M 7T (
I
p erfo rm , comm i t. a ilyaj sa crifice (c . a cc. p ers. ci éZ y o s fi x/t
m j i v l ive .
m\tyaj l eave, a ba ndon .
{g da h bu rn .
m dhav ru n .
instr . r ei) .
W r a hs p rotect .
Hg va d sp eak , say.
“
fl i t va s dwel l .
all é gw : é’
L/o IC C-
[
w M
W n am (i n tr.) bow,b end on e’s a?c a b (tr .) ca rry, bea r ; (in tr .
self ; (tr .) honor, reverence .tfi t p a c cook .
hence
when ce?m kuta s
why?
W 1 a dhund n ow
we: a dya to-daym avam so
,thu s
V! eva just, exa ctly
flow , blow , p roceed .
gin: pans p ra is e .
Adverbs and
m ta dd th en‘
qé'
a sa rva tr a everywhere
{fi r at so , thus“
a ca (po stpo s. ) -que
m ka tham how ?
“ 1 ka da when?
ya da when , i f
m sa da always
a tu but, however
m p una r aga in ; but
Lesson I . I I .
Exercise 1.
wa shm a a lm vgw t a lwa w fin s lww‘
( fi tfi t ls l na m v m vnv n u lm ain tai ne r as
aven ue lga zun fe t t la m fu wau le lguzvamzmo u
eefu t aa i ga-eiefi n aa tm ama zt asleéa ai’rafi n nqs u
15 .
*Today1 they a ba ndon”. 16. Now1 ye go 2. 17 . Always1 I
p r o te cta. 18 . We two bow1 a ga i n”. 19. W hi ther1 runnes t2 thou?
20 . We sa crifice. ‘
21. They two cook . 22. Ye a ba ndon . 23 . He
bu rn s . 24. N ow1we l ive2 . 25 . Ye two p ra i se . 26. Why
2do ye
hendl? 27. There1 they fly2. 28 . W here1 do ye dwell2?
Lesso n II .
97 . Verbs. Una ccen ted a cla ss, con t’d . Roots o f th is cla sswhich ebd i n a vowel , a nd con sona n t - roots not forming heavysyl lables guna te thei r vowel s i n form ing thei r p resen t-stems ;e . g . , fi f j i a n d fl a t form a j e
’
a nd a m?“
g“
dru a n d libhu form
98 . W i th the cla s s - sign a a, a fina l I ! e o f the guna ted roo t
u n i te s to form we: aya see § I5 9 ; so “HT 0 wi th W a becomes
an a va ; WI a r w i th is] a yi elds WI a r a . Thus, fa j i , 3rd si ng .
W fi j a'
ya-ti ; 31 M a Rafi?bha
’
va ti g sing: m sm a
’
r a ti .
99 . Roots i n consona n ts : gelbudh , 3 rd sing. m bddha ti ;
faa ci t, fiafi-j ce
'
ta ti ; 31 vys, a fi’fa va'
rsa ti .
The sup erior figures i ndi ca te the posi tion i n the Sa nskri tsen tence o f equ iva l en ts fo r the words so designa ted. By th i s i nd ica ti on is a voided the n ecess i ty o f a pp ly i ng euphoni c ru les whichha ve n o t ye t been s ta ted . The order of words i n Sa nskri t i s veryfree
,a nd ra rely i nfluences the mea n ing of th e sen tence. F rom the
figures the number o f words requ i red in the Sa nskri t sen tence w i llrea di ly be s een . W ords i n I ta l ics a re no t to be tra nsla ted .
Lesson I I . 27
100 . The roots Int ga i n a ndm yam m ake th e p resen t-s tem s
W ga’
ccha a nd W ya'
ccha”
.(7 K ed
101. The roo t Hg sa d,
‘si t’, m ak es th e p resen t- stem m sida .
The roo t 33 guh,‘hide ’
,m akes VET?! g i
‘
iha ti .
102 . Severa l roots i n fina l 3“ a form thei r p resen t- s tem by a
p ecu l ia r p rocess o f redup lica ti on ; thu s , Q T stha, 3 rd s i ng . fagfi i
tistha ti “ ; tn p d f‘
qafi rp z'
ba ti'
; m ghr a fa a fi rj ig/i r a te“
.
103 . M a sculin es an d N euter s i n a a .
a . M a sculiues : 23 deva,
‘
go d’. d o
Singula r . Dua l . Plura l .
a“ deva s 233i devau 2m devas
b . Neu ters : tfi'a p hala , ‘fru i t ’.N . m p halam m3lp hale
'
(a i) W p halan i
A cc.Vo c . ma p hala
As a ru l e, the gramma ria n s do n o t a l low ch to sta nd i n
tha t form a fter a vowel , bu t requ i re i t to be doub led , becomi ng3 ;
ceh . An a sp i ra te i s doubled by p refix ing the correspon dingan d
-
asp ira te . Cf. § 165 .
The den ta l s ibi lan t E 5.i s cha nged to the l i ngua l ”
EL s, i fim’m edia tel ggceded by , g ny -VQ W£ lfi sa ve 3 ! a a nd 3 11 a , or_ byN “ M
-ll
i k o r T ! u n les s th e {i s bg fi nalg o r.followedbn r . Thu s ,‘ fl h fl '“ W “ ,
fi tmfa ti—stha - ti becomes fi gfi -j tistha ti the cba n e o f V th tog3 ih a process of a ssimila t io n w i l l be exp la i ned below) . Sowfi rg agn i
-cu becomes Wm agn isu ; a nd $133 1 dha nus- d becomes
W dha nusa .
The n a sa l iza tion o f th e a l tera n t vowel , o r i n o ther words , i tsbei ng fol low ed by a n usvar a
,does no t p reven t i ts a l tering eff ect upon
the s ibi la n t ; thus , fi fi kue i hsi . And the a l tera tion takes p la cei n th e i ni tia l o f a n ending a fter the fina l { 8 o f a s tem
,whether
th e la tter b e rega rded a s a l so cha nged to 1 s o r a s converted i n tovisa rga ; thu s ,W ha vis
-
su o r { fa zg ha vih-su in s tea d of m
ha vis-cu .
Lesson II .
104 . F or ce of cases. 1 . The nomina tive i s ca sus subj ecti vus.
2. The a ccu sa tive i s ca sus obj ectivus, denoting chiefly the n ea rer o rdirect
,som etimes how ever the m ore remote, obj ect ; som etimes a l s o
the term inus a d quem ,a n d ex ten t o f t im e a nd sp a ce .
105 . Euphon i c combin at i on o f vowels.1 . Ela or i t“ d +w or W = 3 fli e . g . m a fil
‘
ga td ap i
ara‘
rfizga ta’
p i .
2 . W o rw + { i o r i i z uef
3 . 3 1 o r u o r a n z zfi o . e . g . WET-PER u ta
“fl ?! ga to’ta .
4. g m“
an + $ r a g a r . e . g . W ma ha w : rsih
wgfii : ma ha rsih.
5 .
“
at or an + u e o r ? a i ='
fi at. e . g. i lfl'
T—j—‘
QH
flfia ga ta i’va .
6. W o r an -l- fi o o r fi au = 3 fi an . e . g . firm -t afmfixosadhih z flfi qfi lt ga tdu ’
sa dhih.
106 . I t wil l b e the p ra cti ce everywhere i n th is work tosepa ra t e indep endent words i n tra nsl i tera tio n , bu t not i n the devan aga r i text ; a n d i f a n i n i tia l vowel o f a follow i ng word ha scoa l esced with a final of the p receding , thiswill be i ndica tedby a n apos troph e singl e i f the in i tial vowel be the shorter
,
doubl e if i t b e the l onger, of the two differen t in i tia l s which i nevery ca s e o f com bina tion yield the same resu l t. To a id the begin ner
,a p oin t will sometimes be p la ced , i n the deva n aga r i ,
u nder a l ong vowel formed by two coa l escing vowels ; thus , “
a fi
flTfi m agn in c’
z Wham .
Vocabulary ll.
Verbs, a cla ss ferj t (tr. a nd i n tr .) conquer , win .
m gam (ga'
ccha ti) go . g dru r u n .I ‘ 4
,0a
m ghra (j ighr a ti) sm el l .‘
ofi n i l ea d , gu ide .
Lesson I I I .
L esson III.107 . Ver bs. Accented d -cla ss. Roots of th is cla ss form thei r
p resen t-s tem by a ddi ng a n a ccen ted w a' to the root, whi ch is no t
guna ted . The inflectio n of these stems i s p recisely l ik e tha t o f
stems belonging to the p receding cla ss , excep t , a s to the pos iti ono f th e a ccen t ; thu s , fi ll ksip , p resent-stem fa n ksip d, p res . i nd .
fflmfiqksip ami , f im'
f‘
q ksip a'
si, fi qfi ksip a
'
ti,etc .
108 . Severa l roots in a; r of thi s cla ss (by the Hi ndus wr i ttenfiy fl
/
w i th a ; r ) form stems i n {T i r a ; e . g.
”3 5 kr , strew’, f
‘
qfl ffi k i rd ti .C C
The roots i n t i a nd‘
3 u a n d a“
u cha nge those vow el s i nto
“ j g a ndW uv,resp ectively , before th e cla ss - sign ; thus, ffl ksi , r
M 3 ksiydti ;fi§ su
, gafi-l‘
sa va’
ti a di m,m dhuva'
ti .
109 . F o r the root {E is,‘des ire ’
, {Q i ch i s rega rded as a
substi tu te in the p resen t-stem ; thu s , ( i f? i ccha'
ti 100 note) .
Likewise, a; 7 mak es i ts p res en t W f‘
d rccka’
ti a n d I t? p r a ch,
som e times given a s Q M ,m akes fi f
‘
a p rccba'
ti .
110 . A number o f roots fol low i ng thi s cla s s a re strength en edi n the presen t by a p enu l tima te n a sa l ; thus,m sic , presen t ind .
fa g fi -t siii cdti . The na sa l i s a lways a ssimi la ted i n cla s s to th efoll owing conson a n t ; thu s ”
EL 72 18 u sed before p a l a ta l s , i t beforeden ta l s, R m before labia l s ; a n d A i t before s ib i la nts a n d g k.
III . M a sculines and N euter s in 3 1 a , con t’d.a . Ma s cu l i nes
S i ngula r . Dua l . Plura l .I a ?! deven a m devdbhydm a devc
‘
i is
D 3 3 11 ] doc oyo gm devebhya s
b . Neu ters follow exa ctly the decl en sion of mascu l i nes i n theabove ca s es ; thus , W p halen a , W EI p haldya , etc .
Lesson I I I . 3 1
112 . F or ce of cases. 1 . The in strumenta l a nswers th e questi onswherewi th? a n d whereby? a n d expresses a ccompa n imen t, a gent,o r m ea ns . 2. The da t ive denotes the remoter obj ect
,a n d direction .
I t i s a l so u sed a s da tivus commodi ; very frequ en tly a l s o to d eno teend o r pu rpose . Sometimes (a nd oftenes t w i th copu la omi tted)i t i s p redi ca t ive , i n the sense o f ‘m akes for , tend s towa rd ’. 3 . Thea bla tive a nswers th e qu est ion whence?a nd very frequ en tly den otesca us e . 4. The geni tive i s ca sus a
-
alj ectivus, deno ti ng all kinds o f
belon gi ng (e . g . gen . subj ectiva s, objections, p a r ti tivus) . 5 . The LOca tive denotes the p la ce yvh en , a n a ction occurs .I t i s often u sed a bsolutely , i n a greemen t w i th ap a rticip l e expressedo r understood
,a s th e a bla tive i s u s ed i n La tin a nd the gen i tive
i n Greek .
Vocabulary m.
-class fa? sic ( si iica'
ti ) drip , drop ; i n n -19
{EL is (i ccha'
ti) wish , desire . moi sten .
fl krs (krsdti) p l ough . gi t sg'
j (srj dti) le t go ; crea te .
m ksip (ksip dti) hurl , ca st,“
a!“ (sprcdti) touch ; (in certa i nthrow . conn ecti on s) wa sh .
firm dip (dicdti) show , poin t o u t . a - cla ss
W Q PW h (pract i ti) ask , ask a bout 213m”: (gfiha ti . l01) h ide, concea l .a m fa}! vie (vicdti) en ter . fig sa d (sido ti , 101) si t.
Substanta sc. W ha sta ha nd .
W ka ta m a t . N ea t :
3176 kun ta sp ea r. ksetr a fiel d .
m bdla, chi ld , boy. W dha n a m oney, ri ch es .
a n) m drga road , way, s tre et. m 15 7790 1“ p l ough .
fi t?“ m egha cl oud . fi n visa poiso n .
a t pa ra a rrow. W sahba fo r tune,luck , happ in ess.
Lesson I I I . IV.
Exercise Ill.
W fit fi g la tw m fi tflm zts tm flfi
fi W lsl*
W m i l8 lm fi% ffl afi1
ga zltn m fua fa’
fi a z t é t ls
w z ztaa fasa t t ta a’
sfim e lafi m’
z‘
tfizm ao u
15 . The boy4 a sk s the m en1a bou t the roa d2 (am ) . 16. The
clouds1 drop4 wa ter3 on th e fi elds2 (lea ) . The two m en1go4
by two roa ds2 (in str .) in to the ci ty3 . 18 . The king4 gives?’ the two1 2
m en m on eyz. 19. The ma n ’s1 son s si t
4on m a ts
s. 20 . The ‘
gods4
give3 th e wa ter2 of the cloudsl. 21. W e wa sh3 (use 3131) both
ha nds2 wi th wa terl. 22. B oth m en
1 l ea d4 thei r son s2 (du al) home3
23 . The two boys3 p oin t ou t4 the roa d2 to the ci ty1 (gem ) .
Lesson IV .
113 . M a sculines in t i . wfi'
laym‘
,
‘fire ’
Singula i' . Dua l . Plura l .
D . i n?“97223? n
A fi g agn esM he
G W m agnyos
See n ote to 102 .
The denta l na sa l i t i t,when immedia tely fol lowed by a vowel
,
o r by Fl; 71 o r a m o r“
Q g o r a v,i s turned in to the l i ngua l
“ln i f preceded i n the sam e word by the l ingua l sib i la n t o r sem ivowelo r vowels i . c . by ELs,
‘
g r , fig r, o r“
a f : a nd this , n ot
Lesson IV .
114 . N euter s in 5. W var i,
‘wa ter ’
S ingu la r . D ua l . Plura l .N .
‘
érrrt c d r i arft mfi var in i m c ar i n i
A . 77 77 n
I . m udr ind“
a‘
l'
fm‘
rq vdr ibhydm aTrTfi iq var ibhis
D . a i fi var ine n m var ibhya s
Ab . m var in a s
G . n n‘
Q'
Tfim var inam
L . fi rm var ini m vc‘
i risu
u u azu
115 . Mgsculin e a nd n eu ter a dj ectives in t i a r e decl in ed l ikethe subs ta n tives a bove . Bu t neu ter a dj ectives (never substa n tives)m ay , i n the da t . a b] . gen .
,a nd l oc . si ng , a nd the gen . a nd 10 0 .
w “
dua l,substi tu te the corresp ondi ng forms o f m a scu l i n es .
116 . Euphon i c ch an ges of q s an d r . These two soundss ta nd to ea ch other i n the p ra cti ca l rela t ion , in extern alcombin a tion ,
o f cor resp o n ding/
surd“ a n d sona n t : i n cou n tl ess ca ses a 8 becomesr i n s i tua tion s r equlrlng o r fa vori ng the occurrence o f a sona n t ;
a nd,l es s often
,r becomes K s where a su rd i s requ i red . I n
i n terna l combina tio n the two a r e fa r l ess i n tercha ngea ble . The si s ex tremely common a s a n e tymologica l fina l , th e r not common .
117 . A . F i n a l Q s. 1 . Before a sona n t, ei ther vowel or conson a n t (excep t I r see below) , a s i s changed to the sona n t “
f r
unless,i ndeed
,i t b e p receded by w a or an a , thu s , m
only i f th e a l tering l e tter s ta nds immedia tely before them a sal,but
a t wha tever d1sta n c e before the la tter 1 t m ay be found : u nless,ln
deed there i n terven e a al tal(excep t a y) , a l i ng ua l , o r a dental.
rh us , vw‘i n n aga r eea mm ma rgen a 31mm p uep dm
’
See preceding no te .Per ry, Sa nsk ri t Pr imer .
34 Lesson IV .
Era agn is a tra becomes wfiqfi oga ir a tr a ; m {gfi l agn is
da ha ti becomesW ?! agn ir da ha ti . See a l so 95 .
118 . 2. F i na l W a s, before a ny sona n t consona n t o r before
i n i tia l shor t 3 1 a , i s cha nged to aft 0 a nd th e in i tia l "
5 ! a i sdropp ed ; thus, "
it“ W E ngrp a s j a ga ti becomes 71th“m ng
'
p o
j aga ti m nrp a s a tr a 3th $3 nz'
p o‘tra .
119 . I t i s the p ra cti ce i n o ur sys tem o f tr a nsli tera ti o n to renderthe s ign 8. which denotes th is dropp i ng of a n in i tia l 3 ! a , by a n
i nverted comma , l ike the rough brea th ing‘f p ri n ted Greek texts .120 . 3 . Before a ny in itial vowel other tha n short a a
,fin a l
“
Q R a s l oses i ts q s,becoming simp l e 3 1 a ,
a n d the hia tu s thu socca si oned rema i ns ; thu s , 3“ Ta ft? nrp a s i ccha ti becomes 3111
M a nrp a i ccha ti W W ta ta s udakam an W ta ta
121. 4. F i na l m as before a ny sona n t , whether vowel o r
con sona n t,l oses i ts a s
,b ecoming simp ly m a ; a nd the h ia tus
thu s occa sion ed rema i ns ; thu s , Etna { fi rm ng‘
p as i ccha n ti TIT
{fi f e-
cl n fp a i ccha n ti ; m a fl fi'
fl‘
nrp as j aya n ti i t“ ma fia
nrp a j aya n ti .
122 . B . F i na l ‘
g r . 1 . F i na l I r i n gen eral shows the sameform which E; 8 wou ld exhibi t u nder th e same condi ti ons : thus
W pun a r sta ndi ng a t th e en d of a s en tence becomes 331! p un ah;g
‘
Jfi‘
g g i r , 7h : gib. But m ind fi n alm
‘
g m
r,
a fter is: a o r i n a,w fi -_ m
m a i n ta i ns i tsel f before vow el s a n d sona nt consona n ts ; thu s, Wp un a r a tr a
, W W p un a r j aga ti .
123 . 2 . A doubl e r i s nowhere a dmitted : i f such wouldoccur
,ei th er by reten tion o f a n origina l I r o r by conversion of a s
to I r,the firs t I r i s omi tted
,a nd the p recedi ng vowel
,i f short ,
i s ma de long by comp ensa ti on ; thu s , m m : p un a r r ama h
a?”“
( Tm p una r ama h;“
i f“ fi afi‘
agn is r oca te Wtfi fl fiagn i r eca te w fi
'
a’
fi dheune r oca te fi i fi fi dhenu r eca te .
Lesson IV .
Vocabulary IV.
Verbs fi g ruh (r o’
ha ti) grow .
hrt (krn ta’
ti) cu t , cu t o ff . m lip (limp dti) smea r . {i‘
gfpi i‘‘
g
Hi mu c (m ur’
i cdti) free, del iver , m [up (lump a'
ti) break to p i eces , ,W w flw w
rel ea se . deva sta te , p lunder . hu m m é‘
Subst . :wfiq agn i , m .
,fire ; (a s p rop er tnfmp ani , m .
, TW J i g/Zm 7
215
name) Agn i , the god of fire . W p ap a , n ., sin .
y r a-
A J a f t a rz,m .
, en emy.
“
(m r ama, m .
,n om . p r .
,nam e of
W s ift; a si , m .,sword . a hero .
a ft: rsi , m . seer . i fi o rhsa,m .
,tree. W M
d o o r m o ésimfi ha c i m p oet (W ?M ) ”
Fae pic a , m ., n om . p r . nam e of
fi rf‘
t g ir i , m .,mounta i n . a god .
YG'
V O Sg w w St'
clj a n a , m .,m a n ; (p1. ) p eop l e . tru th, righ teou sn ess .
g ig duhkha ,n . , misery , m is gfi ha r i
,m .
,n om . p r .
,name o f
fortun e . a go d .
Exercise IV.
W 3?" “W W W ! “ m fi a m zla l
W ’
m ififi fi fa la lwfi f w wm ga fi la lwEfi m lt m w m lal a a mW a t e rm a w m t t tqm fi rfi fi sfim e tw :
gait fi rsa n ao uaft : m m m fi a l
W <§ l23) v fi1 W I ‘R I M ala wi-
51m
m i sa l‘
sfi‘ m m znqsn
15 . (Jim1 dwel ls3 i n the m o un ta in s
g. 16 . B oth e nemies1 hu rl4
3spea rs2 a t the k ing3 (da t .) 17 . Rama 1 touches4 his two so n s wi th
h is ba ndez. 18 . F ire 1 burn s3 the trees2. 19. Seers1 sp ea k2 thetru th3 . 20 . Thr ough righteou sness1 hap p i n ess3 a rises4 (Ii ) for m a n
Modifiers genera l ly p recede the word which i s m odified .
3*
36 Lesson IV . V.
kind2 gen . 21. The seer’s 1 two ha nds2 touch4 wa ter3.22. F ru i ts1 a re
3
(use fi t ) on th e trees2 . 23 . Peop le1 remember3
Ha ri2. 24. Ra' ma 1 hurls4 the sword3 from his ha nd2
Lesson V.
124. Verbs. Un a ccen ted ga - cla ss. Roots of this cla ss formtheir p resen t-s tem by a ddi ng 21 ga to the roo t , which bea rs thea ccent . Thu s from 71?n a h i s ma de the p resent- stem W n dhga ;
from ap t labh , 1312: lubhya .
125 . The inflection o f s tem s of th is cla ss follows th e model of
fig va d .
126 . Certa i n “
i n d-roots, beca u s e of their p ecu l ia r excha ngesw i th { i a n d
“I
i i - form s , esp ecia l ly i n the forma tion of the p resen ts tem
,a r e given by th e H i ndu gramma ria n s a s ending i n ”
Q e or
i (i i o r 3h 0 (cf. a nd by them a ssigned to the 31 bha , ora - cla ss . Thu s tan dha , ‘su ck’ (Hi ndu Q dhe ), form s n dhdga ti ;
the root { hit or 3 T hva (Hi ndu 3 hve) form s . m hva’
ga ti ;
m gd (H i ndu fi gai) m akes WW fi -t gdya ti .
127 . F o r the roo t g aldry,‘see
’,i s substi tu ted i n the p resen t
system a nother root W p a p, wh ich m akes W 3 p a’
cga ti .
128 . M a sculin es i n ‘
B u . 3113 bhanu ,‘sun’.
Singula r . Dua l . Plura l .N . W bhanus m bhanu arm
-
arr bhana va s
A . W bhanum p “rif t bbanan
I . mgrc“
u bhanuna “13 1m bhdnubhydm bhdnubhis
D . m bhdn a c e mm bhanubbga s
Ab .m bhdn os
Subst TIT—f! bhanu , m .
, sun .
“fl ” u ‘t‘
iw w 'fi w w
ff fi i fi f‘
éffi 3 1a a nn a,n .
,food
,fodder. WM ) ‘
q'
rm’
mani , m . ,j ewel .
70 9 J a m a al. w a eva , m .
,horse . “
( at r a tn a , n .,j ewel .
m uda dhi,m .
,ocea n . U fa ragi , m . hea p .
XH/A t , st r i p W 4
H'
Q gur u , m .,tea cher . 3 1g va yu , m .
,w indlaw
a /H ZI /Lq-
a p a ttr a , n . , l ea f, l etter. fw visnu , m .,n om . p r . nam e of
11W p a r a eu , m ., a xe . a god .
m p dda ,m .
,foot ; qua rter ; £ 3 pa tr u, m .
,enemy.
r ay, beam . fm t cikha r a , m .,summi t .
i ” fflfi fl g mg bahu , m .
, a rm . m cisga , m ., pup il , schola r.
bindu,m . , drop . $3 sukta
,n .
, Vedi c hymn .
Exercise V.
a ffi rm ufi ffiqfi t mslm um m fi a fi a ms l
{m fi fi gfi l fi gfi'
fl t au t m m m “i f?! am?
i f?m fl zlas lfi zfi m m nfi na m znqc u
19 . Now4 the su n’s1 rays2 cl imb5 the moun ta i n s3. 20 . A drop 2
o f wa ter1 fa l l s“ down f r om th e cloud3 . 21. OIm en
2, w e see4
the city3
. 22 . Bo th k i ngs1 l ove3 p oets2 (gen . or 23 . Thewind1 blows4 (a?) f rom the summits3 of the mou nta i n s? 24. Theking1 hu rl s“ sp ea rs3 a t his enemies? (do t. or 25 . The schola rl
bews3 bef or e his tea cher? 26. Two m en1 come3 wi th thei r
sons2 (instiz) . 27. The two kings1 desi re" the p oet’s2 j ew el s3 (da t.or 28. O
1 seer,
2 w e sa cr ifice4to Visnu3 (a ce ) . 29. The two
Or thodox H indus m a i n ta i n tha t the Vedic werer evea led to their rep u ted a u thors, who thu s ‘
saw ’ them .
Lesson V . VI . 39
cook3 food1 wi th fi r e2. 30. The se ers1 p ra i se4 Vi sn ug wi th hymns3
31 . I n the ci ty 1 the king2 ca l l s4 his enemies3
L esso n VI .
I3l. Ver bs. ya- cla ss, con t’d . The roots o f th i s cla s s whi ch end
W a m l engthe n thei r W a i n forming their p resen t-s tem ; thu s ,HR tam
, W tfimya ti ; HR bhr om , m fi -I bhr c’imya ti—bu t th is
la s t makes some form s w i th short 3 ! a . The roo t Hg m a d ha s
the same l ength en i ng : m a fi t mddya ti .
I32 . Certa i n d -roots (five by th e H indu s w ri tten wi th fin a l 0 )m ake p resen t- s tems wi th a n a ccen ted ya
'
; thu s , {1 dd , Q fi t dya’
ti .
I3S . The root W vya dh i s a bbrevia ted to failvidh i n the
presen t- sys tem : fatafa c idhyali .
I34. The roo t am; kr am, sa i d by th e n a t ives to form i ts
presen t-s tem a ccordi ng to thi s cla ss , rea l ly forms i t on ly a ccordingto the a - cla ss
,a nd the roo t- vow el i s l engthen ed i n th e a ctive voi ce ,
bu t not i n the m iddl e ; thus , m kr cima ti: ,
bu t middl ekr a
'
m a te .
I35 . The roo t Em; cam ,u sed only with th e prep osi tion WTd ,
forms W ftfi f d céma ti . r
l36 . N euter s i n 3 u . m ad/m ,
‘honey
S ingu la r. D ua l . Plura l .N .
“
Hg m a dhu W‘
ifi‘
m a dhun i Ra f i?m a d/(mg
I .
“
811-33 1“
ma d/tuna m m m a d/zubhydm “g r“ m a dhubhis
D . Hg?m adhun e 31W m a d/zubhya s
f‘
Ab .
“
Hm m a dhun a s
G 21W m a dhun os“
Hum m a dhz’
i ndm
Lesson VI .
I37 . Neu ter a dj ect ives (but n o t substa n tives) i n E u m ay taketh e forms p rop er to th e ma scu l in e i n the da t. , abl. -gen . , Io c . sing ,
a nd gen .-l oc . dua l .
ISS. Ch anges of fi nal “
1 i t . Before i n i tia l EL j a nd 9,
i i t becomes 3 1 7i ; thu s , 3 11 W tdn j andn becomes HTa
'
fl‘
li td ii j a n dn ;“
fir-t xi i tan ca tr iln 3 1W ta'
ii ca trz‘
tn . I n
la s t ca se,how ever
, Q eh i s a lmost a lways substi tu ted for the i n i ti a l
1 [ 9 ; thus, W tdh’
cha tr z‘
m.
139 . F i nal3 ; i t , before a n i n i tia l at l, i s a ssimi la ted a nd becomesna sa l ized l
,wh ich i s wri tten i 551
,o r (wha t is th e same th ing)
l40 . Before the ggrd p a la ta l , l ingu a l , a nd den ta l mu tes th ere isi n serted a fter fina l i n a s ib i la n t of ea ch o f these cla sses r e
spectively, before which FL i t becom es a nusvdm ; thus for an a
tan ca we find m tdhc ca , for 3 11“
am am ta thd, am t tdhs
ta thd .
*
Vocabulary VI.
Verbs 3 K cam +m d (d ocima ti) sip ,
Cr echdti I09) go to ; fa l l drink,rin se th e mou th .
to one’s l o t,fa l l upon . “
(TR tam (lamya tt) be
m kr am 3“ d (dkréma ti) {LIE tu§ (tdsya ti) rej o ice , takes tride up to , a tta ck . p l ea sure i n (w .
m di v (divya ti) p lay. M J éM <M >
Th i s ru l e rea l ly i nvolves a n histori c surviva l , the la rge m ajo r ity o f ca ses o f fina l a n i n th e la nguage being fo r originala s.
Pra ctica l ly,the ru l e a pp l i es on ly to i t i t before i c a nd 21 t, s ince
ca ses i nvolvi ng the o ther in i tia l s a re excessively ra re.
Lesson VI .
a n bhr am (bhr c‘
i'
mya ti § I3 I) m cr am ( crémya ti ) becom ewa nder a bou t . wea ry.
A a flw 7 7 1 .1n m a d (m a dya ti) get drunk . A 5 hr (ha’
r a ti) take away, s tea l , Xc- ZP ,
El‘
q vya dh (vidhya ti) h i t, p i erce . p lunder ,-M lav-w h i t h m m r
m cam (cdmya ti) become qu ie t ,be exti ngu i shed
,go o u t .
er»?” Ma
Subst fi fi ffl‘ ksa tr iya , m .
,wa rr ior , m a n
W‘
a a ksa , m .,di e
,d ice . o f th e second ca s te .
at
75a m ele W fi a dha rm a
,m .
,inju s ti ce
, 3.
a nrp a ti , m .,k i ng. [m m -W )
wrong . n etr a,n .
,eye . [A W “ 7 “
m ali,m . ,bee . I t?m a d/m
,n .
,honey .
w a cr u,n .
,tea r . fig mulcha
,n .
,mou th
,fa ce .
a,o x r o s, M W Tksa , m .
,bea r . zi t
-
g mrtyu ,m .
,dea th .
fi n kop a , m .
,a nger . Hg va su , n . , W ea l th, m oney .
Exercise VI.
m m g’
fi w fa la l’a fi tw uifium m wfi n u
i m wfim fi a fa ls lwfa fiw wm fa ls lw fi fimfifi wfa lulW W W M Q I W ! !
m : I S lW W i a fi fi f fl ffi lt lflfi W fi l lc: v i es
am a w m mgfim a fm qo lam : m fin qa lais‘
( a‘
i m a zma lmi : fnwa mwfl m fin qslm fl fl’
t m
mffl lae lm fi m i gwfa w znaqn
16. The wa rriors1 p lay3 f or money2 17 . The ki ng’s .
»
1horses becom e wea ry5 on the roa d4 to-dayl. 18 . The wa rrior
p i erces4 his en emy3 wi th th e sp ea r2 . 19. BeesIa r e fond o f
a(ESL)
h o n eyz. 20 . The wa ter? of his tea rs1 moistens“ (fa?) his feet
3.
1a r e cook
i ng5 honey? a n d4 fru i ts3 . 23. W hen1 the tea cher’s2 a nger3 cea ses‘,
then5 the schola rs7 rej oices. d
21. There2 bees1 a r e fl i tti ng a bou t3 (a n ) . 22. Two men
24. Tea rs“ s ta nd‘ in the wa rriors
4? Lesson VI . VI I .
1 3eyes”. 25 . The enem i es26 . A qua rter2 o f th e inj usti ce1 fa l l s upon4 (as) the king3
overwhelm4 (i t ! ) th e king2wi th a rrows
Lesson VII .
l4l. Causa ti ve Verbs (n at ive“cu r The Hi ndu gram
ma ria ns describe a certa i n p resen t-sys tem which they a ssign to aso -called “
cur -cla ss ” . Thi s i s , however, i n fa ct no p resen t-cla ssa t all
, bu t a ca usa tive o r seconda ry conjuga tion , which i s not confined to the p res en t-sys tem . But m a ny forma tion s of this sort ha ven o ca u sa tive va lu e ; a n d i t i s ch iefly these tha t a r e grouped by theH i ndu s i n their cur - cla ss
,wh ich a lso i ncludes som e den om in a tive
s tems in a'
ya , wi th ca u sa tive a ccen t. F o r pra ctica l p urposes i t i sw el l enough to consider thes e verbs here .
I42 . The ca u sa tive -s tem i s form ed by a dding w dye to th er oo t , which i s u sua lly s trengthened ; a nd the s trengthen ing p rocessi s in the m a in a s fol lows
I43 . 1 . Media l or i n i tia l i, B u
, a nd ai r have the gu itas trengthen ing
,i f ca pa ble of i t ; thu s , 31 ga g , W cor dya ti ; “ a t
fag vid, 3m veddya ti ; bu t tag p
‘
id, tfi'
g fl fi f p ida’
ya ti .
I44 . 2. A final vowel ha s th e vrddhi- s trength en ing ; thus ,E3; dhr , m t afa dhd r a
'
ya ti . Before Q u aya , i d i a n d Efi d a becomeM
3 111 1; dy a nd m a\d o resp ectively ; th us , lfl‘
bhi,W fi‘f bhdydya ti ; 4h
a b1m, m a
'
qfi f bhdvdya ti .
MS. 3 . Media l or in i tia l W a i n a m etri ca l ly l igh t syl la bl e i ssometimes l engthened
,a n d sometimes rema i n s u ncha nged ; thus , /
fi a\
ksal, ca us . fi ‘
l’
fi a‘
fa ksdldya ti ; but a‘
c'
t j am, ca us . fi fl '
fl fi l
j a n a’
ya ti .
MS. The i nflection i s the usua l on e of a - s tems .147 . Rules o f euphon i c combin a t ion . I n ex terna l combin a tion
a n i n i tia l sona nt o f wha tever cla ss (even a vowel or s emivowel o rna sa l) requ i res the conversion o f a p reced ing fina l surd to a sona nt .
Lesson VI I . 43
I48 . F i n ala t . 1. F i na l a t becom es g d , before a ny i n i tia lsona n t, excep t th e p a la ta l s , th e na sa l s , a n d at I : thus , 3“ a ?
m egha'
t a tr a becom e s 3m meghc'
id a tr a ; mm W fi lp ap at
r a ksa ti o r M bhr c’
img/a ti o r UIW H gop c’
zya ti becomes UN T
g fi fa p dp dd r a ksa ti or mqrgl’
m'
ffi p dp dd bhr dmya ti or tntnfi q'
t
a fa p dp c‘
i d gop dya ti .
l49 . 2 . F ina l i t t i s a ssimi la ted to a n i n i tia l p a la ta l , l ingua l ,o r
“
a l i n the n ex t word ; thu s i t b ecomes i t 0 before -E[ c a nd
5 ch, st j before at j , a n d at 1 before a .
z. e . g . , 3‘
m a megha i ca
becomes fli ng “
m eghd e ca ; 33“ Elm m eghd t j alam becomes
m m eghdj i ala m ; mm mm p dp d t lokd t b ecom es
W an d p dp dlIokd t.
I5 O, 3 . Before i n i tia l 11 9, fina l t-[ t becomes fi e, a nd the
111; 9 then becomes § ch ; thu s , m 3 3 : arp at ca truh becomes
3 1113 3 : ri fd cha truh.
I5l. 4. Before i n i tia l n a sa l s Ft t becom es i n : thu s , mSmffi grhd t n aya ti becom esW
‘
fi‘
a fi f grhci n n aya ti . Bu t th e cha ngei n to g d i s a l so p erm i tted , though ha rdly u sed ; thus ,mgrhdd n aya ti .
Vocabulary VII.
Verb s HE; tul(tola’
ya ti) weigh . g Q w’x
ga r “ .
( W e/{fl aw ko iba g/a (denom . s tem é‘
g'
q da ncing/a (denom . da xm d é pw d )
ka thdya ti ) rel a te, tel l . nddya ti) pu n i sh .
W\
ksal(ksdldya ti) wa sh .
‘
Ffi “9Ta t d (an a’
ya ti) bring .
7w 4 (m 4m ga zi aya (denom .
—gandya ti ) lflg p
'
id (p ida’
ya ti ) tormen t , vex .
number, count . 15kp aj (p z’
tj dya ti) honor.
33 our (cor dya ti) s tea l . Epr (pd r a'
ya ti) overcome ; 34
3 3 16141 (tdda'
ya ti) s trike , bea t .
44 Lesson VI I . VI I I .
Subst Q ua] rflp aka , n .
,gol d -p i ece .
m a: j a n aka , m .,fa ther . m loka
,m . , world , p eop l e
m da zi dam ” stick ; p un ishm en t. (s i ng . a nd
HQ p unya , n . ,meri t . W sadhu
,m . , holy m a n
,s'a i n t .
via p hala , n .,fru i t ; rewa rd . {j afi suva rna , n .
,gold .(1e¢{W M }
“
(m am r dmdya zi a , n .
,a noted H?! sitta , m .
,driver
,cha rio teer .
p oem . sten a,m . ,thi ef.
Adverb s {a iva a s, l ike
Exercise VII.
fi a zgami j nwgsfi’rt fl finqum msa m m mm
m m fi safi lslwfi éafl wfi fi m firwnm m
aw aa fi a nu lwfi m m w z I ii ! atri a-
1m m“fi lmm fi fi w
’t t tm w u t lgafilInfi l
m’
rfiw m le lm ar W amsufi t m o uN ew
W a laa l gfi w mfi m fi m lam m a
fi shw gm nqeu
14. Thieves s tea l4 the p eop l e’s2 moneys. 15 . The two boys 1
wa sh3 thei r mou ths2 . 16 . The fa ther1 tel l s5 h is sons2 (do t ) therewa rd4 of S ing. The schola rs1 honor3 a nd
5 reverence4 theirtea cher2. 18 . Ye both bri ng3 fru i ts1 i n your ha nds2 a nd
5 coun t4
them . 19. Meri t1 p rotects3 from m i sfortu ne2 20 . The cha rio teer s
1 s trike4 the horses2 w i th s tick s3 . 21 . I n a nger1 (a bl.) theking2 p i erces5 the thief3 wi th a sp ea r“.
Lesso n VIII .
IS2 . Ver bs, a - c
i
onj uga t ion . Pr esen t I ndi cative M iddle . The
p resen t indica tive m iddl e of verbs whose stems end i n a i s i nflecteda s fol lows :
Lesson VI I I .
I5 8 . F i na l ti e a n d zh‘
o rem a i n u nch a nged before a n i n i tia lshor t W a
,bu t th e w a di sapp ea rs . Thu s , a?a t? va n e a tr a be
comes 3 35?$3 va n e‘tr a ;
“
Q ? bhan o a tr a becomes “Eh S3bhan o ‘
tr a . By fa r the commonest ca s e of fina l fi '
0 i s where i trepresen ts fina l m as (see
I5 9. The fina l { i or B it -el em en t o f a d iph thong is cha ngedto i ts corresp ondi ng sem ivowel ELy o r i t v, before a ny vowel o rdiphthong , excep t when th e rul e of ISS wou ld a pp ly . Thu s , Q e
becomes Era; ay, a nd i at, m ay ; 3a“
0 becomes 3 13 ; a v, a nd
war (a t , M (iv. Thus, in i nterna l combina tion , 3 5 31 n e- a becomes
w
W n aya ;‘
ah -wbho- a becomes “a bha va ; so Vii -are: n a i - aya yi el ds
am n ay- aya , a n d af
ar-gm bhau - aya yields W W bhav-aya .
I60 . I n extern alcombi na ti on,the resu l t i ng semivowel i s i n gen
era l dropp ed ; a nd the resu l ting hia tu s rema i n s . Thu s, 3?{FRva n e i ti becomes a? {fi t va n a i ti (through th e i n termedia te s tage
a fl fixfi t va n ay i ti ) ; “fi ll{fi f bhano i ti becomes m a f f’
a bhana
i ti ( through m fi f‘
d bhan a v i ti) . The ca se o f fina l Q e i s by fa rthe more frequ en t . See a l so I64.
I6I. Certa i n fina l vowel s ma i n ta i n themselves u ncha nged before a ny fol lowing vowel . Such a r e 1 . i t , ar e , a n d Q o a s dua lendings
,both of declen sion a n d of co njuga tion ; thus , fi rfi {3 girl
iha, w ar-i sadhi
’
t a tr a ; i153“
a ? p hale a tr a . 2 . The fina l , o r
only,vow el of a n i n terj ecti on ; thu s , {Ti he indra , 3 13 he agne.
Vocabulary VIII.
Ver b s (deponen ts) spri ng up (mother in loc . ) Sit?"
fi f fiM W ) 7 ? wilt ] a r ikaya (denom . a r tha “TELbhas (bhdsa te) SpeakJ /H i fi é lou )
ya te) a sk for (w . two 11 mgr (m r iya'
te) die .
‘
é
'
fl-p c v ,
W
heal
/n i c e/g um a
'
a j fi iks (iksa te) se e, behold . m ya twdta te) strive for (w.
m [camp (kaimp a te) trembl e . 1314; ga dh (yddhya te) fight (w .
Sli t j a n (j ag/a te) be born , a ris e, i n str. o f a ccompa n imen t) . “Ur /” 7
Le sson VI I I . 47
( a r abh WTd (ara'
bha te) tak e R o a nd (va’
nda te) greet , honor .hOld O I ]
,begin . rm mks (Q id te) lea r n . W y
r( « a /é ( 6 <
” (fi )
“ H a " fi r ud r o’
ca te) p l ea se (da t . gen .
“
Hg sa h ( sa’
ha te) endu re e ee e V S aj/Z 370 "
4 am,5a m
Grit la bh (la’
bha te) receive , take . BEL sev (se'
va te) serve , honor
Subst. 113 121 ma n usya , m . , m a n (homo) .
wa s?a na r tha,m . , misfortu n e . ‘
a i yaj ii a , m .
,sa crifice .
way, “”
B all“ udyoga , m .,di l igen ce . a? va n a
,n . ,woods
,forest .
W kalya'
na , n .,a dva n tage fa
'
i fi l‘
vin aya , m .
,fi i edwncej d nl' m l ( a w e)
sa lva ti o n . afifi f vi ci , m .,w ave .
“
(Ti ta r a , m .
,tre e . 3116 1 -book .
V0 5 4 (M
r“ dvija , m . , Arya n , (tm ce - ém ) a? cz’
idr a,m .
,m a n Of the fou rth
figm fi ldvijati , m ., Arya n . ca s te .
vi rtu e . fgfl hi ta , n . , a dva n tage . M ed ea-W a nh d ‘a '
Ma w fié dhairya , n .,s tea dfa stn ess .
Le ean fi
1133 p a cu , m .,bea st . Adverb : ‘
v'
I‘
n a,no t.
W bala,n .
,s trength
,might .
Exercise VIII.
W uwfi lm aga’
r
8 I WWT§ 1€=I EIWB I VI
fi fi ls lfi mfi : (ableaai azéi a afi lc la afiifi i fiw fi le la re : n o nm a m am laa lw a f t
m w z fifi laa t mfi a fi m m a z mh
fi a w fi w las l afifia afi t ae fia laul vfi m wfr‘
t
17. The two hou ses“ yonder5 tremble6 by the p ower3 (instr .)
(i fa ,
‘thu s ’,i s very comm only us ed a s a pa rti cle of quota ti on ,
fol low i ng the words quoted .
to
w 0L
48 Lesson VI I I . IX.
o f the o cegn ’s1 wa ves2 . 18 . The fa ther3 beholds“ his son’s1 fa ce .2
19.
“W e s tri ve3 a fte r the a dva n tage2 of the thu s4
(( fi f) sp eak6 the tea chers
s. 20 . The ch ildren2 a sk
4 their fa ther1
for food3 21 . I n the fores t‘ yonder 2 el epha nts3 a r e
figh ti ng5 w i th bea rs“. 22. The two Q fidra s?’ serve
4 the two Arya n s1
here . 23 . F ru i ts1 p l ea s e?’ th e chi ldren? 24. W hence do ye receive3
m on eyz?25 . N ow the two seersz begi n“ the sa cr ifice3
L esson IX.
IS2 . F emin i nes i n 3 " d,decl i n ed l ike fli rt sen d , ‘
a rmy.
’
Singula r . Dua l . Plu ra l .N . sen d 3? sen e (d i ) fi
'
c'
fl fi sends
A. 3“ sen am 7, n n n
I . 3 3 111“
sen ayci W m sendbhydm m sen dbhz’
s
D . 3 3 13 sen ayc’
i i fim q sen dbhya s
Ab . m wn dyds 77
G . n n i n fra sen ayos film sen dn dm
L . 213 121131: sen dydm am sendsu
V. a?sen e
I63 .
“
A dj ectives i n Ela a r e decl i n ed i n th e ma sc . l ike 23 , i nthe fem . l ike firm ,
i n th e n eu ter l ike Ilia “
. Bu t often the fem .
stem ends i n “
fi'
5,a nd i s decl in ed l ike “
af t (i n Less . X I ) .I64. F i na l fl (i i a nd i f?(i n , a ccording I5 9
,become 3 111 fig
a ndm d o respectively before a ny fol low i ng vowel o r d iph th ong .
The EL or i t may the n be dropp ed , l eavi ng a hia tu s . The 21 i si n fa ct a lways dropp ed, bu t the a
\
not ofte n . Thu s , w W?
becomes,through the medium o f m ara , W 1 ma ;
af t far becomesm a .
I65 . I n i tia l Q , a fter short vowels , the p rep osi tion WT, a nd the
fia v
’
v w
Lesson IX . 49
p roh ibi tive pa rti cl e becomes Q : thu s, W3 W becom es W?
W ; 3 11 m an ta 3 11m m.
I66 . An i n i tia l “
Q o f a roo t gen era l ly becomes “I a fter a
verba l‘ p refix co n ta in ipg fgL e i th er origi na l o r rep resenting R ; su ch
a s wa rs‘between ’, fi ler, an ,
e tc . Thu s, W fl fi l, famifl fa .
I67 . The foll ow ing p refixes a r e o ften u sed befor e verbs : 3m‘a fter , a l ong
,towa rd ’
; W‘down
,o fi” ; a i
‘up , up forth o r o u t
’
;
3 11‘to
,towa rd ’ ; fa ‘down ; i n , i n to
’
; fi g‘o ut
,forth ’ ; W ‘to
a. d i s ta nce , away ’
; nfi‘round a bou t , a rou nd ’
; 11‘ forwa rd , forth’ ;
FR‘a long with
,comp l e tely.
’
Vocabulary IX.
Act ive Ve rbs fi ll- W (p a r dj aya te) be co n
W -I“
i la“
(a vaga’
ccha ti) u nder qu ered (r a r ely w. a ct. sense
s ta nd . conqu er . )
g W descend. 115“
I t (p r ap a'
dya te) fle er
fo r r e
fifi -i 3 11 i n troduce,fuge to (a ce. of p erson ) .
con secra te,M ed e a fi lo/rewri te) beg, get by begging . atw ll
‘
77447 (
a
qfi wa r indya ti ) l ea d a bou t ; 21111: (den om . mrga'
ya te) hun t Mag gga m
m a rry . for,s eek .
W 3?(utp dta tz‘
) fly up .
“
i i-
t (vdr ta te) ex is t , subsis t, be , m a n ila
( g W3 (a va réba ti) descend . become .be bri l l ia n t
,sh i ne ;
Depon en ts be em inen t.
m“
GR (sa rizga'
ccha te) cometogether
,meet . [M WM
Snbst . : W ga figd f. , m. p r . , the Ga nges . yam
“
( g m .,a rrow . m m .
,householder
,hea d o f
W f .,da ugh ter
,ma iden . family .
Pe r ry , San sk r i t Pr imer .
5 0 Lesson IX.0 5
“
“N
Wi s/
114“
) Mi t
M5 1111
,
f .,sh a de . fim n . p rotection . fC J Au f
1 "
m m .,n om . p r . , Pr ayaga (a a t !” f . , tw i l ight ..
f3fi f; f i zw ’
C1ty , Allahabad) . Q 3?m .
,heaven .
“
are: n ., fea r . m n .
,hea rt . 6
fi le M } 111151 f . , w i fe , woma n . Adj
“Tm f . , sp eech , la ngua ge . m ,f. bla ck .
fi a t f . , a lm s . um , f. can; b i d , w i cked .
W i t h m. p r .,Yamu na (a t iver, m , f. °"3IT, m uch
,a bunda n t ;
th e J umna) . pl. m a ny.
m m .,n . , ba t tl e . Adv
“
(WT f . , street . Hg together wi th (postp os. w.
fag” f . , know l edge , l ea rn i ng .
fag?! m ., b i rd .
“
Hm suddenly, qu i ckly .
3 1TH m .
,hun terr
’
W ) WExercise IX.
“
W W W”
tqlm fm m m m fl fit
m fa ls lw m m w : I Q I fi I maxi m : a ft
W a l t“ fi mfié’
i‘
a m ii aia nfi r. m zum r nfi fi r
w m nw wfi m a fi M W I mm m <§ l64> wfi
W fi n e lan WW W sewn: gif t i t fiafifinqo n
W W W W W H M fawn w a rm s
Hfi f fi W m fi m e fi m lm im ffl‘
m fa sfi a ma nnfi ww am fim fi t n as"
15 . The two s chola rsl beg6 much2 a lms3 from the w ives‘5 of
th e hou seholders“. 16 . At Prayaga 1 th e Ga nges2 un i te s4 w i th theYamu na 3 . 17. Ba d
1 men2 do n o t4 rea ch 5 (En-L) hea ven
3. 18 . O
V i snu to -day3 ( i a 2 ma rri es7 Ga’
ngae,Ha ri’s4 da ughters. 19. I n th e
ba ttl e1 th e k ings3 figh t4 w i th a rrows2 a nd6 conqu er7 their en em ies
b.
“ Birds of a fea ther flock together ” .
Lesson IX . X . 5 1
20. H ere2 i n the s tree t3 the two kingsl di smou n t6 from thei r bl a ck43a r e eminen t4 i n l ea rn i ng1
22 . F rom fea r3 of the wicked1 hun ters2 ( a bl. ) two bi rds4 fly up5.
23 . At tw i l igh t1 (loo . da .) th e seers2 I3, 3) reverence4 th e gods".
24. I n the s treet2 o f the v i l lage1 the tea cher3 a nd5 th e schola r4 mee t6.
horses5 . 21. The seer’8 2 two sons
25 . W e tw o sa cr ifice2 to the gods1 f or ou rselves ; we do not4 sa cri
fi ce5fo r H a ri3
L esson X .
IGS . Verbs. Pa ss ive I nfl ecti on . A certa i nr ‘ A n
s tem , i nflected wi th m iddl e endings , i s u sed only w i th a pa ss ivem ea ning, a n d i s formed from allroots fo r wh ich there i s occa s io nto make a p a ss ive conjuga tion . I ts sign i s an a ccen ted Ely/d a ddedto th e roo t
,w i thou t a ny reference to th e cla sses a ccording to which
th e a ct ive a n d middle form s a r e m ade . The i nflection i s p reciselyl ik e tha t o f other a -stems . Thus
, a?! tam/é, an? ta nya’
se,
“
(F i fi
ta nydte, e tc .l69 . O u ts ide the p resen t-sy s tem m iddl e formsmay _
b_e_ us.
e_d_ i g
a p a ss ive s en se ; bu t there i s a sp ecia l form for the a o r . pa s s . i nthe 3rd . s ing .
l70 . The form o f roo t. to whi ch th e p a ssivef sign is a ppended
i s u su a l ly a weak on e. Thus a p enu l t im a t e n a sa l i s drop ped ; ando
certa i n a bbrevia tions which a r e made i n the w eak forms o f th e
p erfect , or i n th e pa s t p a ss ive pa rti cip l e a r e found a l s o in the
pa ss ive p resen t-sys tem . E . g . from W , pa ss . 3 13 13 ; from a i ll.
(w
1 lmp
P
K» 29
F
m . I n the roots 3 1
1 , fig ,an ,
“
sq,erg, a nd a rt, th e 1 m
becomes 3 u i n th e p res . ; thus , 133 56, “ a, W ? (see note toIOZ ) , “ 3 . S im i la rly
, W mak es ( 3113 , a nd 113 a ndW m ake
m a nd W 3 ; W make s film?
Lesson X .
I72 . F ina l a nd 3 o f roo ts a re gen erally l engthened ; thu s ,M u )
fa shesfo rge?! 0,
M ”
I73 . F i n a l 3 3 i s i n genera l ch a nged to fl ; thus , $1 fi fifi ;
bu t i f p receded by tw o con sona n ts i t takes gun a ; thus , m,
“
Elfir
‘” h ‘N w ,
The roots i n “va ria ble which the n a tives w ri te w i th as; i ,
cha nge a; to o r , i f a labilahle tter p recede , to B ig
“
; thu s , 3 ,
Q ( “N 0
m a ; ‘sj r ewj , alt
-em , but 3, ga
ze
l74 . F i n a l “
i n of roots ls u sua lly cha nged to t ; thu s , QT,I
m a ; WT,W ;‘Efi tfi l But WTm akes W W ; a nd so some
other roots i n WI . fb a
low !
I7S . The roots Hi a nd m usua l ly form thei r p a ss ives from
p a ra l lel roots in a n; thu s , m . Bu t an?a nd law? occur .I76 . Verb s o f ca usa tive inflectio n
,a nd denomi na tives i n W ,
form thei r‘
p a ssive by a ddi ng a to the ca usa t ive or denomin a tives tem a fter a t ; ha s been dropped : thu s , a‘rfifi ‘ i s s tole
‘
n ’; any?‘ i s cou n ted
I77 . The p erson a l p a ssive con struction , w i th the logica l subj ecti n th e i n strumen ta l , i s p a rticula rly common w i th tra n si tive verbs ;
_ .f " - o “ M l
a nd n o t less so the imp ersona l p a ssi ve cons tructi on , bo th w i thtra n si tive a n d i n tra nsi tive verbs . Thu s
, fl?m ma? ‘H ea ven’i s rea ched by the m a n
’
; m m ?! ‘ one comes hi ther ’; gm?‘o n e
[8 19 913 9 5 ‘ i t i s hea r d i . e . 1
‘ they say’. The p redi ca te to the
i ns trumen ta l subj ect of su ch a construction i s o f cou rse a l so instr um en tal; th us , U fimffim Sfiafi ‘Rama l ives a s a seer’.
Vocabulary X.
Ve rbs, wi th pa ssives take , r eceive , se ize .
i i (p . kr iya’
te) m a ke , do , p erform . (do'
pa ti ; p . daeya’
te) bi te .di ff?”2m (dydti ; p . diga
'
to) cu t ,
dig. m p . di al/d i e) p lay.
I n (géya tz’
; p . giydte) si ng . 1m (p . dhiya'
la) pu t , pl a ce.
Lesson X . X I .
(Use p a ssive constructions throughout .)
20 . Gra i n2 i s sca t tered3 for the birdsl. 21 . Ga rla nds1 a r e twin ed3 (use W ) by the m a idens
z. 22. Aga i n? Ha ri1 i s p ra i sed4
by Rama 3 . 523 . Visnu1 dri nks4 wa ter3 from h is ha nd2. 24.
‘Plea sa n tly
1
(Elfin ) o n e sl eep s3 i n the sh adez’; so4say
5 the p e0 ple6 .25 . Both seers1 sa cr ific e
z. 26 . The fa ther1 s ets4 hop es2 o n h is ch ild?’
27. The schola r3 negl ects4 the tea cher’s1 comma nd2. 28 . Thetw o schola rs1 th ink3 a bou t their tex t-book? (720m ) . 29. G ra i n2 i ssown3 in the fi eldsl. 30 . They p lay2 wi th dice1 (imp ers. p a ss ) .
31 . The k i ng’s1 comma nds2 a r e rece ived5 by the obedi en t?’ serva n ts4
32. The m a n1d igs3 i n the fi eld2.
L esson XI .
l78 . Verbs. Imp er f ect Active, a - conj ugat ion . The imperfect i sformed from the p resen t- stem by pr efix ing the a ugmen t 3 L a nd a ddinga s e t of seconda ry endings .
I79 . I f the p res en t-s tem begin with a vow el , the a ugmen t u n i tes
w i th i t to form a lwa ys th e vrddhi -v'
gg el, no t the guua : thu s W+ fo r i o r u r
I80 . I f a p rep osi t ion be p refixed, the a ugmen t comes be tween
p reposi t ion a nd verb,a s i n Greek : thu s , from E lli-
“
af t, imp f.-stem
am ; i e a t !“
i t an ; fa i l, imp fo - Stem Ext-111.
ISI. Th e infl ecti on i n the a ctive i s a s fol lows :S ing . Dua l . Plura l .
a'
ua dhm “ m a'
va dc'
z'
ua m u a'
va ddma
doada s W FR a'
va da tam wag?! o'
va duzu
3 . wager a'
va da t m am a'
va da tc'
im wag er a'
va da n
IS2 . The imperfect i s the ten se of na rra tion ; i t expresses p a s tt ime simp ly, withou t a ny further impl ica tion .
I8 3 . Polysyllabi c F em in in es i n i “ i , decli n ed l ike Ha ,
‘river . ’
7M au gh a m.
Lesson XI .
D ua l .
a efi n a dydu
Ab . wan-
Q n a dyas
G 39
L W W ua a’
yam
V i f; ma de
IS4. F i nal n a sals . The na sa l s q, q, a nd a ,occurring a s fina l s
af ter a shor t ag e] , a r e doubled before a ny m in i tialvow el : thu s , Wfi tfi E H becom es wffls ffi l.
Vocabulary Xl.
Ver bs fa il 11 (p r a vicdti) en ter . Vi n—g r ,
323; 3 13 (a va kg'
u tdti) cut o ff o r W sea t on esel f.down . a + 211 (dba
'
ra ti,
- te) fe tch , bri ng . N th-{ a m
113 (p dtha ti) reci te , rea d .
Subst. wafi‘
f .
,wife
,con sor t . w e
’r v w
fl m ., purp o se ; m ea n ing ;wealtl1. gfifi f . , da ughter.
W m”n om p r . tl1e god I ndra . m m
, book (ma nuscrip t) . V” f i e
n om . p r .,the goddes s at m .
,flood , high wa ter .
I ndran'
i . Ufi lfi f .,ea rth , grou nd .
ti
I I n ., p oem . m m p ri es t , Brahma n .
W m ., l i tera ry work , book . m m . , fish .
‘ t fu .g. , I Q
ZM
»” m a d
Graf t f. , mother. m tfl‘ Vw -alt ( t “ W e ” 1”
,W VQ /u .
m f .,fema l e slave
,serva n t . W T f. , counci l , meeti ng.
o €7f f°m
w e7' é ’f f M 4
,“
af t f , goddess , queen 3 3 1“ f
,a rmy
‘
fl fl'
fl‘ f. , ci ty. Eh? n .
,song o f p ra i se .
flTfi f. , woma n, wife .
Plura l .
W E: n a dya s
W n a di s
1 1m n a dibbz’
s
W n a d’
i bbya s
5 6 Lesson XI . X I I .
Exercise XI.
gufafinfi’
ew m lm afi a zm a i mmm m
wfi i mw w fi afi awm m ns nm zm
fw a gm q fi fi 'W W W I é lm fi r
W m t ls lm ér w m m m wm l c lgfm
WET W a i le l11‘
s"fl a n: fi fi a fimo 1W e“
vert W 1 as 1 fi re?fa tes “ 111 113 711 3 3 16 snar
W 3 1 CR 1 fi rm afi vfi' W ang-qua rts a a h :
3 1111 II Q Q II
14. W hen ye besought“ (I raq) th e king2fo r p rotection3 (a ce .
615 . I n the two riversr Gra nga2then 5 ye were7 (Q T) i n m isfortu ne .
a nd4Y amu né
‘
t3 i t i s(Ra fi?) h igh wa ter5 . 16 . The two women1 sa ng4
a song o f pra i se3 a bou t Rama 2 (gen ) . 17 . O1 se e rsg, why
?’do ye
both sa cri fice6 to the goddesses4 w i th mel ted bu tters? 18 . The qu een’s1
Women - serva nts2 brought6 j ewel s3 a n d5p reciou s s ton es4. 19. I n
a nger1 (a bl. ) the tea cher2 s truck“ the schola r5 w i th h i s ha nd3 .
3 o
20. The two serva ntsl brought5 wa ter“ from the ci stern ln po ts2 .
21. Ye cut o ff4(impf . ) wood3 from the trees2 w i th the a xel. 22. The
2seer1 p ra is ed6 I ndrani“, I ndra ’s consort3, with hymns 5
L esson XII .
l85 . F em i n in e Substan t ive s in z'
a nd‘
3 u a r e decl i ned a s i nthe p a ra digms o n th e n ext pa ge . The two seri es o f forms exh ibi tcomp l e te p a ra l l el i sm : where the o n e shows i
, y, e, or ay, th e othershows resp ectively u
,v, 0
,or a v ; cf. 5 0, SI. I n the D .
,Ah .
G a nd L . s i ng .
,thes e s tems sometimes follow a f t; thus ma lydz
’
,
-
yds,-
ydm ,~ dbenedz
’
,-vds,
-vdm .
IBB. F em i n in es i n z’
and 3 u :“
Fifi !‘op i n i on ’
,
Lesson XI I .
Sm g D ua l . Plura l
N “fag : man'
s t i t-fl ma ti t1m m a taga s
A wfim: ma tim i 1m m a tzs
I W Tm a tyc’
i m ma tibhya m Hffl fi i‘
fl: ma tzbbzs
D 11113 ma ta ge t i ff-nag ; m a tzbhya s
Ab H'
fi q m a tes
Q3 8
3 Q Q“
8 3 9.$1
91
S
V. I f?ma te
IS7 .gAdjec tives i n t i a nd
“
a u a r e often i nflected i n the fem i n i ne l ike t iff-r a nd $13 . But a dj ectives i n 3 u p receded by o n e
consona n t often form a deriva tive femin i n e stem by a dding i f .
Thu s, as?
‘mu ch ’, N . m a sc . “
erg-
q,f. a f t, n . 3 3 ; gm
‘ hea vy ’
,
a m . m , f. tif f, 11 .“
iii . This fem . i s the n decl i ned l ike at}.
Vocabulary XII.
Ver bs : W W t ea ch , i n 8 6 1m v u/u t
,oézc
w (Ica'
lp a te) be i n order ; tend s truct .or conduce to (w. 2151?(vinddti , vinddte) a cqu ire . W
7‘
fm d
’
( t M )
I
Lesson XI I .
Subst. : a ffi rm f.,fly, go a t .
m g m .
, qua rrel.‘
flfi fi f. , sa lva t ion , del i vera nce .‘I W
analn .
, p oem . a fg f . , s tick , sta fi'
.
afiffi f . , glory.
“
( fi f‘
q m . ,ray ; re i n . 0 1'
fi t: m .,cowherd
,shepherd ; ( I f? f . , n ight, ‘
M VAW (M )
gua rdia n . ( jo ’
f a ) m m . ,wound .
Enfa f . , birth ; ca s te ; kind . m f .,repos e .
gfi ‘.
f.,decis ion o f cha ra cter ; Ej fil f . , hea ring ; holy wri t.
cou ra ge . g fi r f . , tra di t i o n ; lawi bo ok .
m . , p rin ce . 6 3 m .,s l eep ; dream .
”W W W,
fifth? f . , p rudence, i n tel l igence . gi t f . , jaw .
Wfifi f . , devo tio n , honor . mm,
m vf m ., p a rt , p i ece . Fha ,
f. 0m , low .
i f?f . , p rosp eri ty, bless ing. my N ,f. 0m , pri ncip a l , first . M a cm )
I i fi ! f . , ear th , ground, la nd . a?m .,f .
, n .,or f. 0 5 a},
l igh t .EXQ XW
Exercise XII.
am m a fi m m m zu
fi m zm fi rfi fi rm fa m fl zu s g y
M i s fi t q ugfi afi g qfag a ufi mme t a ln a ri a s fl m ’
é la la fi zfi fi fi gmrw fiq.
fam g ngi afl gfi rw fi lulm sfw fiwm zli l
fi fl’flI W w mm t s l Tfi éfi fl fl fi m ti ara
m m m qm a fi qfi m’
a‘
manm an fl f’fl fi fi i’i ma t
fi rst mm m w rfvia : t ea 1 w warmas " C18 11
15 . V i snu3 rej oi ces4 a t the devotion2 (instr .) of th e p i ous1
a nd6 gives7 del ivera nces. 16. Men3 o f m a ny1 ca stes2 dwel t5 i n the
ci ty4. 17 . The birds1 see3 the hun ter2, a nd
5 fly u p6 from the
1ground“. 18. By the power? of i n tel l igence we overcame4 advers
Lesson X I I . XI I I . 5 9
i tys. 19. The cowherd1 gua rds4 the cows3 i n the w o o dz. 20 . By
i n tel l igence1 a nd3 d il igence2 ye a cqu i re6 m uch4 glory5 . 21 . The
p oem1 tends4 to the poet"s2 gl ory3 (two da tives) . 22. F o r prosp eri ty1
w e bow before3 (Diva 2 23 . The rei ns1 a r e bei ng fa sten ed4
(m g to th e horse’s2 j aws3 24. I n the n igh t1 we both rea d3
(impf .) holy wri t2
L esson XIII .
IBB. Verbs, a- con juga tion . I mp er fect M i ddle. The i mp erfect
m iddle o f verbs i n a i s a s fol low s
S ing . Dua l . Plura l .1 . ate
-
{ii a’
la bhe (a i) °W 3 f€ dla bhc’
waki ow'
mfg dla blzc’
zma hi
2. w arm; a'
la bha tbc‘
is Ofimq a'
la bbetbdm om a’
la blza dhvam
3 . W dla bba ta 0m dla bhetdm ”F a a’
la bha n ta
W i th m a nd W of th e dua l , of. If?! a nd Q? o f the
pres . i nd . m id .
I89 . Root -wor ds in i‘
i a r e decl i ned as foll ows
I n the D . , Ab.- Gen .
,a nd L . s ing .
,a nd G . pl. , these s tems
some times fol low af t ; thus , dh iydz'
,dhz
'
yds, dhz’
ydm ,dlzi n dm . Cf.
§ ISS. Observe tha t -where the ca se- ending begi ns wi th a_vowa l
th e s tem fina l 5 is sp l i t i n to ”lg .
Lesson XI I I .
I90 . The fol low i ng addi t iona l p refixes a r e u sed with verbs, a
mf‘a‘over
,a bove , o n ’
; wfi: ‘u nto
,cl os e up on ” a ffi x]
‘ to u n to ’,‘aga i ns t ’ (often w i th imp l i ed v i ol ence) ; fi t ‘down , i nto , i n nfi i
‘ba ck to,a ga i ns t, i n return “
a‘a p a rt, away,
'
o u t ’.
I9I. Both i n verba l forms a nd i n deriva tives,th e fina l or B
o f a p refix ordi na rily li ngualizes th e i n i tia l Q o f a root to whichi t i s p refixed ; a n d
,i n a few ca ses
,the i t r ema i n s even a fter a n
i n terposed 3 ] of a ugmen t or redup l ica tion ; thus , from W ’r fi ,
m ; Walt -r a fts, p res . pa ss . W 313 , imp f. p a ss . W
I92 . The fina l R o f p refixes i n {i t a n d BE becomes"
EL be
fore i n i tia l q, q , q,115 ; thu s , from trg +m , fi mafi .
Vocabulary XIII.
ver bs ; mm nfa (p r a tz’
bhésa te) a nswer
m + a fa (a tikr dma tz’
,-kr a
’
ma te) (w . a ce . of p ara ) .
p a ss beyond or by, tra nsgress . a ri se ; ru l e.
a il W (uj j éya te) b e born , (r a ca’
ya ti) a rra nge, compose
Ff
o r é ¢v
a ri se from (a l i tera ry work) .“
n a ris e,come into existence. W W I“(p r a tisécgé
'
ztifi old ba ck ;£11 Wfi i cover, keep shu t . forb id .
m fi r (vin deya ti) di sa ppea r, fi e +fi1 (n i séva te) dwel l ; devote
p erish . on eself to ; a ttend .
fi g GE gird ; "
Q T-f a fix mount, sta nd a boveequ ip . or over ; r u l e , govern .
W W (n isp a'
dya te) grow , g i l+ 1qfi t h1ndexy i nj ure , offend .
661 m
a rise from (W a rm . a )
Sometimes, with th e verbs Hg a n d ‘HTT, a bbrevia ted to fi t;bu t i n cla ssica l Skt. m os t comm only u sed a s a conj unction : ‘
a l so ’,‘ to o ’
.
62 Lesson XI I I . X IV.
the la nguage of the Arya n s ” : thus a nswered (imp ers. p a ss.) th eBrahma n s . 18 . By i ts cl everness th e dove wa s freed from then et. 19. The tea cher girded both boys wi th the gird le . 20 . W henth e schola r’s m odes ty disa pp ea red, then the law wa s offended aga inst.21. W hence did ye get (m ) th e whi te cows ? 22 . The whol eea rth wa s rul ed by the grea t k i ng . 23 . F o r p rosp eri ty (da t .) wetook refuge with the k i ng (ll-Hg) . 24. Two law -books w ere com
p osed by Vi snu . 25 . The m i lk of the bla ck c ow is drunk by bothch i ldren .
L esson XIV.
l93 . Verbs, a - conj uga t ion . Pr esen t Imper ati ve Active . Theinflection o f thi s m ode i s a s fol lows
S ing . D ual. Plura l .
1 . W c a'
dam'
“
erg-
rat va’
dava W va'
dama
2 . HQ c a’
a’a W va
’
da tam m va'
da ta
3 . w va’
dala m o a’
da tam ag o—g; va
'
da n tu
I94 . The three firs t p ersons a r e p rop erly subj unctive forms,a nd a ccordi ngly often express a w i sh o r fu tu re a ct ion .
I95 . The second a n d third p ersons o f the imp era tive expressoftenes t a comma nd ; sometimes a w i sh o r fu ture a cti on . Then ega tive u s ed w i th th e imv . i s “
RT.
I96 . A ra re imv . form,ei ther 2nd or 3rd p ers . s i ng . (or
i s m ade w i th th e endi ng am ; thu s , m . I ts va lue i s th a t o fa p osteri or or fu ture im v . (l ike the La ti n forms i n to a nd to te) .
IS7. Root-wor ds i n 3 1“ it, i nflected l ik e li f ,‘ea rth
exemp l ified i n the exerci ses , no further i ndica tion n eed be m ade,
excep t i n sp ecia l i n sta nces , o f the p osi tion o f the words i n theSa nskri t .
Pl ura lN V wi g bbas
m bbuva s
A W b/mvam
Ab ‘JEIK bkuva sn n
G W bbuvos W bhuvamL ‘
O-‘
lfi f bbuvz
77
m c a di mas
Vocabulary XlV.
Ver bs : m m p a ss (drpydte) seem ,l ook
.
i n Wfi‘ (a blzydsya tz’
) rep ea t, Hal-l i nha bi t ; dwel l .s tudy , lea rnlM M M M ’
git I I (p r a va'
r ta te) get a going,throw forwa rd o r break o ut, a rise
i n to .
Lesson XIV.
Subst W f .,song o f p ra i s e ; pra i se . 14m
Wfi tfi m . , guest . “
gm f . , da ughter- in -law . W
wi fl'
n .
,un tru th . Adj
W m .,study ; reci ta tion . W ,
f. 0m ,l ower ; other.
“
i rrfifl'
c omm a nd, p rescrip ti on . W , f. h ighes t ; o ther .
m n . ,sea t , cha i r. W , f. 0m ,
crooked,ben t . Vim/£ 0 44 1 )
gig f . , sp oon , esp . sa crificia l W ,f. “
h beau tifu l .Spoon . Adm :
1T]? m . , l ecture , l esson . W under , undernea th (gem) . “ 544 “
W T f. , crea tu re ; subj ect . fi m l ong (of t ime) .
i f”ea rth , ground . {WEEK fa r , a fa r .
W n ornamen t. I n pr ohibitive pa r ticle , l ike Greek31 f. , eyebrow . Naif, La ti n n e.
Wi fe wom a n , w i fe Affj jfi‘
j HT (p ostpos. ) o r .
3? f . , a l ta r. w n ea r by .
W f .,m other- in -law .
0\
Exercise XIV.
a fi m m ufi a ai m w l
fi fi m m fi é fi m m u a n
W W W fl W W H IW W ?
a a a fi fm m ua l fi afl geno fi fi fi qfifi ls l
g a m m aj yfi fw m slqmfi r fl awmmma ria lu
"
é affi rm : ga rfi aw'
fif ga a mmw rfigfi
wfi rfi i m m’
i afi m t fi lm
am fam rfi rfir W a r I so uam ?an mfi I Q Q I % W W T W I Q Q I § § i Q fi fiWfi I Q Q I
g en-
( am fi f orums "
15 . The women si ng the pra i ses (singula r ) o f I ndrani (p a ss.cousin ) . 16.
“ Study ye holy wri t a nd th e sci ences,sp eak the
Lesson XIV. XV . 65
th e tru th,honor you r tea chers ” : thus1 i s the p rescrip tion3 o f th e
tex t-books2 fo r schola rs4 (gen ) . 17 . Let k i ngs p rotect their sub
jec ts a nd pu n ish the wicked : thu s i s the law no t o ffended18 . 0 women , reveren ce your mothers-in -law . 19. Let n ot thecoa chma n s trike o r tormen t the horses . 20.
“ Bring the j ewel sthus the two m a id-s erva n ts were comma nded by the queen . Letu s w i th two spoons dr o p wa te r o n the a l ta r . 22.
“Let us p lay withd i ce for money ” thu s spoke th e two wa rriors (p a ss)23 .
“ To -day l e t m e i n i t i a te (imu . ) my two sons” : thu s says th eBrahma n . 24. Let the m e n dig a ci s tern .
L esson XV.
I99 . Ve rbs, a conjugation . Pr esen t I mp er ative M iddle. The
presen t impera tive middl e i s i nflected thus :
S i ng Dua l . Plura l1 a ir la
’
bhd i m ay?la’
bbd c a hd i W ?la bhdma ha i
2 m la bba sca 653m la’
bhethdm W la bha dkvam
200 . The firs t p erson s a r e rea l ly subj un ctive forms . The inflecti o n o f th e p a ssive imv. i s p recisely sim i la r : thu s fi fi , m ,
a m , etc .20 I. N oun s i n Q r . These s tems , l ike m a ny bel onging to the.
consona n t -decl en s ion,exh ib i t i n thei r i nflecti o n a d ifference o f
s tem -form : s trong,middle
, a nd w eak . (F o r the ca ses ca ll ed s trong,etc . , see I n trod .
,I n th e weak ca ses (excep t l oc . s i ng . ) the
s tem -fin alis a r, wh ich i n the w eakes t ca ses i s cha nged na tura l lyto ( r . Bu t a s rega rds the s trong ca ses , the s tem s o f th i s decl ens io nfa l l i n to two cla sses : i n the o n e which i s m uch the la rger,comp ri s ing all the n omin a agou tis, a nd a few others the a i svr iddhied
,becoming m i d r ; whi le in the o ther cla ss , conta i n ing
Pe rr y , Sa nsk r i t Pr imer . 5
Lesson XV.
m ost n ouns of rela tionship , the a i s guna ted , becom i ng a t a r .
I n both cla sses , th e lo o . s ing . h a s a t a r a s s tem -final. The a bl
gem -sing. i s of pecul ia r forma ti on ; a nd th e fina l ‘
g r i s drop pedi n the nomin a tive singu la r.
202. N om i n a agouti s i n as; r, l ike a t?m .,
‘doer ’
I . fl ka r trd ai ling -trbhydm
i
ka r trbhis
D . i n?ka r tr e W ka r trbhya s
4 61 1“ “Va-v i al»: Ab . aiij‘
g ka r tur (or -a s)A av lb
G . “R
f-Q ka r tr os mim ka r tfzi dm
L . aifift ka r ta r i me
gs ka r trsu
203 . Two noun s o f rela tio n sh ip , fi s t ,“ si s ter ”
, a nd Hg m .,
‘gra ndson ’, fol low thi s decl ens ion ; but "
G 3 m akes the a ce . pl.
E EKsva sr
-s.
204. The nou ns o f a gency a r e sometim es u sed p a rticip ia l ly,o r w i th a dj ective va lue . The corresponding feminine- stem is m adei n “
t i , a nd decl i ned l ike afi ; thu s , Gif f ka r tr i .205 . The gramm a ria ns p rescribe a comp l ete n eu ter decl ensi on
a l so for ba ses i n g, p reci sely a na l ogou s w ith tha t of o r“
Hg ,
but such form s a re ra re .
Vocabulary XV.
wa rm ; 1a‘
gi-Fl
'
R tecti o n to , take r efuge wi th
p erform ,do .
Lesson XV .
Subst 113 n . s tep .
a “ . U. » W m .,t ea cher M ila n “ ? m i n ” p ena n ce exp ia ti on .
7 ,
39}l".
Eli m .
,doer
,maker, au thor ; a s Hi m ” suppo r te r , p r eserver ;lo rd
M }6
a dj . , doi ng , mak i ng . hu sba nd ; m a s ter.
m m .,time . ( fa?m .
, p rote ctor .
M (W W\§ VT f . , gra ci ousness , p i ty . 5 133“ m .
,tria l , law -su i tJ J a a A/m
,c am .
m .,giver ; as a dj .
, generou s . W m . , pu ni sh er, governor . V2:
m .,scamp , rogue. Hg m . , crea tor .
{ g m .,se er
,a uthor (of Vedic n .
,honor
,glory (of ten a s am
books) ; a s a dj ,seeing . in decl.
,w . f oll
’
y
mg m .,crea tor. Adj
W m .
,decis i on ; certa i nty . {ft} , f. poor .
33 m . , l eader . a t , f. bes t,most excel l en t
“fi g‘
a‘
m .,l ea rn ed m a n p undit. better (w. f oll
’
y“
M
Exercise XV.
gfi‘
flfi lfl m a‘
f fi fl g fiifl t l
ufii qufa arrfi’vt gsiw na fi
’i
n s ll
wa rfa fi mw a'
r’rfi
’
ri fl a mm % fi tfi m §i
{fi m fi m fi ls la gfi a fi wm i a lfi r fi
Hfim
gfi n m w fi ls lufim m fl w afifi
W fi m zm lm a gw’t aqfl i w fi
'
fi wfi fl fi
rmzne n
W ords a re often repea ted , to give a n i n ten s ive, adis tribu t ive ,or a repeti ti ona l m ea n i ng. So here “
a t every step ” . The pos itiou o f
‘
fl’
is very u nusua l ; i t wou l d na tura l ly fol l ow Elia .
L o c . absol. supp ly “ being ” .
68 Lesson XV. XVI .
10 . Let the wife l ove her husba nd . 1 1. Let th e wa rriors fol lowtheir l ea ders a n d fight wi th th e enemy 12. At the r ive r the boyi s to m ee t h is two s i s ters 13 . The world wa s crea ted byth e crea tor. 14. I n the houses of p i ous givers a lm s i s given toa sce ti cs . 15 . King Bhoj a wa s (WG generou s towa rd the au thor
(loc . ) o f the eu logies . 16 . Let serva nts a lways b e u sefu l to (fix)their ma sters 17 . F o r protection‘ (area ) betake you rse lves5
to th e gods3,th e p rotectors2 o f the p i o usl. 18 . Men l ive by th e
gra ciou s ness of the crea to r. 19 . O generou s o n e,th e poor b end
bef ore thee ! 20 . The ma n l ea ds hi s s is ters to the ci ty (p a ss.
Lesso n XVI .
206 . Ver bs, a - con jugation . Pr esen t Op tati ve Active . The
p resen t op ta tive i s form ed from the genera l p resent- stem by the
a ddi ti on o f a mode- s ign , a fter which a re u s ed seconda ry endings (i n 3 rd pl. a c t. 3 11: a s, i n lst sing . m id . w a
,i n 3 rd -pl. m id .
(“
it r a n ) . After a n a -s tem,th is m ode-sign , i n all voices
,i s i “
i,
una ccen ted,which blends with th e fina l a to 11 e (a ccen ted o r
not , a ccordi ng to.
the a ccen t of th e a ) : a nd th e ‘
Q i s m a i n ta i nedu ncha nged before a vowel-ending (Q R, W , m , a rena ) by
mea n s o f a n i n terp osed euphon ic Elly. The i nflecti o n i n th e a ctivevoice i s a s fol lows
Sing . Dua l . Plura l .1 a?“ c a deyam Hawc a deva c a dema
2 32R va des 327m; c a detam 323 va deta
3 W c a det va’
detam Haw c a deyus
S imila rly , m vipéyam ,
"
Gram n a’
hyeyam , Wcor a
’
yeyam ,etc .
Lesson XVI .
Snbst
N
'
Jfi'
m .,f .,bu l l, s teer, cow ; f. ,
sp eech .
fi a n .
,ox -na tu re ; stup idi ty.
ENG m .,fodder
,hay.
W IT?! m . , so n-i h -law .
m g f . , da ughter.ITS,
" n .,mud
,bog .
fira m . , fa the r ; du .
, pa ren ts ; pl.
3“ m . ,W i s e m a n
,sage .
a re! m . , brother .
m m .
,month
i t“ ! n p a i r
m n p rotection . if".m g n . , a n obla tion to th e m a n es,a ccompla n i ed by a sa crificia l
Exercise XVI.
fi w fi fl gfi m fi m m fi la lawm w
fi a nwfi fi fi fs fim lslm m mu m a fi gn s l
W fi rrfitfi r ma t?w arm I in fir. n’
i’
t m filt
Pred ica te . Play up on words throughou t the verse .
mea l a nd gifts to th e Brahm a ns .
Adj
m ,f. m ore
,grea ter
,
grea tes t .
m , f. 0 3m gra n ting wishes ;a s f . , 8 0 . Q 3 , the fa bu l ou s W o n
der -cow .
M ,f. OW , badly a rra nged
o r u sed .
Hgfi i , f. 0 3 11, a rra nged , u sed .
319 , f. i n , best .
Pr om :
F T f . , she , i t.
Adv. an d Con j . :
Lesson XVI . XVI I . 71
m i m a fii a lem s fflm : fngwtw a tgm fa
m II ‘R II
13 . By B sabha da tta , so n- in-law o f N aha pan a , ma ny ca t tl e a nd
v i l lages a n d m uch money w ere given to th e Brahma ns . 14. Thousha l t give the m oth er’s j ewel s to the s isters (op t . a nd 15 . Letthe coa chma n bri ng (Err-g ) fodder for th e horses ; l e t h im no t tormen t the horses . 16. Of the fa ther’s p rop erty a grea ter pa r t i s tobe given (ime .) to th e eldes t o f th e brothers . 17 .
“ Children , bringw ood a nd wa ter i n to the hou s e da i ly ” ; thu s wa s th e fa ther’s comm a nd . 18 . Let the cows gra ze i n th e fores t . 19. Let both l ive o nthe m i lk (instr .) o f the bla ck cow . 20 . The wa gon i s drawn bytwo s teers . 21. The seer rej oices over th e p a i r (instr .) o f whi tes teers . 22. Ha ri a nd i a ma rry two sisters , the daugh ters of Rama .
L esson XVII .
f 2 I0 . Ve rbs , a con jugati on . Pr esen t Op tative M iddle. Theopta tive middl e (a w e) o f a -s tems
,formed a s show n in the
p reced i ng les son , i s i nflected a s fol low s :
3 . 35 rd la'
bheta W m ldbheyatam fi < fl la’
bher a n
Simila rl y corye’
ya . 33 16 511 sa rizga ccheya , etc.Declen s ion . The s tem ifi‘ f . ,
‘sh ip, boa t ’, i s en tirely regu la r
,tak i ng throughou t th e norm a l endi ngs
, a s given i n § 90 .
Thus : m : W : W : etc ° i “Ta : M ae tc ° 3 m 1
fi fifl t
72 Lesson XVI I .
2I2. The stem s ending i n long vow el s (an ,
“
t , Hi ) fa l l i n totwo wel l-ma rked cla sses : A . r oot-stem s mos tly monosyl la bi can d th e i r compoun ds, w i th a compa ra tively sma l l number o f othersi nflected l ike them ; B . der i va tive f em in in e stem s i n a n a nd i ,with a few i n i nflec ted l ike mm . Hg} a nd a m. The s temsof cla s s A tak e the n ormalendings throughou t
,w i th op tio na l ex
cep ti o n s i n da t. , abl. -gen . ,a nd l oc. s ing . fem .
,a nd w i th “
i t i nsertedbefore m o f the gen . pl. The simp l e words a r e a s nou ns withfew excep ti ons fem . ; a s a dj ectives (ra re) , a nd i n a dj ective com
p ou nds , they coi ncide i n ma sc. a n d fem . forms . The decl en si on o f
th e s imp l e words i n “
E: a n d 3 7 ha s been given (i n l8 9,l97) ;
those i n WT a r e ra re tha t i t i s n o t p oss ibl e to make up a whol escheme of forms i n a ctua l use .
2l3 . W hen a ny roo t i n WTor i “ o r a i s found a s fina l memberof a comp ou nd word , thes e roo t - fi n als a re trea ted a s fol lows1. Roots in an lo se tha t vowel before vowel- endings, excep t i nthe s trong ca ses a nd i n th e a ce . pl. , which i s l ike the n omina t ive .Thus
, fag -tu m .
,f . ,
‘all- p rotecti ng
’°
S ing. D ua l . Plura l .
n
I . fawn vicvap-d fa‘a'fi a vievap
-os rm
2 I4. 2. Roots i n “
i"
a nd Bi cha nge their fina l vow el , before
vowe l-endi ngs , i n to “
i t a nd q,i f but o n e consona n t p recede th e fina l
vowe l ; bu t i f two o r more consona n ts p recede , the cha nge i s i n to
{21\ a n d 3 3CThus
, Eta -a?! m.,f . ,
‘ corn-buying ’: n om .-vo c . a a
afifi ,a cc .
‘
qa fm ; “ Jim”f. ,
‘s tree t-sweep er ’: n om . s ing.
w , a cc . Elm .
Lesson XVI I .
Vocabulary XVII.
Verbs I n: (r a’
ma te) amus e on esel f.
ta; urn (p r a tiksa te) exp ect . fa (virdma ti ) cea se from
W‘Q i- Wfi -
‘
I (a bhin a’
nda ti, p oet . cea s e .
- te) rej o ice i n , gree t wi th j oy“
Q TJr‘afl (a nu tz
’
stha ti) fol l ow o ut,
a ccomp l i sh .
Subst. : fi ra n fri end. ( m . 43 h “
W n . ,ga rden
ta
;m m ) ga
rn . , ba ttl e .
ififq f . , agricu l ture . a‘
rfm‘
az n .,tra de.
Sa'
fa‘
d n .
,l i fe . f
‘
q'
fi : m ., ru l e ; fa te .(W
fl ea m ., comm and .
13“ m ., fa ther- in -law .
W TQ n .,ca ttle-ra i s i ng . Adj
W 33 3 ) " domestic pri es t, chap Hg , f. 0 3 11 , good, p l ea sa n t, dea r ;la i n . a s n . subst. , fortun e .
Ham n . , ea ti ng . f. V i n ,doubtfu l ; n u
m .,serva n t . s tea dy .
11W n . , dea th .
Exercise XVII.
m afia w as fa i n gm?m u"
u e}u
w aft film : um ganlana t?a t : 31323 313 fasfiwzrfa
’
s
W W : 116mm? 32 11 : 3mm m fms’
fin nmmé’
m a t
fi fi lsléfi wi mé nrfi'
sm s lwfz nswm mfi fis fia
i‘
n ai rm sfii am I u I s umac W 3 ‘g’fi fsfl t‘s
yaw fimfi i‘
fi t n t”
. I amnfifi is i‘
cii'
i ia e n i imi
m mm gufi i m aqfim t l j wfi wfi fi téfi mm i e nfi gm nqo nw fi
“
Gim m e "
Ru l e for a n a s cetic,who i s to p u t a side allea rthly desire s
a nd p a ssions .
74 Lesson XVI I . XVI I I .
12. Let fodder be brought (WT-E) (op t. , imu .) by the brotherfor the horses o f th e all-p rotecting king. 13 . M ay ye see goodfortun e m ay ye a cqu ire (Elli ) glory. 14. The king withhi s W a rriors crossed the sea i n a ship . 15 . Tel l (op t. , imu .) whereo ur fri ends m ay meet w i th thei r brothers . 16 . Y o u m ay amuse
yourselves i n the ga rden , bu t cea se ea ti ng (a bl. of m ) the fru i ts
(gen ) . 17. Mayes t thou be saved by the all-protector from thy
misfortun e . 18 . To -day l e t th e k i ng’s two sons be consecra ted
(op t ., imu.) by th e hou se - pri es t . { 19. Ye both sha ll greet (op timu . ) you r p a r en ts . 20 . I t we two shou ld speak u n tru th
,th en we
shou l d be p un i shed by th e k i ng. 21. M ay I conqu er the enemiesw i th my brave wa rri ors : thu s i s the k i ng’s w i sh (use {EL22. M ay we receive the rewa rd o f v i r tue .
L esson XVIII.
df2l5 . Cau sat ive. The ch ief points to be no ti ced i n the form
a tion o f ca u sa tive- s tems ha ve been given a l rea dy (in Less . V I I ) ;some addi tiona l o nes fol low .
4
2IS. Most roots i n WI a nd a a dd q before the conjuga tio nsign ; thu s , stun ts from 13 1 ; W e ; nma fi t ; m in ts from“
31 . 3 “m akes 8 11111151 ; W a nd 13 1 , som etimes fi ‘
mfl fil, etc . , somet imes fi W fi-l, etc . 1111 ,
‘ dri nk ’,makes W (a s though from
til) . A few roots in a n d i tak e th e same 1 ,with va riou s
i rregula ri t i es : thu s, m m from a ffix-K .
q2I7 . Med ialo r i n i tia l 3?i n a l ight syl la ble i s commonly l ength
ened , bu t sometimes rema i n s u ncha nged . Thus , t it-t, W ;
am .351mm;
“
i nt. W u. But most roo ts in w t . a n d a n ,
F ri , I t‘ll, EH
‘EL, with o ther ra rer ones , genera l ly keep the i t shortthu s
, mt , W ra
Lesson XVI I I . 75
2I8 . F i na l vowel s take urddhi before thu s , “
35, mm ;
3 ,
“
m i sfi t.
2l9 . Some verbs o f ca u sa tive mea ning a r e by form a ti on denomina tives thus 1:11m ,
‘
p rotect ’, ca l led ca usa t ive to 2m ; ffi
unfit . to I ii ; W e ,to wit ; m anta .
to 3 71 .
220 . F o r the pa ssive o f ca usa t ives, see Less . X .
22 I. The ca u sa tives o f in tra ns i tive verbs a r e tra nsi tive . Theca u sa t ives o f tra nsi tive verbs a r e construed sometimes (a ) wi th twoa ccusa tives
,som etimes (6) w i th a n a ce . o f the obj ect a nd a n i n
strum en talo f th e a gen t. Thu s , “ he ca uses the b irds to e a t th ecakes ” m ay be rendered e i ther (a ) : IHW R fi ng m gm ,
o r (b) fasfi : fuo a m
i 222 . Pa r ti c i ples. The gen era l p a rti cip ia l endi ngs a r e fl fi\
(weak form met) for th e a ctive , a n d WT? for the m iddl e . Buta fter a ten s e - s tem i n i t, the a ctive suffix i s v i rtua l ly «1 1 , o n e
o f the two “
i t’s bei ng l os t ; a nd the midd l e suffix i s FIT-1 (ex
cep t W sometimes i n ca usa t ive form s). Thus , m bha’
ua n t,
gm tadan t, fl a i r divya n t, fi a t
—cl; cor a
’
ya n t ; Ham bhava
man a,e tc. F o r th e declen s io n o f the pa rti cip l e s i n W
.
see bel ow ,
Less . XXI I I .1 223 . Pr on oun of the F i r st Per son . The p ronomi na l decl ens ionexh ibits som e s triki ng p ecul ia ri ti es which a re n o t ea s i ly exp la i n ed .
The p ronoun of th e firs t p erson is decl i n ed thusS i ng . Dua l . Pl ura l .
m mw an t . i t
sum
m am : a.
mm , W
Lesson XVI I I .w,
0
t
224 . The forms tn , 3 , m a r e en cltti c , a nd a r e neveru sed a t the begi nni ng o f a sentence , or before the pa rticl es a “
,
t 225 . I n pronou ns of the firs t a n d second p erson s the p lural iso ften used fo r the s i ngu la r . Pronouns (a nd o ther words a s well )show i n Sa nskri t a curious tenden cy to a gree i n form w i th the
p redica te ra ther tha n w i th the subj ect to which they refer.
Vocabulary XVIII.
Ve rbs, wi th cau sati ves : fl di e ; ca us (mar dya ti) ki l l‘
Q ‘i e a t ; ca u s . (aca
'
yali) make“
fl at sa crifice ; ca u s . (yaj a’
ya ti)
ea t ; give to ea t . m ake to sa crifice ; offer sa crifice
W study,read ; ca u s . (a for
dhyap a'
ya ti) tea ch . a§ +wfi i i n ca u s . (a bh i vadaya ti)
333 i“ ca us . (kalp dya ti ,- te) m ake ; greet .
orda i n,a ppoi n t . fag know ; ca us . (veddya ti) ih
i n ca ns . (j a n a'
ya ti) b eget . form
fi t i 511“ i n ca us . (aj fiap dya ti ) + fil
‘ i n ca ns. i nfo rmcomma nd . (ua
'
rdha te) grow ; ca us . (va r -
(fl yo m
131 give ; ca u s . (dap a'
ya ti ) m ake dha ydti ,- te) make gr ow ; br ing up .
give o r p ay . GIRLin c a us . (cya thdya ti ) tormen t .
gfl se e ; i n ca n s . (da rpdya ti ) show . g hea r ; i n ca ns. (cr ac a'
ya ti) m ake13.-IT tlfi ,
i n ca u s . dha'
p dya ti) hea r, i . e . reci te, p rocla im (a cc .
m ake pu t on , clo the i n (two‘
vfl +'
fl q l ea d away (ca u s . ap a Err s ta nd ; i n c a n s. (sthap dya ti)
naya'
ya ti ) . p u t , p la ce ; a pp oin t ; ste p .
I N T i n ca u s . (p r a thdya ti) sp rea d , I t (p r a tistha te) sta rt o ff ; i n
p rocla im . ca u s . (p r a sthap a'
ya ti) send .
The pri es t ,who p erforms sa crifice for th e benefi t of a nother
p erson i s sa id to “ m ake tha t p erson sa crifice ” , a s though thela tter (who i s ca l l ed W ) were cel ebra ting the sa crifice fo rhimself.
78 Lesson XVI I I . XIX.
poet reci te (use W ) a eu l ogy of Visnu . 24. W e torment o urhea rts with wishes . 25 . Both schola rs gree t the tea cher.
lL esson XIX .
226. Pr on oun of the Secon d Per son . This p ronoun (for whichthe na tives a ssume fi g a nd agin g a s ba ses) i s decl ined thu s
S i ngu la r. D ual. Plura l .N . a n em a“A ' W , m 13W , 3 1K w , WL W {ram-rmD W , 3 EUR W WR, W
Ab . W T.
G . an , as“ , W gnaw . WL . a fix w i g227 . The forms 3 , W , W a r e encl i tics , subj ect to the
sam e ru l es a s ”
RT, fl , etc .228 . The Pr on oun of the Th i r d Person (for which the na tives
a ssum e Hg a s ba se the ba s e i s rea l ly a ) i s decl in ed a s fol lows
(note n om . s i ng , m . a nd
M a sculin eSing . Dua l . Plu ra l .
N . as“
vii
A . HR
1”cm W flu
D Ha sure a t?!Ah ' m 77 i)
L . m fig mg
i s made a lmost en tirely by the gen i tive ca s e , no t by a deriva tivep ossess ive a dj ective . Bu t often the u nempha ti c possess ive p ronouno f the Engl ish i s om i tted i n Sa nskri t .
Lesson X IX .
N euter
Dua l . Plura l .
3
n 37
m fig: etc . , as in the m a sculine .
229. The n om . sing. ma sc. m , a nd i ts comp ound m , l osetheir fina l a before a ny consona n t ; before vowels , a nd a t th e en do f a s en tence , they foll ow the u sua l euphon i c ru les . Thu s , G 1 1
fi fa , 11 fi rsfa ; n ( W ; t it m fa ; fi re e :.
230 . The th ird persona l p ronou n i s us ed often es t a s a weakor i ndefin i te dem ons tra tive
,esp ecia l ly a s a n teceden t to a rela tive ;
a nd often l ike the E ngl i sh “ defini te a rti cle . ”
23l. Like a a r e decl i ned : (a ) QR,
‘ th i s ’,formed by p r efix ing
‘
q to the forms o f 3 ,throughou t ; thu s , nom . si ng . m . “ a , f. m ,
11. mg ; (6) th e r ela t ive p ron oun (a nd a dj .)‘
fl’
,
‘which who ’;
(0) comp a ra tives and sup erla tives from pronomina l roo ts , sucha s fl at , wh ich (o f the a nd m ‘which (of th eSo W a n d W ; m a n
‘on e o f m a ny ’
;“
aw ‘o ther ’, wi th i tscom pa ra t ive W 5 a nd W
‘di fferen t ’. Y e t other words a r eso i nflected , but w i th m i n s tea d o f mg i n n om .
-a cc .-vo c . s i ng.
n eu t. : a s, Ha, fi g ,
‘all’ ; can
‘o ue
’
,i n pl. ‘som e ’ ; 3 3121, f. °1fi
(only si ng . a nd ‘both ’.232 . The i n terroga tive p ronou n “
Eli (fo r wh ich th e H i ndu s giveth e ba s e a s W ) fol l ows p reci sely th e decl ens io n o f 3 ,
excep tn om .
-a cc . sing . n eu t . f i g ; n om . si ng. m . m ,f. an .
233 . A number ofwords fol low th e p ronomi na l d ecl en si on i nsom e o f their sign ifica tio n s, o r op tion a l ly ; bu t i n o th er senses, o rw i thou t known ru l e
,lap se i n to th e a dj ective i nflecti on . Such a re
0.
compa ra tives a nd superla tives from p reposi tiona l stem s, a s W‘l owe r ’, “ 11
‘Iowest ’; t it‘ch ief’, ‘ea rl i er ’, W ‘
upper ’,
80 Lesson XIX.
‘northern ’, {fan ‘ sou thern ’,etc. Occa si ona l forms o f th e p ro
n omina l d eclen s io n a r e. met with from numera l a dj ectives , a nd fromother words having somewha t o f a numera l cha ra cter, a s W
‘few ’
, m i ‘half ’,e tc .
234. Peculi a r i ties i n the use of r ela t ive p r onoun s, etc . TheSa nskri t often pu ts th e rela tive cla u s e before th e a nteceden t cla u se
,
a nd i n s erts the substa n tive to wh ich th e rela tive refers i n to the “
same clau se with th e rela tive , i n s tead o f l ea ving i t i n the a n teceden tcla u se . I n tra n sla ting in to Sa nskri t , a rela tive cla u se i s to be
p la ced e i ther before o r a fter the whol e a nteceden t clau se ;but not i n serted i n to th e a nteceden t cla u se , a s i s don e i nE nglish . Thu s, “ the m ou n ta i n whi ch we saw yesterday i s veryhigh ” wou ld be i n Sa nskri t ei ther : at qéei azj a} m (a
vita as o r : a with sui t: “a n“
61 m m ; bu t me t afi ifi I f azi a?m ,
etc., a ccordi ng to th e E nglish id iom .
235 . The rela tive w ord m ay sta nd a nywhere i n i ts cla use ;thu s
, fill?m 3 “ the gods whos e ch i ef i s i a”.
Sometimes rela t ive o r demonstra tive a dverbs a r e u sed a s equ iva l en tso f certa i n ca se-forms of rela t ive o r demons tra tive pronou ns ; thu s ,“
as a? w e re.
236 . The rep eti ti on o f th e rela tive gives a n i ndefin i te mea n ing‘whosoever
,wha tever ’. The same resu l t i s m uch m ore commonly
a tta i n ed by a ddi ng to the rela t ive th e i n terroga tive p ronou n , w ith
(or, l ess u su a l ly , withou t) o n e o f the pa rticl es a , fl'
fl , fi g , a ffix,
Sometimes the i n terroga tive a l one i s used w i th these p a rticl esi n a simila r sense . Thu s ;m m ufa “ wha tever thi s woma nrela tes” ; “
eh I re: 311mm“ wha tever a ny on e
’s di sposi tio n m ay
fl 37a fem “ he gives to some o n e o r o ther ” ; mW 3 ? a nd “ he takes from n o on e wha tever ” .
Lesson XIX .
Vocabulary XIX.
Verbs Eli say, sp eak ; name ; i n ca us .
m si t ; i n cau s . p la ce . (vd ca'
ya ti ) m ake (a writte n l ea f)I !“ drink ; i n ca u s . (p dya
'
ya ti ) sp ea k , i . e . rea d .
give to dri nk , wa ter. 8 3 (sa'
lza te) endure .
p rotect ; i n ca us . (p dldya tz’
) m succeed ; i n ca us .
p ro tect . (sddbdya tz’
) p erform , a cqu ire .”
fl rejoice ; i n cau s . (p r indya tz’
) a k i l l ; cau s . (ghd tdya tz’
) ha vem ake rej oi ce, p lea se . k i l led .
fi fea r ; i n ca u s . (bkisdya te, bbdyd 5 1 ca l l ; in ca n s. ha ve
ga te) terrify , frighten . ca l l ed .
Sub st m . , compa n ion , help er.
W n ., busin ess , con cern .
i f“ m . ,n . p r .
,a god .
Haw f . , n . p r .
Wfi-I f . , ga i t ; refuge .
m m . , n .,foot
,l eg .
5 ? n . ,umbrella .
gm n . , m ilk .
Q a‘
éfl‘
f .,n . pr .
,K rsna
’s mother
E‘Z
‘
éfi f . , ea rth .
Efi‘
, a s p refix to prop er n am es,ha s the m ea n i ng ‘fa mou s ’
,
‘ho
n o r able
Exercise XIX.
W m t‘
i a mfi fe fl fizfi wfi
nfiu fi t filfl filufi zm m fi u e n
u fa a fa a f crafi f‘e a fl t n fwfl umafi e m
fi a w fi m a fi i fi m r fi m elm wuPerry , Sa nskr i t Primer.
fa?” withou t (w. instr . or am ;
of ten
82 Lesson X IX . XX.
m um W a m fin fi i éfiawm ulgw gze vr
fl a let gfi tw a fi w fi a fa fi amn m i nfi n i
W fim m é mé fi rz’
tam t'c lm
"
w an na
m zufl fi le lm‘
i afi afi a a W HW W W
wa lqo uRe fusi ng W TWW F I Q Q I newW fi a fim qa lfi fi m t m fi mgm wfi m
15 . The husba nd6 o f tha ti’ (gen ) K ausalya2 (loc) , of whom 1
(loo. f em ) Rama 3 wa s born“, i s ca l led8 D aca r a tha7. 16. The tea cher"
rej oi ces3 a t thy1 d i l igence2 (a bl) . 17 . W hy (aim ) speakes t tho uso ? 18 . Others tha n we could no t endure thi s su ffering . 19 . Thetea cher tea ches ” us holy-wri t a nd the law-books. 20 . M ay all
8
those7 k i ngs2 who1 protect6 their subj ects a ccording to4 (3 13 , p ost
p os.) th e law3 (a cc . ) be vic to r io usg. 21 . The fru i ts of all these
trees a r e sweet . 22. M ay the glory of allwomen , who honor theirhu sba nds , i ncrea se 23 . I n this kingdom the k ing’s pu ni shmen tter r ifi es the w i cked . 24.W hich of th e two fru its do ye wish? 25 . Myfa ther had gold given to m e, cows to thee , to the o ther brothernoth ing .
L esson XX .
237 . Declen si on of Stem s i n Con son an ts. All n oun - s tem s i ncon sona n ts m ay w el l be cla ssed together , si n ce the p ecu l ia ri ti esshown by some concern only the stems themselves, a nd not th eend ings . Ma scu l i n es a nd fem i n i n es o f the same fina l a re i nflected
p recisely a l ike ; a nd neu ters a re p ecu l ia r (a s u sua l ly i n the other
Other tha n thou ” . W i th W ,a s wi th comp a ra tives , the
abla tive i s u sed .
“ Makes us rea d (wfiq-‘
g ca us
Lesson XX . 8 3
declen si on s) only i n th e n om .-a cc .
-vo c . o f all n umbers . Bu t th em aj ori ty o f consona n ta l s tems form a Sp ecia l femin in e s tem bya dding i (n ever WT) to th e weak form of th e m a scu l i n e .
238 . Va ria tion s , a s between s tronger a nd weaker forms,a re
very genera l i n con sona n ta l s tems : e i ther of s trong a nd weak stems ,o r o f s trong, middl e , a nd weakes t . The endings a r e throughou t th en orm a l ones (I n trod.
,
239 . The genera l law concern ing fin a l con sona n ts i s a s fol lows1 . The m ore u su a l e tymol ogicalfina l s a r e “
q ,
“
g, q , T , a ,
HE, R, z; spora di c a r e q, EL, “L a s fina l s .2. I n genera l , only one consona n t, o f wha tever kind , i s a l l ow
ed to sta nd a t the end of a word ; i f two or more w ou ld e tym o
l ogica l ly occu r there , the la s t is dropp ed , a nd a ga i n the la s t,
u nti l bu t on e rema i ns .3 . Of the n on -na sa l m u tes
,only th e firs t i n ea ch seri es , th e
non-a sp i ra te surd, i s a ll owed a s fin a l ; th e o thers su rd a sp .,a n d
both sona n ts a r e regu la rly converted i n to th i s , wherever theywou l d etymologi ca l ly occur .
4. A fina l pa la ta l , o r g, becom es e ither ab o r°
(le ss ofte n ) g ;but g i n a very few ca ses (where i t rep resen ts origi na l $1) be
com es FL240 . According to 239 . 2
,the q of th e mom . sing .
, m . a nd
f., i s a lways los t ; a nd i rregu la ri ties o f trea tmen t o f the s tem -fi n al
,
i n th is ca se, a r e n o t i n frequen t .
24I. Before th e p a da -en dings ,m ,m , m a nd (j , a stemfina l i s trea ted a s i n externa l comb i na ti on .
242 . An a sp i ra te m u te i s cha nged to i ts corresp onding nona sp i ra te before a no ther non - na sa l m u te o r a s ibi la n t ; i t s ta ndsu na l tered only before a vowel or semivowel o r n a sa l . Hence sucha m u te i s doubled by p refix ing i ts ow n corresponding non - a sp ira te.
243 . Consonan t-stems of on e form in a , g , 21 and "6Be
6*
84: Lesson XX .
fore suffixalliloboth a a nd ‘
a\a s s tem - fi nals become g ; I i as
s tem - fi nal b ecom es 1 . Examp l es : m m .,
‘w i nd ’; 3 IR f .
,
‘misfortun e ’; E1W n .,
‘ the world ’.
Sing. Plura l .
m | mm | m fia u
A . a am lm nm u
I . m | m lam n
D .
A b . 3 11m lm u 1)
AG o a, n W
'
lm m Elm-HR u
L . W i s-
mm " m um mnm n
F o r th e 1 i n serted i n nom .-a cc . pl. neu ter, cf. p hala
‘
m’
,ma
dham'
,etc .
244 . I n a few roots,when a fina l sona n t a sp i ra te (H\
, “a
“
ata l s o g,
representing a ) l oses i ts a sp ira tion a ccording to 239 . 3,
242,the i n i tia l sona n t consona n t (1L,
“
g,o r 3 ) becomes a sp i ra te ;
thus, § H\
, nom .-vo c . s i ng. ii i
-t ; W E , il2g .
245 . Agr eemen t of adj ectives. I f th e same adj ective qua l i fytwo or m ore subs ta n tives
,i t w il l be used i n thei r combi ned number ;
i f the subs ta n tives a r e m a scul i n e a nd femin i n e,the a dj . w i ll be
m a sc . ; but i n a combi na ti on of ma sc. or fem . subj ects wi th neu ter,the a dj ect ive wi l l b e neu ter .
86 Lesson XX . XXI .
W W | 8 I W fl § H I H I H€fi 3mm313 I fi l
‘
d ifi fl m o W i e tw a z (gen ) fam aa
i nfi rm?W ‘EH I C I m fisrs ft a : slamm e
m fi i z sfi'
fis : awfi lc lv fi afsew t qm w
W ea vers m fa t qa lw fifimfi a rm a i r-
(m
W a lqa lm w m m fi zwfi ms l
14. I ndr a , with the Ma ru ts a s his comp a n ions , ki ll ed Vrtra .
15 . W i thou t a compa n ion n o o n e ca n p erform a difficult busi ness .16 . One (exp r ess in pl. ) shou l d p la nt trees o n allthe roa ds , for th esak e o f the sha de. 17 . Those friends who a r e tru e i n m i sfortunea re ha rd to find in the thr ee worlds . 18 . The girdl e a nd the sa credcord o f Arya n s a r e to be made threefold (n ea t. dual) . 19 . Put
(“
Q T ca us.) thi s s ton e behi nd the fire . 20 . The ocea n i s ca l l ed bythe poets th e hu sba nd o f rivers . 21. Al l subj ects mu st be protected
(imv. ) by their kings . 22. Some o f thes e Brahma ns a r e l ea rn ed inthe Upa n i sads , o thers i n the law-books .
L esson XXI .
246. Declen sion of Con son ant-stem s , con t’d. Stems i n p ala
tals, etc. 1 . F i na l El; o f a s tem reverts to the origina l gu ttura lwhen i t comes to sta nd a s word-fi n al
,a nd before thep a da - end i ngs ,
becoming Q when fina l , a nd before i f, a nd before i i . 2. F i na lSL i s often es t trea ted exa ctly l ike i for ca ses of o ther trea tm en t, see below . 3 . I n the roots * fm , w a n dw ,
the TL i strea ted i n the same way . 4 . The “
Q of g b ecomes EL a fter Hi
I n cla ss ica l Sa nskri t n ot m a ny root- stems a r e u sed a s i ndep en den t subs ta n tives ; bu t they a r e frequently emp loyed , w i tha dj ective or (presen t) pa rti cip ia l va lue, a s fina l elem en t o f a com
p ound word .
Lesson XXI .'
8 7
thu s,
E . g . 3 1? f. ,‘sp eech , word ’; q f .
,
‘ i l l ness f . ,
‘ direction, p oin t of the compa ss ’
Sing . Plura l .
ma m magurm u W i m lm n
A . n
1 . am lw r lfi m u a rfiua lt fi um fmL . fi a lfi a lfzfi r u W l
'
fi iillf i fl ll
I ) uaL
fi lfi fi lfzfl u
m lm lm a u
W im lm u
247 . 1 . F i na l TL o f a s tem regu la rly becom es th e l i ngua l m u t e
(g o r 2 ) before“
at a n d g , a nd when word-fin al. F o r excep t i ons ,see 246
, 3 . 2. The fina l “
01 o f the root - s tems “
( Tab‘ru l e ’, Hi ,
‘ sa crifice ’, a n d W ,wi th o thers ; a nd 3 . the fina l g of a number
o f roots , a r e trea ted l ike ‘lT a bove . Thu s
, fai r m .
‘enemy ’;f“ m . pl. ,
‘
,p eop l e ’ the ‘Vaicya ca s te ’, fa g m . , f ., (adj .)
‘l i ck ing ’.
S in g . Plura l .
m um " fm ufw a n fam u
I .
L fif fin fi ifs n W img lm u
Dua l .
fi f t lfarf t "
fm lfsm u
248 . Butw m .,
‘
p ri es t ’, though con ta i n ing the roo t 111 .
88 Lesson XXI .
m akes “ 65 etc. ; a nd“
GEL f. ,‘ga rla nd ’, though conta in ing
Vfla x’ m akes W etc.
249 . 1 . Nou ns ha vi ng the roo ts g‘
g ,
‘burn ’,a nd 3g,
‘milk ’
,
a‘ be hosti l e ’
,with o thers
,a s fina l el ement, a nd a l so Efimg f.
(name of a certa i n metre) , cha nge th e fina l 3 i n to HiThus
,
‘
aiwgg ,
‘wood - bu rn ing ’,m akes nom .
- vo c . sin
a nq’
gg f. ,‘gra n ting w i shes ’
,n om .
-vo c . s i ng . 351113 35, a cc .0m ,
l o c. pl. O
gg ; W 3‘fri end - betrayi ng
,
’ nom .-vo c .
-sing. fi ri
g ai etc . 2. I n w ords wi th 71g,‘bi nd , ’ a s fina l el ement , where g
a nd i t .
repres en ts origi na l i ll, the 3 becomes 3 a n d Pt ; thu s , “ Ta g f . ,‘shoe
,sa nda l
,
’ nom .-vo c . s ing . m , a cc .
0m ,i nstr . du .
0 3 3 m ,lo o . pl. “ IQ .
Vocabulary XXI.
Ver bs 3 g (u tsrj a'
ti) l et l oose o r
( a: i n ca us . (dama'
ya ti) tame ; o ut ; ra i se (the vo ice) .comp el . fi g +ITF( (p a rtsvdj a te
*
) embra ce .
g g (drzihya ti) b e hostil e ; offend. g‘
n‘ s trike o u t ;
3 i n cau s . bea r . sm ite .31 (bhdr a ti ,
-te) bea r , support li t.
Subst m f.,l ook
,gl a nce ; eye .
W m . pl. , 92. p r .,a p eop l e i n m m .
,en emy.
I ndia . mm m .,tea rs .
3 31 f. , vers e o f the Rigveda ; in W m .,bee .
p l. , the Rigveda . m n .,sweetness .
zfi‘
qq n ., medici ne . f.
,s ickness
,di sea se .
afifi‘
q m .,720m . p r . m m .
,grea t k i ng
,emp eror.
as
3 3 a nd a few o th er roots , whose n asa l i s n o t consta n tthroughou t their i nflecti on
,los e i t i n th e p resen t- system .
90 Lesson XXI . XXI I .
ra i se (op t. or imv.) his voice . 15 . Tha t o n e among the p ri es ts i sca l led hotr , who reci tes the Rigveda . 16. A sn ataka m ust wea rshoes a n d a ga rla nd
,a nd ca r ry a n umbrella . 17.
“ Among my
fri ends Rama i s the s tronges t ” : thu s Spoke Ravana . 18 . Let a n
emp eror keep his va ssa l s i n check (an a nd p rotect (tnca us.) the p eop l e i n allth e ea rth . 19. I n the Rigveda occurs (wp a ss. ) the Usnih . 20 . The fa ther’s gla nce fel l upon m e
21 . Among the betrayers - o f - friends i s named (m a p a ss. )
Vibhi sana . 22. The seer p ra i ses I ndrani w i th verses of the B ig
veda . 23 . The emp eror sm ote his en emies (a cc . , da t. , or loc .)
w i th the sword. 24. I n th e ba ttl e Krsna was k i l led by hi s en
em i es . 25 .
“ M ay o ur enemies be torm ented by disea ses thu ssp oke the Brahma n i n a nger
L esson XXII .
25 0 . Declen si on of Stems i n I ’ The s tems in {I a nd 3'
sl engthen the vowel before consona n t- endi ngs , a nd i n n om .
- s i ng . ,
a n d the a o f th e n om . i s l os t . I n th e n orm - si ng . the fina l “
Sthen becomes a (o r visa rga ) under condi tions requ i ri ng a surda s fina l (see 95
, MG) . Thus , fi rs f . ,‘voice ’ ; 3
'
s f . ,‘ci ty ’.
Singula r . Dua l . Plura l .
N .V. h i s I 35 u fi rfi g‘
fi IIA . fi rm W n a a 77
Stems i n H [a nd i n fi fi t a nd f’awu. These a r e ma sc .
a n d neu t . only ; the corresp onding femini n e i s ma de by a ddi ng t ;thu s , Hfi fi fi f
' They lose thei r fina l a before consona n t - endi ngs ;0 Q Q Q 0Alm os t any noun i n 3 ! may form a possesrve der i va ti ve w i th
Lesson XXI I .
a nd a l so i n the n om . sing , where th e ma sc . l engthen s th ecomp en sa tion . Thu s , fl fi rfl m .
,n .
,
‘rich ’.
M a scu l in e. N euter .
S ingula r . Dual. Plura l . S ingu la r . Dua l . Plura l .
A . Elf-W K
I .
‘afi
'
fi n m m ‘Q fi fi -IQ as in the masculin e
V . m25 2 . Der iva ti ve stem s i n W 2 ( a , W . The stems o f th i s
d ivi s io n a re mos tly n eu ter ; bu t there a r e a few m a scu l i n es a nd
femini n e s . T he ir i nflection is nea rly regu la r (fo r ah , K ,
”
ET be
fore I t see § 24l; for th e 10 0 . pl. , p . 27 , bottom of page) . Ma sc .
[a n d fem .] s tem s i n W l engthen the w i n n ow . s i ng . ; a nd th en om .
-a cc . pl. n eu t . a l so l engthen a t or or 3 before the i nser tedn a sa l Thus
, m n .
,
‘mind ’; ‘
gfa'
q n .,
‘obla tio n ’;
m n . , bow
Singu la r . Dua l .
sfim lm u rm ?“ sfmfi t was) "
1 . m nefi m luam u mfiwm l
L . m fisn sfaffl lW u w ere“
Plu ra l .N .A . Ha i ti ” fi ffi l wi fe "1 . M lm lwfi e u
L .
o r n a zg or grazg o r £11713 II
25 3 . m m . (name o f certa in myth ica l cha ra cters) : nom .
s ing . WW , a cc . W , ins tr . m , vo c . m ;
nom .-a cc . pl. “ W .
the suffix ( i t ; thu s , from m n ‘s trength ’, W ,
‘havingstrength , s tr ong ’. S tem s in fi F '
L a nd f’
qfi a re very ra re .
92 Lesson XXI I .
254. Adj ective compounds havi ng n ou ns o f th is cla ss a s finalm ember a r e very common. Thus
, m‘fa vorab ly-minded .
’
Singu la r. Dua l . Plu ra l .n . m . f. n .
N . m “m 5mm) we) gw a “ li fe
A . m “TR
m ‘l ong- l ived ’
S ingu la r . Dua l . Plura l .
new fl ies)“slit em °
2ffl
Vocabulary XXII.
Verb : for saj ya’
te) ha ng on , be fa stened
Ga xsdj a ti but often pa ss . : sajy’
dte o n (as thoughts w.
Subst “fill IL , bowo
m f .
,hea venly nymph . m f .
, p ip e , condu i t
fi g?f. , n . p r .,a n Apsa ra s, U r I !“ n .
, milk .
va ci . R f . , ci ty.
fiafi q m . , k i ng . 36 “ m .,n . p r .
,Purura vas .
fi l‘
g f. , voice ; song. W filfi t m . , (l iving) crea ture .
W n .,eye . N I N E m .
,n . , p r .
,I ndia .
W m .
,m oon . I !“ n .
, mind .
W m . , spy . F fifi i m .,m i n is ter (o f s ta te) .
W 1 f . , bowstring. m n . ,sa crificia l formu la
,tex t .
m n .,l igh t ; s ta r ; heavenly I !“ n .
, glory , fame .body . a fiu
‘
SL m . , mercha n t .
m m p ond . a“ n age
94 Lesson XXI I . XXI I I .
i a i s the eldes t am ong his brothers (loc . ,20. The gods l ive
by the obla tio n . 21 . A m ercha n t wishes wea l th a wa rriorfam e , a n a sceti c del ivera n ce . 22. The woma n’s eyes a r e suffusedwi th tea rs .
L esson XXIII.
25 5 . Declen s i on . Compa r ative Adj ectives. Comp a ra tive a d
jectives of p rima ry form a t io n ha ve a doubl e form o f stem fo r m ascu l i n e a n d n eu ter : a stronger i nm (u sua l lyW ) , i n the s trongca ses , a n d a weaker i n 11K (u su a lly m ) , there being n od i sti nction of m iddl e a nd weak es t ca ses . The vo c . s i ng . m a sc .ends i n i n . The fem in i n e-s tem i s m ade wi th i ‘ from the weakstem -form . Thus
,m ,
‘better ’ °
M asculine. N euter .
S ing . Dua l . Plura l . Sing . Dua l . Plura l .
A . W i n“ n n
F em . stem . fla g},decl in ed l ike W .
25 6 . Stems in Eta-t (or Em) fa l l i n to two d ivi s ion s : A . thosem a de with th e suffix “
i ts (3m) , be ing, with few excep tions, a ctive
p a rticip les , p resen t a nd future ; a nd B . those m a de w i th th e p o ssessive suffixes t il-“q (o r 11a ) a n d W \ (or HQ ) . They a r e m a sc .a n d n eu ter on ly
,the fem . being form ed wi th “
E'
.
25 7 . A . Par ti ci ples in 3 176; (o r W E g . m m ': n .,
‘ l iving .
Lesson XXI I I .
M a sculin e . N eu te r .Sing . D ua l . Plura l . Sing. Dua l . Pl ura l .
N N W aha? ) vfifi u dim vita -vii sfia f e-
rt
A . M R 3: n
as i n ma sculin e .
L . vfiafi r d iam vii-
4a ;
25 8 . The St rong form o f thes e p a rti cip l es i s obta i n ed mecha n ically , by cu tti ng o ff th e fi na l from the 3rd pl. p res . (o rfut .) ind. a ct. ; thu s , W fi'
fl gives strong form o f pres . a ct . p a r t .
m . weak “ a ; fasfa , fi l‘B'
fiLa nd fa rm ; Wa ist , ama nd m ; m uffi n grew a n d m a n ; W W
“farm—q a nd “fauna .
25 9 . But thos e verbs which i n th e 3 rd. pl. a c t . l os e th e ‘
c‘
( o f
th e u sua l fTfl (a s e . g. th e verbs fol l ow i ng th e redup l i ca t i ng cla s si n th e p resen t -system) , l os e i t a lso i n the p resen t p a rti cip l e , a nd
ha ve n o di s ti ncti on of s trong a nd w eak stem . Thus , from V3 ,
3rd pl. pres . i nd . a ct . gg fi , pa rt . (only stem - form) Etc-
g i t nom .
vo c . smg. m a sc. m ,a cc . w n om -vo c .
- a cc . du . w ,
0
pl. m , n om .-vo c .
-a cc . sm g. n eu t .m ,du .W , pl. fig fi t.
260 . Only th e present p a r ti cip l es of verbs o f th e a - cla s s , the
ya- cla ss , a nd ca u sa tives , i nva ria bly i nser t '
c'
( i n n om .-vo c .
-a cc . du .
n eu t . Presen t p a rticip l es of the d - cla ss , o f th e roo t-cla ss when theroo t ends i n m ,
a n d El! fu ture pa r ticipl e s , m ay ei ther take o rreject i t ; thus , neu t . - si ng . fin“ , du . m 0 1
’ PM ; Wdu . a fi w
'
ifi orm fi ; m (pres . p a rt . from “
m ,
‘goda .
‘
aTT-fi o r W WII Pa rti cip l es o f allo ther verbs , a nd all o th ers tems i n Wit , l eave o u t the
“
1 in th e du . n eu t . ; thu s , “
i t“ (i t?‘ea t
’
,root- cla ss) , du . W .
26l. The a dj . m ,
‘grea t ’ takes i n strong ca ses the s tem
The gramma ria n s , however , a l low these verbs to in ser t thei n the n om .
-vo c .-a cc . pl. n eute r o f the p resen t p a rt i cip l e .
96 Lesson XXI I I .
form "ET“: nom .-si ng. ma sc . 11311 (see 239, a cc . m ,
vo c . m ; da . n eu t . pl. n e . Otherw is e the i nflectioni s l ike tha t o f p a rticip l es .
262 . The fem in i n e of p a rticip les a nd adj ect ives i n 3 11 11 (o r
i i i ) i s a lways made w i th i ,a nd the form i s a lways i dentica l
w i th the n om . dua l n eu ter .
Vocabulary XXIII.
Ve rbs 3 +go away ; i n
fi g (m’
a da ti) blame . cau s . drive away .
“ (713i sh i n e ; ru l e .
N oun s ( sub st. an d m m ca l f‘
q‘
lfa'
m m ., sun . “ better
,best ; as nea t. subst. ,
11m (comp . ) very hon ora bl e . sa lva ti on .
m (p r . p a rt . o f 31 ) giving . Hi t (neu t . HQ ) bei ng , exis ting ;
W , f. ,fi fi‘ brigh t
,gl isteni ng; a s m a sc . subst . , good m a n ; a s
(a ct . ) i l lumina ting . f em . (HT-fl) , fa i thfulw i fe .*
i ii-I, f. become (pa st . p a ss . Adv
p a r t . of a s n ea t. subst .,
35 1i to-morrow .
being,crea ture . fg surely , i ndeed .
Exercise XXIII.
n'
vu’r rfil n fsm fi qftafi fi gmrzl
w fm fi m zfifimm m fi rfi n as n
fas fi i {gi t finch 19 1
Wave : (am: pl W a 1m m a nm
E specia l ly a w i dow who immola tes hersel f o n the fun era lp i l e o f her hu sba nd ; whence Anglo-I ndia n su ttee.
M “ E ven though they exis t ” .
a?! i n com pos i tion often conveys the idea of im i ta t ion .
98 Lesson XXIV.
M a sculine. N euter .
Singu la r . Dua l . Plu ra l . Singu la r . Dua l . Plura l .
N.‘Sa
’
fl'
fi t afi t fi fi 86m N VA fim t w'
iwa'
i Efia fi a
A . sum 7:
I . Efi'
fl fl'
l'
i ma m a s i n the ma sculine.L . W W WW M
264. A stem Flaw—rt
"
(to b e ca reful ly distingu i shed fromm ,
pres . pa rt . a ct . o f 13) i s frequ ently u sed i n resp ectfu l a ddress a sa substi tu te for th e p ronou n o f the second p erson . I t i s constr ued w i th th e verb i n the thi rd p erson . I ts nom . s ing. ma sc . i s
“am (fem . W ) ; a n d m ,the contra cted form of i ts older
vo c . HEEL i s a common exclama ti on o f address : “ yo u , si r l”, “ ho,
ther e l”
; a n d i s often doubled .
“
i 265 . Der ivative stems in W . Thes e a r e ma de by the suffixes
3M , 1111 , a nd 3 1 ,a nd a r e
,with o n e or two excep t io ns , ma sc .
a nd neu t. only. The stem ha s a tripl e form . I n th e s trong ca seso f the m a sc. the vowel of the su ffix i s lengthen ed to i n the
weakes t ca ses i t i s i n gen era l d ropp ed ; i n the m iddle ca ses thefina l 1 i s dropped, a nd i t i s a l so los t i n the mom . s ing . o f all
genders . I n the n eu ter,th e nom .
-a cc . pl. , a s being s trong ca ses ,l engthen th e vowelof th e suffix ; the sam e ca ses i n th e dua l (a sw eak es t ca ses) l ose i t but th is only op tiona l ly . After the ao r q o f 111 a nd ER ,
when these a r e p receded by a consona n t,the “
at i s reta i ned i n all the weakes t ca ses, to avoid too grea t a na ccumu la tion o f consona n ts . Examp l e s : W m . ,
‘k i ng ’; WW m .
,
‘ sou l,self’; W n .
,
‘devotion ’.
Probably con tra cted from W ‘blessed ’
m l os es i ts fina l a before allvowel s a nd allsona n t consona nts ; thus , fl 3h E133 .
Lesson XXIV
N eute r .
Singu la r. Plura l . Singu la r . Dua l . Plu ra l .
TI“
t rauma “ fi rst
v. n ew
N“
a rm
A .
L M T
V. m am m o r as!
v266 . Euphon i c r ules. F i na l Eli , a n d q rema i n una l tered be
fore i n i tia l su rd consona n ts ; before sona n ts, whether vowel or co nso na n t
,they become resp ectively 1L, g ,
EL. Before n a sa l s theym ay be sti l l fur ther a ssim ila ted
,becom ing th e na sa l s ( II , R .
Thu s, aft i ng
‘
c‘
f becomes ei ther m orm ;m 71
becomes m or m . The la tter m ethod i s mu ch m ore u su a l .I 267 . Before i n i tia l g a fin a l m u te i s m ade sona n t ; a nd th enthe "
3 m ay either rem a in u ncha nged,o r be converted i n to th e so
na n t a sp ira te corresp onding to the p receding l et ter ; thus , ei ther
w as“
. o r W t ; ei ther Rang m or m . I n
p ra ctice th e la tter m ethod i s a lm os t i nva ria bly fol lowed .
W hen a den ta l mu te comes i n conta ct wi th a l i ngua l o r pal a ta l m u te o r s ib i la n t, th e den ta l i s u sua l ly a ssim i la ted
,becoming
l ingua l o r p a la ta l resp ectively . Thus,tistka tz
’ from ti -stha - tz’
; r dj fid
i ns tea d o f r aj n a .
100 Lesson XX IV.
Vocabulary XXIV.
Verbs m a (denom . va rfla’
ya fl) de "
cu t o ff . scribe , portray .
Eat i n ca ns (ma ryaya tz’
) rub , rub fi st-la g i n ca us (udveyaya tz)
o ff, pol i sh . terri fy.
Substa lmi m .
,sou l
,self ; ofte n a s sim
ple reflex ive p ronoun ; in gen i
tive,hi s
,etc . ; on e’s own .
55251 n .,deed ; ceremony ; fa te .
a fi‘
ot n hide , skin ; l ea ther.
m n . ,b i rth .
ia’
t n . ,ba nk
,shore .
W (br a’
hma n) n devotion ,sa cred word (o f God) ; sa credknowledge ; th e worl d- sp i ri t .
m (br a hma'
n a perso n ifi
ca tion of the p receding) m .,the
sup rem e Al l-Sou l , the crea tor.
W m .,m eeting, encoun ter.
m f .,border
,bou nda ry ; out
sk i rts
3711 m .,sl ayer
,k il l er.
Adj
WIF E-
L l ong- l ived (often us edi n resp ectfu l a ddress) .
m so grea t, so much
fl aw-t how grea t?how m uch?
sociab le .
ama ai s trong , m igh ty .
blessed .
W sh in i ng,bril l ia n t .
HfT-WFQ shrewd, p ruden t .
W i t how m u ch,a s m a ny.
m ,f. 0m ,
ha rsh, rough .
fag ,f. p ervadi ng , fa r
rea chi ng ; omnip resen t ; migh ty .
EH,f. 0 3 11 (pa ss . pa rt . of 3 70
k i l led .
Adv. :
m comm only.
102 Lesson XXV.
Lesson XXV .
268 . Declen sion . Per fect Act ive Pa r t i ci ples i n “
arm . Thea ctive p a rticiples o f the p erfect tense- sys tem a re qu i te p ecu l ia r a srega rds the modifica tion s o f the stem . I n th e s trong ca ses th esuffix i s T IE ,
which becomes m i n th e n om . s ing . m a sc .,a nd
i s shortened to “
3 1 i n th e vo c . s ing. I n the weakest ca s es th e suffixi s con tra cted i n to B EL; a nd i n th e m iddl e ca ses i t i s cha nged to
Hit . A u nion-vowel i f p resen t i n the strong a nd middl e ca se s ,d isa pp ea rs b efore E SL i n the weakest . Ra di ca l a nd i , i f p recededby on e consona n t
,become 21 b efore E SL, bu t i f p receded by more
tha n o n e consona n t , becom e a ; wherea s ra dical “
3 a lways becomes E ‘
i before BEL, a n d ra dica l 33, I . Thu s, ffi fi m , fi l
W 5 “ m , w ; W W , W . The femin in e s tem i sformed with “
2: from th e weakes t s tem - form ; thus , fi figfifi‘
.
Examp l es :
1 . ffi iq‘know ing ’
M a sculi n e . N euter .
Singu la r . Dua l . Plu ra l . Singu la r. Dua l . Plura l .
as in th e ma sculi ne .
timer‘2. Elfi fl i nal
‘ha ving gone ’*
A no ther form o f p erf. p a rt . o f thi s v erb (m ) m a kes thes trong a nd middle s tems W ig a nd W ; th e weakes t formis a s a bove
, m .
Lesson XXV.
M asculine . N eu ter .
Singu lar . Dua l . Plura l . Singula r . Dua l . Plu ra l .
N .
A .
1 . 5 11 131511 fi rm a fa r a s i n the ma sculine
L . m gfiq m fifi’
m atri umV.
269 . Stem s “
35 71 , 233 1 . The s tem s 131 m . ,
‘dog ’, a nd
w m .,
n . ,
‘young ’, ha ve a s weakes t s tems {F t a n d {1 5 i nth e s trong a n d middl e ca ses they fol low ( TEF L; “
15 71 , m .
F em . {Ti } a nd gafio r Ofl .
270 . Th e stem 11m m .,
‘generou s ’ (in the la ter la nguagea lm os t exclu sively a n ame o f I ndra ) , ha s a s strong stem m m ,
m id .Oar, w ea kes t m . N om . s ing . NW T, vo c .
0 3 1 . F em .
27 I . Th e stem W n . ,
‘day’
,i s u sed only i n the s trong a n d
w eakes t ca ses, the middl e, with the n om . s i ng . ,com ing fromm
L . arsfi t o r mfg v i ta m or 3 13 13272 . Compoun ds wi th Vi i or H i . The adj ectives form ed
from thi s roo t wi th p rep os i ti ons a nd o ther words a r e qu i t e i rregula r.Some o f them ha ve on ly two stem - forms : a s trong i n mi a nd a
wea k i n whi le o thers di s tingu i sh from the middl e i n W i t a
weakes t s tern i n q,before which th e W i s con tra cted wi th a p re
cedi ng (I L) o r‘3 (30 i n to or Hi . The fem . is m a de w i th t
from the w ea kest (or w eak) s tem ; thus , ffl i fi The p ri ncipa ls tem s of thi s sor t a re as fol lows :
104 Lesson XXV
Strong . Middle . W eak (weakes t) .
mi‘forwa rd ’, ‘ea stwa rd ’ W
W“‘downwa rd ’ w i t
“ 3 ;‘northwa rd ’ W
"
W‘ba ckwa rd
’
,
‘westwa rd’ m g mEli
‘low ’ fl i t
m i‘ fol low i ng ’ m WE I?
fafii‘
go ing horizon ta l ly ’ fa fia ffiéq m
Vocabulary XXV.
Ver bs 3?(udga’
ccha ti) ris e .
1m W (a stamga ccha tz’
) go"
Gig (sprbaya tz’
) desn edown , set (li t’ly “
go homeu sed of th e hea venly bodies) .
erg m . ,n . p r . , a god , Tva sta r .
trfi'
qg f . , a ssem bly
W n . , Ba roch (a holy p la cei n I ndia ) .
m m ., I ndra .
213 1 m .,n .
, young ; f. gafi i .
famai m .,rip eni ng ; recomp ense .
inserted, i rregu la rly, i n weakes t form s only .
i rregu la r w ) .
W m .
, p a in s , troub le .
fi g m . , l i o n .
W n . ,ba th ing, ba th .
g fim m ., ga zel l e .
Adj
M , f . ,Om] ; l ea rned, s tud i ed .
11l a having s tood ; a s n .
subst , th e imm ova ble .
fi sfl'fi
‘
i three-headed .
3 3 , f. Ow] ; (pa r t . o fm ) bi tten .
W fi l‘t forest- dwel li ng .
fam knowing,wise , l ea rned .
106 Lesson XXVI .
uremi a . Ge na ; pl. n om m . a ce . aah ,i ns tr. M :
the rest l ike 2. ufa m .,i s decl in ed regu la rly (l ike a ffix)
i n composi tion , a nd when mea ni ng ‘l ord,ma ster ’; when mea ning
‘husba nd ’,i t foll ows Gffi i n the fol low i ng forms : i nst . sing . W T,
da t . Illa ; a bl.-gen . W ,l o c . U'
czfi‘
.
275 . The neu ter s temsW ‘eye ’, W W ‘bone ’,m‘ curds ’
,
a s“‘ thigh ’, form only the weakes t ca ses ; thus , W . m ,
aw fi r or fl ag , etc. ; the res t of th e i nflectio n i s made from corresp ond ing stems i n if ; thus , n om . sing . Wffi etc.
276. 1 . Rafi f. , ‘goddess o f fortun e ’, m akes n om . s ing .m .
2.
‘woma n ’, fol lows a mixed declension ; thus , n om . si ng ,
w , a cc . fa ult o rW , i n sta m ,da t fi fi , abl.-geu .m ,
l oc . fm ; da . W , W : mm ; pl. nom . fm ,
a cc . m orm ,i ns tr . m , etc . ; gen . m .
277. 1 . all f. ,‘wa ter ’, only pl. ; i ts fin a l i s cha nged to g be
fore i t ; thu s , n om . m , a cc . m ,i nstr. Wm ,
da t. -abl.
Elma ,gen . W , l oc . 3 11g . 2. fa
'
i sky’
, m akes nom .
s i ng . afiq ,da . m afi‘, pl. (sometimes) W K ; the endi ngs a r e the
n ormal o nes , but the root becomes 31 before consona nt-endingsthus
,a cc . sing . fa“ , nom .
-a cc . pl.
“
fl ag ,i n str . m . Not
allth e ca ses a r e fou nd i n use . 3 . Stem?m . (ra rely ‘wea l th ’
s i ng . ( TH , W ,
‘
(m'
r etc . ; da . ( Ti ff , W WI ,
“
Um ; pl.
( 121K (nom . a n d‘
( Tfi -TQ etc .278 . 1 .m g o rm g m .
, (from m‘
ag ca rt-drawing’
,
i . e .) ‘ox ’: s trong stem W ?’m i d. wag ,
weakes t W ;
n om . sing. W m , vo c . W . 2. The s tem 111211 m .,
‘roa d ’,m akes all th e s trong ca ses , w i th i rregula r nom . s ing . m ; thecorresp ondi ng middl e ca ses a r e ma de from ‘
qfw,a nd the weakes t
from W ; thus , a cc . sing . qw‘
lflq,da t . 123 ,
a ce . pl. m ,
I n the o lder la nguage oftener ma scu l i n e .
Lesson XXVI . 10 7
da t . Wm . [The stem s m m .,stirri ng- s tick a nd “ a n:
m .,a n ep i th et o f I ndra , a re sa id to fol l ow N FL]
279 . The stem sq m .
,
‘m a n’, i s very irregu la r . The strong
s tem i sm ,m id. HR, weakes t 32K . Thus
,s ing. W ,W ,
gm ,etc .
,vo c . gm ; da . 311133 , 37mm , gm ; pl. swim ,
331K , Hfiflq e tc . ,lag .
280 . F o r th e stem W f .,
age’,m ay b e substi tu ted i n the
ca ses w i th vowel - endings form s from m f . ; thu s , W o r
28l. Q n .
,
‘hea rt ’, does no t m ake n om .-vo c .
- a cc . o f a ny
number (excep t i n com p os iti on) , thes e be i ng supp l i ed from ggfl n .282 . The stem Hg m . ,
‘foo t ’,becomes mg i n s trong ca ses ;
a nd,i n compou nds , in th e m iddl e ca ses a l so ; thu s, nom . s i ng . mg ,
a cc . m ,i n str . Haj , etc . F rom fl ag
‘bip ed ’ , a cc . s ing .
tngq, pl. rm ,i n str . pl. fatnfgq. [The stem a '
rqm .
,
‘footh a s the comp lete decl ens i on o f a - s tem s .]
283 . The roo t 31 ‘slay ’,as fina l m ember ,o f a compound ,
becom es 31 i n nom . sing .,a nd lose s i ts i n the m iddl e ca ses
a nd i ts ”
at i n th e weakes t ca ses (bu t only Op t i ona l ly i n Ic e . s ing ) .F urther, when 31 i s l ost , 3 i n con ta ct w i th FL reverts to i ts origin a lSt ; thu s, fla gvt m .
,
‘kil l i ng a Brahm a n ’, makes n om . s i ng . W EI :
a cc .ogm
"
,in str . m , etc. , l oc. a a f
‘
g o r om , vo c .°3
‘
da . W ,03“ etc. ; pl. n ow . a cc .
”ER .
284 . The stem s m m .,n . p r .
, a nd Wei“ m .
,n . p r . (both
p erso n ifi ca tio n s o f th e sun) , m ake,the n om . si ng . i n m , but
o th erwise do no t l engthen th e 3 1; thu s , n om . TIT, a cc . aqua , in str.
I n compound wor ds , a n a l teri ng ca u se i n o n e member som et imes li ngualizes a
“
Q of th e next fol lowing member . But a
gut tura l o r la bia l i n direct combina tio n wi th som e times p reventsthe combina tion , a s i n the i n s tr . fl aw .
108 Lesson XXVI .
Vocabulary XXVI.
Ve rbs TEL (tg‘pya ti) be p l ea sed o r sa t is
a move ; i n can s. send ; fi ed,sa ti sfy o r sa tia te oneself.
pu t ; ha nd over, give . m fa comp la i n .
i n cau s .hide away , con cea l .
fi fd n .
,notice
,thought
, m i n d .
m f . , divi n i ty , de i ty.
m \(weakes t m .
,n . p r .
,
a Vedi c sa i n t .
fig m . ,foot .
W n p ro tection .
Exercise XXVI.
fi nfi fiam a m m l
Hm fi i mfitfl'
fia fimfi q qg n
m am aw fi m asm la lfumfit m um R t
W W I H I Q fl W W W I'alm
m uw m lgfim a‘
aw m t t t smfi zfia ne nwfs z urfi w é
‘
m ufm lam w nfi
M a fi laa uufi afi m fi a w a m wfi a t aa lfi i zfi a i gfi fi a m é
’
tw m tqs t fi mW mfi flsfl fi laa lafl m a éfi fi a a a m w
afim mu I a im M ar i am : was n ew mfi t’a
fi réflfi i : W m m lai lw gfi fi n a r zf é :
W EI m m a n (homo) .
an n . , vow,obl iga tion , du ty.
Adj
m f. , one - eyed .
3 &1]n four- footed,qua drup ed .
orda i ned, fixed, perma nen t .
fi rs ,f. ” HT. ben efi cen t, gra cious ,
blessed .
1 10 Lesson XXVI I .
Neute r : N om .-a cc . si ng. m , da . fi , pl. Tfl
’lfi i ; the res t
i s l ike the ma scu l i n e .287 . are?(watt)
M a sculi ne . F em i ni n e .Sing . Dua l . Plura l . D ua l . Plura l .
N .
“
suit anti
A i t? n
I a gar W am'
i fi ra 3 :11amD wgfi W e
li b-W WW WG was W WL wa ft“ w as 3:
C\\l
N euter : Nom .- a cc . si ng . i t“ ,
da . 3m ; pl. W ; the res t0\ 6\
l ike m a sc. The fina l o f i s u ncha ngea b le (cf. I6I) .
288 . There i s a defective p ronomina l s tem which i s
a ccen tl ess , a nd hence u sed o nly i n s i tu a tion s where n o empha s isfa l l s upon i t . The only forms a r e th e fol low i ng : Sing . a ce . m .
m ,n . nag , f. m m; ins tr . m . , n .
, fi n , f. 1mm . D u . a ce .
m . 1137 ,f.,n .
,
‘
qfi ; gen .,10 0 . m .
, f ., n ., t am . Pl . a c
h
e . m . 1111131 ,
n . W fi l, f. W E Thes e forms m ay be u sed only when the
p erson or obj ect to which they refer ha s a l ready been indi ca ted bya form of ?“ or II 5; . Thu s , afi fl W WW ? w .
m an“ thi s o n e ha s rea d the a r t of p oetry ; tea ch h im gramma r ”
289 . Pa st Pa ssi ve Pa r t i ci ple i n a or a . By the su ffix‘
a o r,
i n a compa ra tively sma l l number o f verbs,
“
i t i s form ed , dir ectly from the roo t of the verb , and u n conn ected with a ny ten ses tem
, a verba l a dj ective ca l l ed the pa st pa ss ive pa rticip l e . Thefem . ends a lways i n 0 3 11 . W hen thi s p a rti cip l e i s m a de fromtra n si tive verbs
,i t qua l ifies som eth ing a s havi ng endu red the a ction
expressed by the verb ; thu s , a da tta’
,
‘given ’; W ukta'
,
‘spoken ’.W hen ma de from an i n tra nsi tive or n euter verb
, th e'
same pa r
Lesson XXVI I . 1 11
tic iple ha s no p a ss ive, but on ly a n i ndefin i te p a s t , sen se ; thu s , era ,
‘gone ’,
‘been ’; aft-Ia ,
‘ fa l l en ’
290 . Th is pa rti cip l e i s often u sed a s a n a dj ective . Very com
m o nly, a l so , i t s upp l ies the p la ce o f a fin i te verb, when some formo f ‘be ’
,or eli s to b e suppl i ed ; thu s , H 113 :
“ he i s gon e ” ;W T Ira
; m “ by m e a l etter w a s w ri tten ” . The n eu ter i sfrequ en tly used a s a substa n tive ; thu s ,m
‘a gi ft ’; g?“ milk
a nd a l so a s n omen a ctionz‘
s. Som etimes i t ha s a presen t sign ificat ion
, pa rti cu la rly when ma de from n eu ter verb s ; thu s , fa n (from
m1) often ‘sta nd ing ’
29l. A . W i th su ffi x "T [lg] . The suffix‘
c'
f i s taken by a numbero f roots . Thu s
1 . Certa i n roots i n WT, a nd i n i a nd u - vowels ; thu s , WT orii} ‘ swel l
,b e fa t ’
, fi n ; gr‘a ba ndon ’
, g’
h ; E T‘Wither ’
,vana ;
fa‘destroy ’
, m ; 331” or fig ‘sw el l ’, i
‘cut
’
, i n
2 . The roots i n va ria bl e a; (so - ca l l ed T- roo ts) , which beforeth e suffix becomes {1 or W » a s i n th e” p res . p a ss ; thu s ,(fi rs), Elfi n g, M ; lg (1115 )
‘fi l l ’, 335
3 . A few roo ts endi ng i n EL (wh ich becom es 1L before thethu s
, “a ;‘break ’
, “I t; “(fi t
‘bend ’, “
an ;“
Fra t‘ sink ’
, I F:
“
( i t‘be si ck ’
, ( at : fi a \
‘ fea r ’, fact. Also o neo r two oth ers
which exhibi t a gu ttura l b efore th e 7T: GI L‘a tta ch ’, a t ] ; W
\
‘cu t up
’
, an .
4. A number o f roots,som e o f them very common , i n g
(wh ich becomes ‘
Q before a ) :“
Hg , Ha ; (fa—Hg , m 0 fi rq‘cu t
’
,
292 . Some few verb s m ake doubl e form s ; thus , H ‘
s‘ha s ten ’
it‘d o r w ; fag
‘a cqu ire ’
, faa o r m .
Commones t excep ti o ns . m from GTE:‘ea t ’; lit
-“
fl fromHg ; W from $13
" ‘ rej oice ’; W from “
( g‘weep ’
; Wfrom W
‘sp eak ’; fi f’
gfl from fi g‘know ’
.
1 12 Lesson XXVI I .
Vocabulary XXVII.
Ve rb s W (bbaksa'
ya ti) ea t .
a m (up éksa te) neglect . W\break .
2? fa (o ikirdtz‘
) sca tter . 3 11 enj oy .
W WEI (den .—a vagazzdya ti )“
ii-luff (p a r ibba
'
va ti) desp i se .
desp i s e . W (mdj ja tz) s i nk .
“ + VQ , i n cau s . “
ga \i n cau s . (yOJaya ti) yoke,
p ronounce, say. ha rn ess .
EH 3 13 descend . EFL (Z a'
ga tz) a tta ch ; ha ng, cl ing ,
3 g (u ttdm tz) emerge , come a dhere .out . Hg (s
ida tz) si t , settle down ; he
ffl‘ or WT (Pyéya te) becom e stou t overcom e, exhaus ted.
o r fa t .
Substwfig
’
vfi‘
m . da nom . p r .,th e
Acvin s (the I ndia n A tég xofipoz) .
W m .
“ wa lk a n d co n
versa t ion ” ; condu ct o f l ife , ohserva n ce .
fl i t f . , hunger .
w ere}n . ,l ife o f holi ness
,i . e
rel igi ou s s tuden tship .
W n . , m eal-tim e, m ea l .m . ,
n . p r . , a Vedi c p ersona ge .
W m .,a cqu i s i tion
,ga i n .
m m . ,w edding
,m a rriage .
m fi t m .
,i ll n es s .
g it-I m . , n ., plough .
{ ft m .,cha i n , ga rla nd .
Adj
m (pa rt . o f 2f’
i‘l) reduced , decayed ; ru i n ed .
m f. grea t, strong, vi ol en t .tfi
‘
d (p a rt . o f lfi ) fa t.
m studying sa cred knowledge ; a s m . subst. , Brahma nstuden t.
a n (pa rt ) aba ndoned ; wa n tingin ; a nd so som etim es w . i ns tr . ,withou t ’
1 14 Lesson XXVI I I .
c iple is m ade by a dding the su ffix a to th e ba re root ; thu s , a mfrom 311 ; ffi fT-l from fi t; ffi '
fl from fi lm; from E?(o r‘
i-‘
d from294. I f th e root end i n a consona n t other tha n 35, Pt , t [ , q,
th e ordina ry ru l es of euphoni c combina tio n app ly, a s fol l ows1 . F i na l i t a nd at become Q ; thus , fq
‘
ai from f“ ; gm
from W from E SL.
2 . F i na l 31 becomes i t , a fter whi ch,a s a l so a fter ra d ica l
fina l EL, Q becomes 3 ; thu s ,“
gg from m ; fi g from fag .
“
Egg
a nd ti g a r e made from {ASLa nd a n d {g from fl at , contra ryto 1 . I t? makes 2g ; a nd Hal, Hg .
3 . F i na l q becomes g , a nd“
IL, EL; a nd the foll ow ing “
it be
comes thu s, “
33 from 321, W from FIE-t .
4. F i n a l g i s trea ted i n va rious ways , a ccording to i ts h i sto r icalva lu e . a . Sometimes {I comb i n es w i th Ft to form 5 , beforewhich shor t vowel s (excep t Q ) a r e l engthened ; thu s , me from
mg, flag from fa g, Q 3 from £ 5 ; from 153 ; but Egg fromEgg.
“
Hg formsm . b. W here “
g r epresen ts origi na l ‘ET\,the com
bi na tion i s TE] ; thu s , m from Kg ; fat“: from fi g ; gm from‘
gg. The roo t Hg forms a l so “
673 , where g rep resentsorigina l i t , makes 713 .
295 . The roo t before a usu a l ly has i ts weak est form ,i f th ere
i s a ny where i n th e verba l system a dis ti nction o f s trong a n d weakforms . Thus : 1. A penu l tima te n a sa l i s dropped ; e . g .
, are?from3 13 ; as
“ from afl ; a m from ER (or HR) ; m from m .
2 . Roots which a r e a bbrevia ted i n the w eak forms o f th e p erfectsu ffe r the same a bbrevia ti on here ; e . g .
, Gig i from W ,
“
3 3 from aq,
gg fr omm , g ig fr om ag ; {g fromW \ (the same form from ( R) ,fag from 6 111 ; fig from W . 3 . F i na l WT i s weakened to ‘
E‘
i n‘
lfi’
a from I“‘s ing ’
, tfi'
fl from 112"‘drink ’; to i n f
’
g ra from
m . fa?! from m ‘
put’(wi th ti also changed to g) , fiza from
Lesson XXVI I I . 1 1 5
WT‘m ea su re ’
, a nd a few others . 4. A fina l a i s l os t a fter a t i n1m , 2m, an ,
“
( a (from W a nd l ikew is e fina l R i n 75 3 ,
aa , 113 ,am,
‘
g'
a (from v 5 . I sola ted ca ses a re 131g
from amt ; from g}a\‘
p lay ’.
296. More irregu la r a r e the fol low ing1 . Some roots i n W m ak e p a rt icip l es i n w'
fi i ; thu s , Q M
W , W , 3 1711 , {TELm ,
“
a m, from EEK etc.2 . am, fl ,
a nd“
(EL m ake Ri na etc .3 . The roo t lg
'
l‘
,
‘give ’,forms a? (from the deriva t ive form
Q ) . The con tra cted form a i s w idely found i n composi ti on ,esp ecia l ly w i th p reposi ti ons ; thus,m or W , Fag
-“
rt o r fi g ,etc .
297 . 11. W i th un i on -vowel The suffix w i th Q , o r i n th eform Ta , i s regu la rly u sed w i th the deriva t ive verb - s tems i n se
c o n da ry conjuga tion , a l so often w i th roots o f deriva tive cha ra cter
(l ike fi a\, fgg ), a nd n o t i n frequen tly wi th origina l roots .
298 . W hen {a i s a dded to ca usa tive a n d denomina t ive verbs tems the syl lables 3 12 ; a r e dropped ; thus , fi g , pa ss . p a rt . fi ft '
fi';
W , mi te ; as, F ifi -fa ; 11, ca n s. mW fi l, ca us . p a ss . p a rt.
m ; 3 71 , ca us”mafi a , a rran
299 . Am ong the origina l roo ts taking {a m ay be noticed thefol low ing
Tet‘ fa l l ’
, atria ; art , gfim ; as‘dwell ’
,
“
s f-
em; m t ,
s tart; rm‘ th i rs t ’. gfim ; fi rst , fa te
-
ct ; i s , i fs-
ct ; Hg ,
W E . Hg makes i f}‘l i e ’ m akes a fi m.
300 . A few roots form th i s pa rti cipl e ei ther wi th o r w i thou tthe a uxil ia ry I ; thus , IT?! a nd W a
‘
from 31g .
30l. The gramma ria n s reckon a s p a rticip l es o f the n a -forma tiona few deriva tive a dj ectives , com i ng from roots wh ich do n o t ma kea regu la r pa rti cip l e ; su ch a re am
‘burnt ’ (m ) ; ‘th i n ’,
‘hag
ga rd ’ 11g‘ripe ’
(W ) ; W‘dry ’ (33150 ; gig
‘expa nded ’
1 16 Lesson XXVI I I .
302 . Pa st Active Par ti ci ple in m (or fl aw-
U. F rom the
p a s t pa ss . p a rt. i s ma de, by a dding the possess ive su ffix W (f.
afi ) , a seconda ry deriva tive ha ving the m ea n ing a nd constructiono f a p ertect a ctive pa rticip l e ; thus , i5m , nfima a T-zt .
3 03 . This pa rticip l e i s a lmost a lways u sed p redi ca tively, a nd
genera l ly wi thou t expressed cop u la , i . e . , w i th th e va lue o f a p ersona l p erfect - form . Thu s
,
"
Fri‘
c'
f a ifw“ no o n e h as seen
m e”; or, with Copu la , W m m “ thou (fem ) ha st come
i n to grea t misery ”. This p a rticip l e com es to be m a de even from
i ntra nsi tives ; thu s , HT ImaT-fi “she ha s gone ” .
Vocabulary XXVIII.
Verbs 33g(mzikya ti) be confu sed or dazed
fir” ! i n caus . (pr aitc
‘
i raya ti) de o r s tup id .
c eive .
”
( EL W besi ege.equ ip o n e I I (p ra rdka ti) grow up .
self. m I I (p ram’
gdti) p en etra te ,t ig
h t f él-m in ca us . (vydp dddya ti) en ter.k i ll . in cau s . (p r a va r tdya ti)
lzw"
(p a'
ldya te) flee . con tinu e .23 3K enj oy, ea t . fm \
w‘
q rema i n over , survive .
111 + UR honor . Eat
“
a t: bestrew .
Subst Lfi'
t m . ,ci tizen .
W m .,end ; in loc .
,a t la s t. m m . , p a l a ce .
W n .,n . pr .
,Delh i . 213 3 m . , Greek , ba rba ria n .
a t m . ,a ss. W m . ,
ja cka l .
33 1 f . , cave . fifi ffifi m .
,soldier.
am n .,behav i or
,l ife. fi a t n . , a rmy .
22 3 11 131 m .,n om . p r . m m .
, elepha nt.
A qua si-roo t from ‘go ’ m ‘
away ’.
1 1 8 Lesson XX IX .
305 . A . a ] : To uncomp ounded roots i s a dded the su ffix E T.I t i s u sua l ly added directly to th e root, but sometimes wi th thevowel i n terposed . W i th rega rd to the use o f a nd to the formof root before i t
,thi s forma tio n cl osely agrees wi th tha t o f the
p a rti cip l e i n a or “
a . A fina l roo t-consona nt i s treated a s before
a . Roots which m ake the pa s t p a ss . pa rt . i n a genera l ly rej ect 1:before ET.
Examples. 1 . Wi thout in serted mm ,
“
ram , fi a t , gm ,
fg m from “
Q T, fga'
l‘ from 1m ‘
p la ce ’ (cf. a n d from
3 7, W T from {T (cf. a )’ fl a t from B a rt from fl i t,“
fla n from 1351; 11m from m , m an fromm , f i r-Torr from‘fi nd ’; ifik
—slT from 5 (cf. fi ll), from E (of . lim
e
) ; g‘
g‘
r from
g a b 3 31 from r m , {gr from war (cf. § 295 , W from “
fiveW from Eli , gm 1 from
2. W i th i nserted fafi-{a‘
rfrom lfag‘know ’
, VFW from
aa‘dwell
’
, fl f'
qa'
lfrom ‘ffi‘
(cf. m a ) , W T from Hg (cf.
2223 )306. Some verbs m ake both forms ; thus , from lgi ei ther ta
fi rm o r m en ; from a n ei ther Hfi i'
c'
fl or W W307 . Ca u sa tives a nd denomina t ives i n W make 3 1m ; thus,
31 .M en ; as. 7113 15 1611 ; Elm , W308 . B . a . Roots i n comp osition wi th preposi tions (o r some
times w i th el emen ts o f o ther k i nds , a s a dverbs o r nouns) tak e thesuffix ‘
fl‘
,before which i s n ever i n serted. A root which ends i n
309 . Roots i n m a nd Eli whose pa ss . p a rt . ends i n art-rform thi s ger nnd i n “
i tal; thus , c an-a ,
036 1. But such am - roots
(no t a n -roots) m ay p reserve the na sa l ; thu s , 0 1113 . F i nalcha ngea ble a becomes i t o r HTS ; thus , fi lfi ,
flifi
‘
. F i nal3 11 rema in suna l tered ; thus , m . Some roots show a weak form be fore
Lesson XXIX . 1 19
th i s su ffiX ; thu s , Ri ta .W ; tha t (I I-W ) from tr a i t ; W
331 from“
arty-3 g ; gm from Fa-
‘
qg.
SIO. Cau sa l s a nd denom ina tives i n W rej ect those syl la bles ;thus
, a shram mud ; water ; m um ; m m ; stra tum
(m -sfi ) , W Bu t i f th e root ends i n a s ingl e consona n t a n denclose s short 3 ! which i s no t lengthened i n th e caus a t ive , thenthe geru nd o f th e cau s . ends i n W ,
to d is tingu i sh i t from th egerund o f the simp l e verb ; thus, Era-m ,
ger . W ; causxwa
W'
a-
fir, gen s -
41mm
3ll. The gerund o r a bsolu tive is used genera l ly as l ogica l ad
jun c t to the su bj ect of a clau se . I t denotes a n a ctio n a ccomp a ny ingo r (u sua l ly) p receding tha t which i s signified by the verb o f th eclau se . (In the la ter la nguage i t i s n o t a lways confin ed to th e
gramm a tical subj ect o f th e cla us e a s a n a djunct .) I t ha s thu s virtually the va lu e o f a n i ndecl i nable p a rticip l e, p resen t o r pa s t , qua li fying th e a ctor whose a ctio n i t describes .Thus, Hg w as?3 11 i
“
sta r a re" tags713 2 ha ving hea rdthi s
,having a ba ndoned the goa t
,havi ng ba thed
,he wen t to his
own hou s e3 I2 . The geru nds o f som e verbs have n o t much m ore tha n
p reposi tiona l va lue ; thu s , m‘having taken ’, i . e . wi th l ike
Greek ltafiw'
v,é’
xwv;Han" ha vi ng rel ea sed ’
,i . e . wi thou t ’, excep t ’.
3 IS. Before allgerunds m ay be u sed the p riva t ive W or w ;
thu s , W wi thou t havi ng received ” ; W 3 11“ w i thou t ha vi ng
summoned . ”
Vocabulary XXIX.
Verbs Wm a cqu i re,a tta i n
,rea ch .
W fi t (nya’
sga ti) entrus t (to u go forth ; d ie .
one’s ca re) .
Of course th e a bsolu tives a r e often bes t rendered by rel a tiveclauses , or even by cla uses coordina te wi th the p rincipa l cla use .
120 Lesson XXIX.
§ + Wfi 1 pu t a t th e head , ap W m .,vi ctory.
poin t a s ru le r over f ., misfortun e .
W I ] (p r a ca'
la ti) move on W m .,wing ; s ide , p a rty .
m a rch . “Eli m . ,frog.
fi‘
c‘
fl (cin taiga ti) consider. Elgfl'
f .,n . p r . , Ceylon .
q (cya’
oa te) totter, fa l l . “I t m . , hero .
{T“
l take. Cf . 3 I2 . W n ., m ea ns, devi ce .511 + 3 1p m lay or pla ce on . fig m .
,bridge, dike .
‘
ia‘
f-TQ (n irna'
ya ti) bring to a n {W m . ,n . p r .
,a monkey-k ing.
end, determine , settl e . m a; (n om .0
3 35) m .,fire .
“5 11+ fa (vibhdj a ti ,-te) dis tribu te .
3 11 + Il(p r a vrdj a ti) wa nder forth ; 3 ]n disagreea bl e.l ea ve on e’s home to become a responsibl e, trus tworthy.
wa ndering a scetic. w du .,both .
Subst fi g"
, f . l i ttle,sma l l .
“
am m . , p la n , design . fi a t, f. da i ly , regula r.
m n . ,bringing. o n the head .
aifiz m .,m onkey. Pr ep os. :
‘
afift‘
c‘
t m .
,elephan t . nfa (p ostp os.
, wi th a ce .) aga i ns t.
Exercise XXIX.
112? fimfi mfi fiu ifi m afi r wi th : "at "
um fi ren 3 3mm! Ef f m 1: 3‘
s a ntiwa r fi rm fi r
m im m uu rfi rgt gtmfi r a m W W ? wa s
m a mm a t gm fita t 3 mm Hm : R um m a
fw a fi fa’
éa gm’t fim m z t s lm rm
fi s mfwfiizufifi rm wfift fia’
ag t a gi nfw u v fi rv
am’
sfl afi ls lgrei afi m m gm m z lu lm
afl m m ww m fi fia zré tw m
W W W wi fe W mmu ls lsfifiigfié
1 22 Lesson XXX .
afi na l s
,Hi ,
“
cf , q a nd a rema in u ncha nged before W ; thus , fl ag,
W 3“ was ; m a ri an sa s , first ; as , W ; m‘curse ’ ,w ; 3“
‘dwel l ’, alga . Other fina l s a re cha nged
a ccordi ng to the ru l es given i n Lesson XXVI I I fo r th e conversion o f fina l consona n ts before the pa rticip ialsuffix 3 . Thu s ,“ I , wa s ; wa s n ew em Ref s an , ( new; awe“
si gn? ya , m ; n et , sign ; gar . a ga fi fi q . a‘
tgm
m t , Gaga ;“
fig, fi ga ; 3 3 , am ; as. alga ;7te. agq.
F i na l g becomes it , a n d fina l R , a ; thus , fi g , W ; fag‘know ’
, W (a l soW ) ; W , W .
3 16 . The en din g 331 wi th (in the fo rm ( 33 ) is taken byroots i n fina l l ong 3? a n d th e root I f}, w i th a few other vowelroots ; by th e m aj ori ty o f roots i n consonants ; a nd by verbs of th eseconda ry conj uga tions . Thus , 3g, “fay ; ta
'
, m y ; h e
Hiram; a re.Eff are, fi rm (cf .
3 I7 . Ca u sa t ives a nd denom ina tives i n we: have m ,the
roo t being trea ted a s i n the p resen t ; thus , i t'
s,W ; Hive
W ; as, W a rm.
3l8 . Some roots i n consona nts in sert o r rej ect a t p l ea sure ;thus
,1131 , mfi m o r I nga
”. The roo t i t?m akes 313W .
3 I9 . The ru l es fo r the use o f 1‘ i n the i nfini tive agree closely
w i th those govern ing i ts u se i n the form a tion o f th e s-fu ture a ndo f the n omen agen tis i n 3 ’
320 . Uses of the i nfi n iti ve . The chief use o f the i nfini tive i sa s equ iva len t to a n a ccusa t ive, a s the object o f a verb
,esp ecia l ly
o f the verb s {rag‘b e a bl e ’
,a nd W?
‘be worthy ’, ‘ha ve the right
The i ncremen ts o f EB a r e sometimes a nd i n stead o f
a t a ndm ; esp ecia l ly where a d ifficu l t combina t ion of consona ntsi s thu s a voided.
I n all the tense -systems , a nd i n deriva tion , the root § H\
exh ibi ts often the vf ddln' i nstead of the ga pe - s trengthen ing .
Lesson XXX .
or p ower ’; thu s , m fi rfi ‘Ififfifa“ h e i s abl e to tel l ” ,
awn-
( z“ the pri nce ought to hea r i t ” . W
‘
é‘ i s often thus u sed wi th
V
the infin i tive to express a resp ectfu l r eques t o r en trea ty, a s i n thela s t e xamp l e . The i nfin itive i s a l s o often found w i th verbs o f
m otion,a nd with those mea n ing ‘desi re ’
,
‘ hop e ’, ‘noti ce ‘know ’,
a nd the l ik e .S2I. But often the i nfin i tive ha s a ca se-va lue not a ccu s a tive .
Thu s , a da tive va lue : Raff-1 WW“ there i s food to ea t ” i . e .
“ for ea t ing ” ; a gen i tive va lue : “ i f W 311:“ cap abl e o f going ” .
E ven a construction a s n om i na tive i s n o t u nknown .322. I n certa i n connections the infin i tive ha s a qua si
-p a ssive
force . Thu s, aijm t aq:
“ begun to be made ” ; fi g 71WO
T-T“ i t i sn o t fi t to be hea rd . ” This i s esp ecia l ly frequ en t a l o ng w i th the
p a ssi ve forms o f 3 615; thus , 3 1337 77m“ h e ca nnot a ba ndon ” ,
bu twill; a a n ?“ he ca nno t b e a ba ndoned ” ; ‘
c'
lfi m t?““ the two men ca n be brought h i ther . ”
323 . F uture Pa ssive Pa r t i ciple, or Ge'
run dive. Certa i n d eriva t ive a dj ectives, mostly seconda ry , ha ve a cqu ired a va lue qu i tel ike tha t o f the La ti n geru ndive ; thus , (from in)
‘to b e done ’,
f a ciendus. They m ay be ma de from every verb . The ordina rysuffixes a re three : 21, fl a t, a ndw ill.
324. A . Suffi x a}
a . Before th is suffix fina l ra dica l 3” becomes ‘
Q ; thu s , from m , 5121. b . Other fina l vowel s som etimes r ema i n un cha nged
,som etim es have the guzza o r even th e
vrddhi- s trengthen ing ; a ndQ often , a nd i ii a lways , a r e trea ted before
1] a s before a vowel ; thu s , from fa , 3 a a nd Elisa ; from lfl , fi t :
a nd W ; from g. , W a nd 3mm; from fi , a re}; from vi , E531 ; from31, m ar. c . I n a few insta nces
,a short vowel a dds a before
the suffix ; thu s , W 375 (i i) . d . Medial3 1 rema i n s
The origi na l va lu e o f th i s su ffix is ia . Hence the convers iono f Q to fi ll a nd of i f} to “
i ti before i t.
124: Lesson XXX.
u ncha nged i n o n e cl a ss o f words, a nd is lengthen ed in a nother
cla ss ; thus , 31 8 . fi rst. w . but mat (vig ) , W (W )
e . I ni tia l o r m edia l i , u , a nd r - vowel s a r e sometim es u ncha nged,
sometimes ha ve the gupa -strengthen ing ; thus, i s] , 113 , gi t; 3 31,
aw ,m . f . The roo t ma m akes fi rm. A form W (fromthe defective rootw ) i s a ssigned to “
gi t .
“
arr-”
Gri t m akes 3 11Wa nd M . g . Ca usa t ives a nd denom ina tives i n W a re trea ted a sin the p resen t , but om i t the syl lables W ; thu s , a t ,
325 . B . Suffi x “
flat. This is a seconda ry a dj ective deriva tivefrom the i nfin i tivalnou n i n 31. Hence , both a s rega rds the form o f
root a nd the u se or om i ss ion o f t , th e rul es a r e the same a s fo rthe forma tion of the i nfin i t ive thu s , W EI,
“
Elm , a fa a a t {Effl
326 . O. Su ffi x wffi'
q [Q M ] . Genera lly ra di ca l vow elsw i l l b e found guna ted before this suffix ; causa tives a nd den om in
a tives i n "
are: a r e trea ted a s i n the p resen t- sys tem , withou t thesyl la bles 3m ; thus , W wrfifia grams: a
'
i
327. The geru nd ives i n as : a r e common in the imp ersona l pa ssive construction described i n Lesson X
,a nd no t seldom ha ve a
p urely fu ture sen se ; thu s , 3 31 a m m m “f elt-{BER wi th tha tthou sha l t b e happy ”
Vocabulary XXX.
Verb s 2ln El‘
él(a vagdlza te) d ive u nder“
i t? ha ve the right,etc . (a ce) .
(cf. an: (tdp a tz'
,-te) burn (tr. a n d
“
SITE-km fin i sh , a t ta i n . pa i n ; in p ass. suffer
,
§ +wv~m p ay. do p ena nce .
7m: wfi -‘
t vi s i t, ‘Efl'
fa a rrange,orda i n, order .
a tten d .TL (ng
‘
tga ti) da nce .
126 Lesson xxx . xxxr.
14. The ma iden s s ea ted them selves (p a ss. p a r t.) i n th e ga rden tobi nd wrea ths . 15 . Tru e fri ends a r e a b1e ~ to save from m i sfortun e .16. The daughters came (p a ss. p a r t.) to bow before thei r pa ren ts .17 . How i s the del ica te body o f thi s fa i r on e ca pa bl e of enduring
p ena nce? 18 . Y ou m us t b ecom e a schola r (use W ua nd cf .
§ l77) . 19 . Y o u mu s t bring a boa t to cross the river . 20 . W h o
i s a ble to s top the m igh ty wind? 2 1. The gentl emen (use m )
a r e to rea d this letter . 22. Ha vi ng fin ished the Veda , he wen t onto s tudy the o ther sciences .
Lesson XXXI .
328 . Numer als. Car din als: 1135 1 , g 2 , f i t 3 ,“
i rirg 4, 113 5 ,
“l 6 , a }: 7 , 713 9, 3
111 1 0 m 1 1
, 33 31 12 ,
“ ii i ?! 14, “3 3 31 1 5 , 151m m?« an : 1 7, m u“ ,
m 1 9, rm 2 0 . m am 21 , m a 22, etc .
fi rm 3 0, am fi fl q 40, W it 5 0, Ef 00 , “ fi t 70 , ama
fa so, a sfa 90, a?! 1 00 . rm o r 3 n’
a 2 0 0 . m 1 000 ,
fangs; o r 3 “ if; 2 000 , ‘EHHEH or W 1 00 000 .
329 . The numbers between the even tens a r e made by p r e
fix i ng the un i t - number to th e ten ; thu s , qa fa’
a fa 25 . Bu t note
1135133 ,n o t 11m ,
11 . 42, 5 2 , 62 , 72 a nd 92
,ei ther fasten
fi‘
m—t o r 3130, etc . ; 43—73 , a n d 93 , ei ther fa o o r 21213 5 110 etc . ;
48—78,a nd 98
,ei ther “
a g o o r“
am m o, etc . 96
’
is a fa .
3 30 . There a re o ther ways o f express ing the numbers betweenthe tens . Thus : 1 . By th e u se o f the a dj . W ‘ defici en t ’
,i n com
p osition ; e . g . M FR ‘20 l ess i . e . This u sage i sn ot common excep t for the n ines . Sometimes ‘
Qfl i i s l eft o ff , a nd
W W , etc . have the same va lue . 2. By the a dj . m or
W‘more ’ , a lso i n composit ion ; e . g . , w afa (also
stem Haifa) 98 .
Lesson XXXI . l27
33l. The same m ethods a r e u sed to fo rm . the o dd numbersa bove 100 . Thu s
, Ham-
da wnW M 1 08 , ns tfim'
uaa wé ,
am t mm 1 0 7 .
332 . In fl ecti on o f ca rd in als. 1 .
”
( i ii i s d ecl i ned l ike qé , a t
§ 23 | (pl. :‘some ’, ‘certa i n The dua l does not occur .
m som etimes m ea ns ‘a certa in ’; o r even ‘
an,a’
,a s a n indefin i te
a rti cl e .2 . g (dua l o nly}i s qu i te regu la r ; thus , n om .
-a cc .-vo c . m .
, a ,
n 3 ; W , W K
3 . fa i s i n m a sc . a nd n eu t . n ea rly regula r ; th e fern . ha s th estem fag. Thu s
,nom . m . m , a cc . m . fi x ,
n om .- a cc . n .
fi fm; i ns tr. fafiqa ,da t. - abl. m , gen . m m ,
l oc. fag .
F em . : nom .- a cc . {HE EL ins tr .m ,
da t . - abl. fag“ ,gen .
tam .l o c . tag
4 . i f}? ha s W K i n stro ng ca ses ; th e fem . stem is wag.
Thu s , n om. m . fl an-
(q , a cc . m . W ; nom .-a cc . u . am fi ;
c Q
i nstr .W K etc . F em . n om .-a cc.m ,
i n str .,etc . ,w ,
“ EM M W W , 3 3 123
(5 These numbers have n o di s tin cti on o f gender . Theya r e i nflected wi th some i rregu la ri ty a s p lura l s . Thu s
5 , 7 . 9. 1 0 . as , na fi nt , was , 33 1m , fla g . Ha , a s .
a , a nd compounds of 331, a r e simi la rly decl ined .
a s fol l ows : 3 3 , W W , qw a W Eg g8 fl ? m ay fol low I ra ,
or be decl in ed thus : wi t “ I f“ ,
” 41K , M , W e
2 0, 3 0, etc. m , fi m ,etc.
,a r e decl i n ed regu la rly a s
fem . stem s,i n allnumbers .
1 00, 1 000 . 3171 a nd m a re decl ined regula rly a s n eu t .s tems , i n allnumbers .
333 . Con str uction of numerals. 1 . The words from 1 toa re used a s adj ectives , a greei ng i n ca se (a nd i n gender, i f possible)
128 Lesson XXX I .
wi th the nouns . 2. The numera l s above 1 9 a r e u sua l ly trea ted as
nou ns,ei ther taking the n umbered noun a s a dep endent geni tive,
o r s ta ndi ng in the sing . i n apposi tio n with i t ; thus , m mo r “Ffm :
“a hundred fema l e slaves ” ; W m
“ in s ixtya u tumns ” .
334. Or din als. mam “ ‘first ’, fi zfi'
q, gai n , a ge}, flaw,
T3 , W , m , m , m , m (to 1 9th, the same a s th eca rdina ls
,but decl ined l ike 33 , Fan
“o r raw 2oth ;
fi g o r fax“ 3 0th , etc. Note a l so m o r m i l,
m afi ufm w a i tstaff-
emu , 19th . The shorter fo rm s (m e te )a r e by fa r the commoner .
335 . W , W a nd Tim mak e thei r fem . i n ther es t , i n “
31. Occa sional form s o f the p ronom i na l declension a re
m et with from the first three ; bu t th e u sua l decl ens ion o f nounsis the n orma l o n e fo r ordina l s a l so .
336 . Numer ala dverbs. 1 . Ham:‘once ’; fi g ‘ twi ce ’; m
‘thrice ’; W‘four times ’; am o r 113 3 1“
‘five t imes ’;a n d so o n , with O
M o r 0m . 2 . W‘i n o ne way
’;
W o r i t“ ‘ i n two ways ’; fa i n or 233W , a fi‘élt T5 3 13 “BET
o r“ a n ew—3 . m o n e by o n e’
;‘by hundreds ’, etc .
Vocabulary XXXI.
Verbs w i n caus . (bkoj a'
ya ti) feed .
355 1+ an; (sa rhkala'
ya ti) put to fa i t + Wfi ] (a bhisi ii ca'
ti) a noin tgeth er
, add . a s k ing.
an“ wfi r p a ss (o f tim e) . a + a g~=m ci te , m enti on .
W Ua’
lp a fi ) speak , cha t .
Sub st W m n . , n . p r . a ci ty.
a i r-SEQ m .
,the fourth Veda .
N form s no ord i nal.
1 30 Lesson ‘XXXI . XXX I I .
Rik-verses . 13 . Krsna i s th e eldes t o f six broth ers . 14. Arj unai s the third among the five Pandava s . 15 . Some think therea re eigh t sor ts of ma rria ge others
,six (model af ter 2nd
sen ten ce i n Sa nskr i t a bove) . 16. Twen ty-seven o r twen ty-eight luna rma nsions a r e m en tioned i n a stronomy . 1 7 . One shou ld consecra tea Brahma n in his eighth yea r
, a K sa tr iya i n his eleven th , a Vaicyai n his twelfth .
'
18 . Two grea t l ights shi ne i n the sky . 19. Thetea cher , ha ving ta ught the fifth Rik - vers e , reci ted the s ixth .
20 . Cakyam un i Buddha d ied i n th e eightieth yea r of h is age (life) .
21 . Sometimes 33 gods a r e reckoned i n the Veda ,sometim es 3333 .
L esson XXXII .
337 . Comp a r i son o f Adject ives. Deriva t ive adj ectives ha vingcomp a ra t i ve a n d sup erl a tive mea n ing o r often , a n d m ore origina l ly, a merely i n ten sive va lu e a r e ma de either (A .) d i rectly fromroots (by p rima ry deriva tion) , o r (B .) from other deriva tive o r com
p ound s tems (by seconda ry der iva tion) .338 . A . The suffixes o f p rima ry deriva tion a r e N fo r th e
compa ra tive , a nd fo r the sup erla tive . The root before them i sa ccen ted, a nd u sua lly s trengthen ed by guna (i f capabl e o f i t) , o r
sometimes by n a sa l iza tion o r prolonga tio n . I n cla ssica l Sa nskri tfew such forma tion s a r e i n u se ; a nd these a tta ch themselves i nm eani ng mostly to o ther adj ectives from the same root, which seemto be the ir correspondi ng posi tives . I n p a rt , however, they a r e
connected w i th words u nrela ted to them i n deriva tion .
339 . Thu s fi lfi ‘
qq a n d fi fqg ( j/ffi tt) a t ta ch themselves to
fa n ‘qu ick ’
; 3 13“ a nd fi ft y (V3 to W‘broad ’
; tum a nd W W ,
‘worse ’ a nd ‘wors t ’,to the subs t.
mu ; qfi'
qq a nd q g ,to 11g
‘ skilful ’ ; tram a ndm to
Lesson XXXI I . 1 3 1
i tsv“
rt ; m a n d a ft-rs , to area o r m ; m um a nd
W e to (mg.
340 . The follow ing a re examp l e s o f a rtificia l connection s
wfi aafi ‘nea r ’, 3m . 3 m ; are :
‘ l i ttl e ’. when .
“
cafes
(but a l so “
am , fl i rts ) ; 1m‘hea vy ’
, mm . a ft erRTE?‘ l ong ’ m , mfw ; W EI
‘
p ra i seworthy ’
,
‘good ’, {frag, better i t?
‘bcst’
; fim ‘dea r ’, am , 3m; a g
' ‘m u ch ’
, sla g ,
Uifi m ; W‘you ng ’
. i nfla te t ires ; as‘old
’
. estate .
“
at
ffig‘
. emu-
Q a n d $218 corresp ond sometimes to m g or mg ,
sometimes to 33 .
34l. The stem s i n {13 a re i nflected l ike ordi na ry a dj ect ivesin i t , w i th th e fem . i n =; fl ; those i n “
2“ ha ve a p ecu l ia r declen sio n , wi th a s trong s tem i n m ,
a nd fem . h a} ,for
which se e 25 5 . So a l so m a nd“
ii“ .
342 . B . The su ffixes o f seconda ry deriva ti o n a r e a t a nd“
6m
They a r e of a lmos t u nrestri cted use . Tha t form of s tem is u sua l lytaken wh ich a pp ea rs b efore a n i n i tia l consona n t o f a ca se- ending.Stem s i n fi g a re a lways u n cha nged ; final {a a nd m become
{Q a nd W ,a fter which the i t of the suffix becomes g .
Thus , rm . fi rem en-
c,°aw£a t“ , W , was ; far
31K » feas t ,”sm
343 . Som e s tems which a re substa n tives ra ther tha n a dj ectivesa re found to form deriva t ives o f compa rison ; thu s , WW
‘mos tm otherly ’
, W‘most ma nly ’
, w an‘mos t l ike a n elepha n t . ’
344 . Compar i son o f Adverbs. Adverbs a r e compa red by a ddi ngth e suffixes i n the forms m g a nd m ; thus , g
‘well’,
“
( I‘
d
w , saw t
345 . Con s truction . W i th a compa ra t ive (a nd sometimes withother words used i n a s imila r way) the ab la tive i s the regu la rconstruction ; thus , W T HQ : fi
‘
enfi “a da ugh ter i s dea rer
to h im tha n a so n”; n fa
’
fa 3m m “ i n tel lec t a lo ne isV9
1 32 Lesson XXXI I .
stron ger tha n force ” . After the sup erla tive ei ther geni tive o r l oca tivem ay be u sed . The compa ra tive often ha s the force o f a strengthened sup erla tive ; thus ,mm ‘mos t honora bl e ’
Vocabulary XXXII.
Subst fi fig m .,n . p r .
,- th e I ndus .
W 5 m .,o n e o f a ba nd of cel es W m .
,drunka rd .
t ia l s i ngers,a Ga ndha rva . Erna m .
,w i n ter.
{a m .
,n . p r . Adj
W n .,runn ing, course . W l i ttl e
,sma l l ; a s n . subst. ,
”
(1m m .,the world- sp i ri t. a tom .
m m .,del ivera nce, sa lva tion . m swi ft .
fi fi‘
qfi‘
f .,n . p r . m ,
f. {Ti n}, such .
Efi‘
g‘
n . , m eta l ; i ron . m , f. 0 3 ”a n d old .
W m .,crow . a ffifl: a biding, b ei ng.
ga mm a a sys tem o f ph ilo so phy . I ndecl“m m f . , n . p r . a
“
sometimes in sense of i f.
Exercise XXXII.
sits?mm tum a uto was fam‘
l
“
w as fimfi § m a’
fi "
a ufi xElfi n : nat : n
m m a % : m h sfi gv fifi a a m lw a s
t ra um a 1 a n ame?mzii oft nfixit 8 I “
a t?fi sm i m
?iren'
Earns : fi mfia m e va fi sw a m vi a fi fi lul
Ufmmmfim m rfi sfit 1133 1115 213 3 w ith Q ! tra
fifi mfifi rfi fi tza s fafi fisvm a fi tW emfi ne
m werfi ia fi lé‘
na gfism m m m c a n“:
win“
sm a rt 313W : w i’ru
'
i e : m ifi o nur
tu'
fu‘
tufizsrej“
si sim nso I mas. “ flag m afi a sr
m u as u
Tra nsla te a s though gen i tive .
Lesson XXXI I I .
a n un comp ounded sta te woul d b e connected by E . g . 33
“TM‘done a nd undone ’; aaflmém
‘
fim :‘gods a nd Ga n
dh ar va s a nd men ’. The members o f su ch a compou nd m ay obvi
o usly be o f a ny number , two o r m ore .I I . Dete rm i na tive comp ounds , o f which th e former m ember is
svn ta c tically dependen t o n the la tter , a s i ts determin ing o r qua l ifying a djunct : being either a n ou n l im iti ng i t i n a ca se-rela ti on ,or a n a dj ective o r a n a dverb describing i t . Thu s m ay be dist i n
gu ished two sub-cla sses : A . D ep en dent, a n d B. Descr ipt ive, com
pounds ; their d i fference i s n o t a bsolu te .Examp l es a r e : o f dependents , wfm
’fim ‘
a rmy o f enemies ’;”
0m ‘wa ter for th e fee t ’; m a‘made with ha nds’ ; of
descrip tives, 313 1“ ‘grea t k ing filflm 35 3,2)
‘dea r fri end ’
;
g ai n‘badly done ’.
348 . The cha r a cter o f compounds o f cl a sses I . a nd I I a s
pa rts of sp eech , i s determined by thei r fina l member, a nd they a re
ca p abl e o f being resolved in to equ iva l en t phra ses by giving the
p rop er i ndep enden t form a nd forma l mea ns o f con necti on to ea chmember. Bu t thi s i s n ot tru e of the third cla ss , which a ccordinglyi s more fundamenta l ly d i s ti nct from them tha n they from ea cho ther .
349 . I I I . Secon da ry Adj ective compou nds , th e va lu e o f whichi s n o t given by a simp l e resolu ti on in to thei r componen t p a rts , butwhich
,though havi ng a s fina l member a nou n
,a r e themselves a d
j e ctives . These aga i n a re o f tw o sub - cla sses : A . Possessi ve com
pounds , which“
a re noun-compounds o f the precedi ng cla ss (I I . A .
o r w i th th e idea o f ‘having ’ a dded,turn ing them from nou ns
i n to a dj ectives ; a nd B . compounds i n which the secon d member i s
This cla ss o f compounds i s o f comp a ra tively recen t develo pm e n t ; only the other two a r e common in others o f the rela tedtongues.
Lesson XXXI I I . 135
a n ou n syn ta ctica l ly dep enden t o n the firs t : n amely , 1 . Pa rti c i p i alcompou nds (only Vedic) , o f a p resen t p a rticip l e w i th i ts fol low ingobj ect ; a nd 2. Pr oposi ti onal compounds, o f a p rep osi tio n a n d fol
low ing n ou n . This whol e sub-cla ss B i s compa ra tively sm a ll .Examp l es : Erf fi fl ‘
possess ing a hero -a rmy ’; 115 1t ‘ha vingdes ire o f p rogeny W ‘excessive ’.
3 5 0 . The a dj ective compou nds a re , l ike simp l e a dj ect ives , sometimes u sed, e specia l ly i n the neu ter, a s a bstra ct a nd col l ectiven ouns ; a nd i n the a ccusa t ive a s a dverbs . Out of these u ses havegrow n a pp a ren t cla sses of compounds , reckoned a nd n amed a s suchby the H i ndu gramma ria ns .
3 5l. A compound m ay, like a simpl e word , become a memberin a nother comp ou nd , a n d so o n i ndefin i tely. The a na lys i s o f acomp ound (excep t copu la tives) , of wha tever l ength , mus t be m adeby a seri es o f bisections. Thus the dep enden t compound
33 ,done i n a p revi ou s ex is ten ce ’, is first divi s ibl e i nto $3 a nd
the descrip tive asaT-mt , then thi s i n to i ts tw o el ements .
35 2 . Enphon i c comb i nati on in compoun ds. The fina l o f a stemi s comb ined wi th the i n itia l o f a nother stem i n composi tio n a ccordingto the genera l ru l es for extern alcombina ti on . But :
1 . F i na l {q a nd W o f a pr ior m ember become { i t a nd E SLbefore su rd gu ttura l s
,denta l s , a nd la bia l s ; thu s ,m .
2. F i na l W o f a pr ior m ember often rem a i ns u ncha nged un ders imi l a r circumsta nces .
3 . After fina l 3 ,
“
fig, a n in i tial“
Q often becom es l ingua l .4. Pronou n s genera lly take th e s tem - form o f the n eu te r ; fo r
th e persona l pronoun s a re oftenes t used Hg a nd E?“ i n the s ing ,
3 1mg a nd"
gong in the pl.5 . F o r W e
i n th e p ri or member o f descrip tive a n d possessi ve comp ounds , i s used 313 1 .
6 . A ca se- form in the p rior member i s n o t very ra re .
136 Lesson XXXI II .
35 3 . In allcla sses o f compounds , certa i n cha nges o f fina l a r el ia bl e to a ppea r i n the concluding member ; genera l ly they ha ve th eeff ect o f tra nsferri ng the compound a s a whole to the a-declension :Thu s : 1 . A s tem i n m often drop s the fina l 31 ,
a s i n OW ,W ag ,
N iki ,0m . 2. A o o r i i s changed to W,
a s i n 0 2331,ON . 3 . An 3 i s a dded a fter a fina l consona nt ,
” sometimes evena fter a n u -vowel or a diphthong, a s i n 0 3 13 (W ), 113 (1h) .
The sep a ra te cla sses of compounds w ill n ow be taken up .
(Pa rt I I . )354 . I . COpulative compounds. Two o r m ore noun s much
l es s often adj ectives,a nd once o r tw i ce a dverbs ha vi ng a co
ordi na te construction,a s though joined by a nd ’, a re som etimes com
bin ed i n to a comp o undf’
35 5 . The noun -comp ounds fa l l , a s rega rds thei r inflective form ,i n to two cl a sses :A . The compound ha s th e gender a nd decl ens ion o f i ts fi nal
mem ber, a nd i s i n number a dua l o r p lura l , a ccordi ng to i tsl ogica l va lue a s denoting ei ther two, o r more tha n two , i ndiv idua lthings . Examp l es a re Efi
‘
fgfl é’f
‘ri ce a nd ba rley ’; ( m a i
Wi' ‘Rama a nd Krsna ’
; w :‘goa ts a nd sheep ’; a tw fa
W Brahma ns, K sa tr iya s, Va ieya s a n d Q fi dra s
o
; filfllfl’
ifi
l
35 2,6)
‘fa ther a n d so n’
.
B . The comp ound, withou t rega rd to th e n umber denoted o r
to the gender of i ts consti tuen ts,becomes a neu ter s ingu la r col l ective
(so -ca l led samahara -dva ndva ) . Thu s , W an‘hand a n d foo t ’;
Gfiw‘snak e a n d i chneumon ’
; m 35 3,3)
‘um
brel la a nd shoe ’; i mam 3 5 3 , 2)‘day a nd n ight’.
3 5 6. The la ter la ngu age p reserves severa l dua l combi na tion s
This cla ss is ca l l ed by the H i ndus dva ndva,
‘ coup l e ’; but adva ndva o f adj ectives they do not recognize .
1 38 Lesson XXX I I I .
p rior member sta nds i n a ny p ossibl e ca s e -rela ti on . Thus , mm‘gone to the vi llage ’; ag fé g
‘Veda -know ing ’
; fa qxfi a‘
protected by Oiva’
; 21??n “a DER!)‘good fOl‘ the COW ’
S
Q fiQ fi-rfl ‘fa l l e n from the sky ’; HW HQ W
‘more mob i l e tha nwaves ’; fiq
’m ETWII)‘best o f Brahma ns ’;
W ag?‘ cooked i n a p o t
’.
36l. Compounds o f this sort ha vi ng a s fi na l member the ba reroot sometimes modified i n form
,a nd
,i f i t end origina lly
i n a short vowel,genera lly w i th a n a dded it a re very numerous :
thu s ,w ag a bove “
( Elm‘ sta ndi ng i n the wa gon ’ (o r
simp ly ‘i n the Ha ll‘ on the hea d ’; m “only-born
W 35 2, G)‘forest-dwell ing ’ gfi q I
‘firm in ba ttl e ’; I rafHGl‘born i n the hea rt ’ (i . 0 .
362. B . Descri p tive compounds . I n th is d ivi s ion o f the determ ina tives
,the prior member sta nds to the other i n n o d is ti nct ca se
rela tion,bu t qua l ifies i t a dj ectively or a dverbi a l ly , a ccording a s the
fina l member i s noun o r a dj ective . Thus , fi rqaq 35 3, Flam‘well-done ’ ; W
‘evi l-doing ’
The compou nds o f noun -va lu e ca nnot well be sepa ra ted i nt rea tmen t from those o f a dj ective-va lue .
363 . The s imp les t ca se i s tha t i n which a noun a s fina l memberis p receded by a qua l i fy i ng a djective a s p rior member. Thu s , 35m SEQ?! W t)
‘bla ck horse ’; W m‘grea t m a n
’. I nstea d
o f a n a dj ective,the p rior member i s i n a few ca ses a noun used
a pposi ti ona l ly or with a qua si-adj ective va lue ; thus , m ffii ‘
p ries tsage ’; ‘
( Tafi ‘k ing-sa ge ’.364. Sometimes comp ounds o f th is sort express a compa ri son ;
thu s, m m ‘bla ck a s a thunder - cloud ’ (cf. ‘ coa l-bla ck ’
,e tc . )
o
Reversed, Han na
‘m a n - t1ger’
,1 . e .
,
‘a m an fierce a s a tiger ’;
Litera l ly, a tiger which i s not a tiger a fter all, bu t a m a n .
Or, p erhaps better , ‘ tiger o f (or among) men ’ (so W hi tney).
Lesson XXXI I I . 1 39
“ fa g‘foot- l otus ’, i . e . ‘
a foo t l ovely a s a
l o tus ’.3 65 . The a dverb ia l words m os t commonly u sed a s p rior
m embers o f descrip tive compounds , qua l i fying the o ther m ember,a re the verba l p refixes a nd th e words of di recti onrela ted to them ; l ikew i s e the i n sep a ra bl e p refixes W o r i t privative
, 3‘wel l ’
,
‘ i l l ’,e tc . These a re combin ed wi th n ouns (i n
qua si-a dj ectiva l va lue) a s wella s w i th a dj ectives . s Thus, W
‘n o t
done ’; wufilg a ‘ no t a schola r ’ ; wa s} ‘misfortu n e ’; wffi'
fl
‘more tha n a god ’; WW I exceed i ngly fa r ’; “
fi fe-[31a‘excessive
fea r ’; ‘
qfimfi‘Oppos ing side . ’
Vocabulary XXXIII.
Ver bs:“
( EL i t? (an a r djya tz’
,- te) be
W HR comp l e te . devo ted to , i n cl i n ed to
gq+ fi t s ta tion , p la ce, app oi n t . EFL-lI t go away (o n a j ourney) .
Sub st. W?n ,step . p la ce
m ans; m a i r , sky tori
m . ,n p r
W m hermita ge m 1 f , queenEll m .
,n . p r . W f .
,cha se .
W m .,boy
, prin ce .“
am f .,ma rch , j ourn ey ; support.
m f .,gam e, sport. i f“ m .
,ra ce
,family.
fa'
a'
ai m .,o r n am en t
'
(of ten 3a m m .,sta te o f a ffa i rs ; n ews .
n . ,ba th ing-p la ce ; p la ce o f W T f . , fema l e fri end .
p i lgrimage . W m .,hosp i ta l i ty .
fa fifi’
i fi n Oai'
} f. , the threefold Adj
world . m , f. c an, su i ta ble .
w m .,n . p r .
“
5 195 11, f. “m ,
a dop ted .
W m ., pa n ther.
140 Lesson XXXI I I .
m é , f. i n th e manner o f, m i . n ea r ; a s n eut. subst. ,o r su i tabl e fo r , the G a ndha rva s . vi ci n i ty, nea rness , p resence .
fgw,f . 0 3 11 , hea ven ly , d ivi n e . ~
Adv. :
W ,f. huma n . EU ea rl ier, form erly.
Exercise XXXIII.
gum"
?a m“
cmfii : W W W Fag-
ct:W 3
fi a’
i vvmva a a $3 31 n fa ga’
fifaau fa rfi M a ir?"
um um : a I m a? W fl mfi sfie’tfifi r
sa fe‘
q’fia v m fiuaza fi éfim m s ncan
”
a sfm‘
verm
m m fi m afi a’
fi fiw gm ls lw e:
W W “ {Fa Hagen-
37m fi f
’v‘
lflna a fia m f Bi a'
vri ( 1
a r fi vfi e zlulamm rfiémmfi fl ffi e fi am gfw
i fsm 7m: m fiefi ar am m fm ftmga rag
(F orm comp ounds of words j oin ed by hyp hens) .
7 . W hen he ha d seen her,bril l ia n t p r es. p a r t . ) with di
v in e-bea u ty , a s though (( a ) more-tba n -huma n,the hea rt o f the
k ing- sage wa s i n cl i ned (p a ss. p a r t.) towa rd her . 8 . Thereupon ,h av ing l ea rned tha t she (a cc .) wa s the da ughter - o f a n -Ap sa ra sh e ma rri ed her by the gandha rva -ceremony (fi lm ) su i tabl e-forK sa tr iya s. 9 . D ussa n ta
,a fter dwel l i ng very m a ny days - a n d- n ights
i n the hermi ta ge,a ba ndoned Q akun tala a n d return ed to his-own
ci ty. 10 . Afterwa rds , when Kanva ha d fin ished his p i lgrima ge ,a nd return ed to th e hermi tage
,l ea rni ng (fag) the n ews
4-o f-hi sl
da ughter’s2-m a rria ge3,he sen t her in to - the -p resence-o f-D ussa n ta .
11 . The royal-sage a t firs t di sown ed (W T-E IL Q GTJ Cakun tala when
she wa s com ez- to - the -c i tyl ; but a t la st he p a r txm°a 7fi
\)2her i a - the-p la ce3-o f- the-fi rst1-qu een . 12. I n the course o f t ime
To engage i n the sp ort of hun ti ng ” ; of. below , 375,3 .
142 Lesson XXXIV.
37I. A . Possessive compounds. The possessives a r e determ ina tive compounds to which a r e given both a n a dj ective i nflection
(a s ju st shown) , a n d a l so a n a dj ective mea ni ng o f a k i nd bes tdefined by a dding ‘ha ving ’ to the mea n ing o f the determina tive .Thus
,the dep enden t am n . ,
‘beau ty o f a go’
d’
,becomes the
possessive 23 6 th 0 3 11, m . f. n .,
‘ha vi ng the bea u ty o f a god’
;
the descrip tive fi m3 m .,
‘ l ong a rm ’
,becom es the possess ive
m . f. n ‘ha vi ng l ong372 . Dep enden t compou nds a r e , by compa ri son , n o t often thu s
turned in to possess ives . But possess ively u sed descrip tives a re
extremely frequ en t a nd va rious ; a nd some hi nds o f combina tionwhich a re ra re i n prop er descriptives a re very common a s p o s
sessives.
373 . An a dj ective a s pri or m ember takes th e m a scul i n e stemform
,even though referring to a femini n e noun i n the fina l member ;
thu s, Q uamfi (from 311151 ) ‘
p ossess ing a bea u ti ful wi fe ’.374 . As prior members a r e fou nd1 . Adj ectives p rop er ; thu s , W o f other form ’
. 2. Pa rtic iples ; thu s , m ‘whose mother i s sl a in ’
. 3 . N umera l s ;thus
, a gfiq‘fou r-
a
fa ced ’; fi fi tfi a ‘ three - eyed ’. 4 . N oun swith qua sira dj e ctivalva lue ; thus , fm gfi
‘gold-ha nded ’. E s
pecially common i s the u se o f a noun a s prior member to qua l i fythe other a pposi tiona l ly ,
o r by way o f equ iva l ence. These m aywel l be ca l l ed app osi tion alp ossess ives. Thus , W 1“
‘ha vi ng“ Krsna ”
a s n ame ’; ‘
éfiw ‘ha vi ng men who a r e heroes ’ ;Q
‘Efl‘
t flfl‘
q‘n sing sp i es a s eyes ’; m a
‘ha vi ng thee a s m es
senger ’. 5 . Adverbia l el emen ts (especia l ly in sepa rabl e p refixes) ;
This cla ss o f compounds is ca l led by th e na tives ba huvr i hz’
;
the n ame i s a n examp l e o f th e cla ss , m ea ning ‘ha vi ng m uch rice ’.The possessive m ay genera l ly, i n a ccen ted tex ts , b e di st ingu ished
from the origina l determina t ive by a diff erence of a ccent .
Lesson XXXIV. 1 43‘
thu s, W
‘endless ’; W3?‘ chi ldl ess ’; 13133
‘wi th excel l en tson s ’; garfiq
‘ ill- sa vored ’. The a ssocia tive p refix a (l ess often
U3 ) i s t rea ted l ike a n a dj ective el em en t ; thus , m ‘o f l ike form
Hg? o r am‘with a so n o r
‘ha vi ng one’s so n a long w i th o n e ’;
W (Gv
+‘
QW n . )‘ fa vora bl e ’. 6 . O rdi na ry
.
verba l p r efixes ; thus , m an
‘o f wide fame ’; mg ‘l imbless ’; fi rst-1
‘
p owerl ess ’; m‘with up l i fted fa ce ’. 7 . Ordina ry a dverbs ;
thu s, {gfi rfl
‘ w i th m ind d i rected hither ’.375 . Certa in words
,very frequ en t i n th e compounds menti oned
a t 374,4 , ha ve i n p a r t wo n a p ecu l ia r a pp l ica tion .
1 . Thus w i th m ‘beginning ’ (or the deriva tives W o r
i nf“ ) a r e ma de compounds s ign i fyi ng the p erso n o r th ing design a ted a long w i th others such a p erson o r th ing et cetera .
Thu s, 2m I N :
‘ the gods ha ving I ndra a s fi rst ’, i . e . ‘the
gods I ndra , etc . ’ Often the qua l i fyi ng noun i s om i tted ; thus ,mama
-
ri ff?‘food
,dri nk
,etc . ’ 2 . W ords l ike 133
°
(avian)a re u sed i n the same way , to denote a ccomp a n imen t ; ch iefly a d
verbially . 3 . The noun we}‘obj ect ’,
‘
p urp ose ’, i s u sed a t th e
e nd of a compou nd , oftenes t a s a neu t . subs t . (a cc . o r i nstr . o rto signi fy ‘ for the sake of’
,a nd the l ike ; thu s , {Em il} ‘for
Damaya nti ’s sak e ’; m e} ‘for a bed ’. (See below,
4. fl a t (a s neu t . subs t .) often mea ns ‘o ther ’ i n possess ives ; thu s,
2mm? n .,
‘a nother region ’ (l i t. ‘ tha t which ha s a di ff erence o f
376 . I n appos i tiona l possess ives , the fina l m ember , i f i t dos igna te a p a rt o f the body ,
sometimes s ignifies the p a r t to whichbelongs wha t i s designa ted by th e p rior member : tha t o n o r i nwh ich i t i s . Thu s nfinfi’l'q ‘wi th neck la ce o n neck ’
. S uch com
p ounds a r e commones t with words m ea ning ha nd ; thus , a ffl lnfiq‘with sword i n ha nd ’; E113 “
‘wi th cl ub i n ba nd ’.377 . The p ossess ives a re no t a lways used wi th the s imple
144. Lesson XXXIV.
va lue o f qua l i fying adj ective. Often th ey have a p regna n t sense ,a nd become the equ iva l e nts o f dep enden t clau ses ; o r the ‘ha ving ’
imp l ied i n them becomes a bou t equ iva l en t to o ur‘having ’ a s a
s ign of p a s t a ction . Thus , mg'
efiaa ‘
p ossessing a tta i ned a do
l escence ’, i . e .
‘bavi ng rea ched a dolescence”; WW W‘with u nstudi ed books ’, i . e . ‘on e who h a s n egl ected study 7mm‘whose brea th i s gone ’, i . e. ‘l i fel es s ’; m g
‘
c'
g‘to whom dea th
1 8 come nea r ’.378 . B . Com pounds wi th gover n ed fi n alm ember .1 . Par ti ci p i al compounds , exclusively Vedi c .2 . Pr epos iti on s ] compounds . Thu s m ay conven ien tly be ca ll ed
those compounds i n wh ich the p rior m ember i s a p a rti cle with true
p reposi ti onalva lue , a nd the finalm ember a nou n governed by i t.Thus , W T?
‘la s ting over nigh t ’ ; Efra i n? ‘beyond m ea sure ’,0
‘excesswe
’
; Erh ard}‘next the e a r ’.
379 . Adj ect ive comp oun ds a s n oun s a n d adverbs. Compounda dj ectives
,l ik e simpl e ones , a r e freely u sed substa ntively a s ab "
str a cts a nd collectives,especia lly i n the neuter , a n d l ess often in
the feminin e ; a nd they a r e a lso mu ch us ed a dverbia l ly, p a rticu la rlyi n the a ce . sing . n eu ter .
380 . The substa n tively u sed possessive compounds havi ng a
numerala s prior m ember, wi th some o f the strictly a dj ective c om
p ounds , a r e trea ted by the H i ndus a s a sepa ra te cla ss, a n d ca l l eddua
’
yn Examp l es o f such n umera l a bstra cts a n d col lectives a r e :
fag“ n . ,
‘th e three ages ’; fazfi a fl n .,
‘spa ce o f three l eagues ’.F eminines of l ike use occur i n the la ter la nguage ; thus fi ‘
éfiafi‘
(by th e side of 0 35 ‘ th e three worlds ’.3 8l. Those a dverb ia l ly u sed a ccusa tives of seconda ry a dj ective
The n ame i s a samp l e of the cla ss , a n d mea ns ‘of two cows ’
(sa i d to be used i n the sen se of ‘worth two
146 Lesson XXX IV
tfi'
fl m . , fish .
m n .,chest, brea st.
“
av g m .,boa r.
337 " f . , p a i n .
E ng m .,tendon ; bowstring .
Adj
f. 0 3 11, blamel ess , fa u l tl ess .
Wi faia ,f. fa vora ble ; a s
n eat: subst. , fa vor .
wa r ,f. in ner ; a s n eu t
subst. , th e i n terior , middl e ;i n terva l
,diff erence ; occa sion ,
Exercise XXXIV.
a ft-13m a avian Tani 3 a vft'
ca'
a’ut
wragvurfmlm 33 1 unfi t Re in u ea 11
“
fi reman?W : a fa aufa w I a a $5521 an d mi?awn: a I
“
a s: 3 3 uufim (pres . p a r t ) uéafinm fi we'
r
amq rr. a a a n amim rsgsu’
i u a 3 71 um‘
a’fi : I 8 l
'
fuufiz smelt afi’rmfa
'
sn mfi=§ gfi im i mam m
fZ FfiTC Efir-{T “Em it wa rm I u I a m a nd 6mm :
w e: sfixm am a-
m 113 : t”
. anti w a r a fm aw
fi lfifl a th alam us!“ nso 1are am unm fi rm u e a s ter
fi fi m mm uafi laa lm w am amunm fiu as lW m fi tfiara “ $3125 m 6 13
“Emm i-
u : use ! ares Elfi n tam?augmen t?stimufzfiwam‘é
‘
tfl firema n as la t sfizan : n at! u
16. Those-who -ha ve-done- evi l mus t do p ena n ce twelve-days ,
juncture 376 ,
ug sk i l l ed .
m .f. “ in . young.
I n de cl. :WEI then , thereupon .
Hg (a dv. a ce . ) therefore.
am so long ; often merelydon e, doch .
m an a s l ong a s, wh il e ; a s soona s .
Ela ssevera tive pa rticl e ; gives toth e p resen t the force o f a n
his torica l ten s e .
Lesson XXXI V. XXXV. 147
six-days,o r th ree-days . 17. Purfi r ava s
,I ndra ’s - friend, m a rried the
m oon - fa ced fa u l tl es s - l imbed ” Ap sa ra s U rvaei . 18 . Bhrguka ceha
is s i tua ted (3a ) o n the Na rma da . 19. There s ta nds the l onga rm ed
,broa d- chested k i ng- o f- the -Anga s , sword- in -ba nd . 20 . The
p a th -o f-know l edge i s better tha n th e p a th-o f-works . 21. I n -theOp i n ion-o f- the-a nci en t-seers (cp d in 10 0 . or instr . ) o n e-whose-husba nd- i s-dead m ay choose a second a t-p l ea su re . 22. Love is bodil es s
,
a nd bea rs-a -fish - in- hi s-ba nn er ; so say th e poets . 23. The Brahma n’sda ughter , S i ta-by
-name ”,i s l o tus-eyed .
’24. The k i ng
,a l th ough
(wfil) m a ny-w ived , i s childl ess . 25 . The eloquen tM
pa ndi t ha sa rrived w i th-his -schola rs . 2G. W i th -up tur n edo fa ce (W E ) Cataka
p rays for ra i n-wa ter .
Lesson XXXV.
383 . F i r st Con j uga t ion of Ver bs. Pr esen t I n th is
conjuga tion th e Op ta tive a c t. , th e 2nd s i ng. imv. a ct. , a nd the 3rd
pl. m id., a r e formed otherw is e tha n i n the a -conj uga tion
3 84. Str ong forms. The forms i n which th e stem a ssumes i tsstrong form a re these : the three p erson s s ing . o f th e p res . a ndi mp f. i n die . a ct. , all firs t p erson s o f th e im v. , a ct. a nd m id .
,a nd
the 3rd s ing . imv. a ct . Al l other forms o f th e presen t systema r e weak .
38 5 . Endings. F o r th e m iddl e endings fl , W711, a n dma r e substi tu ted 3 a,
“
am e nd m ; a n d a fter redup l ica ted stem s
(a nd a few others) Wfil. Era, a n d W a r e substi tuted for the
Seconda ry a dj . cpds.
,fem . i n Q“ .
D ep . cpd ,“ ski l l ed i n speech ” .
F o r a comprehen sive vi ew o f th e ways o f form i ng the. presen ts tems o f verbs fol lowing this genera l conjuga tion
, see I n troduct ion ,78 .
148 Lesson XXXV.
a ctive endings wfi a , W ’ a nd a n The 2nd s i ng . imv.
often takes the ending fg o r fix. Otherw i se the endi ngs a re thesame a s i n the a -conjuga tion .
386 . Op tative m ode-sign . The sign o f the o p t . a ct. i s 111 yet,with seconda ry endings ; bu t W i s th e ending i n the 3rd pl. , a nd
m i s dropp ed before i t ; thus ,387 . Presen t par ti ciple m i ddle. I n th e firs t conj uga ti on this
p a rti cip l e is made wi th th e suffix W [3 1m ] , before wh ich th estem takes the same form a s before th e 3rd pl. p res . i nd . The fem .
i s a lways i n W .
38 8 . Cla ss I V. A : nu-class. The p resen t-stem is m ade by a ddi ngto the roo t the syl la bl e E! n u [g nu] , i n strong forms
‘
cfi m5
[Eh‘ The “
3 o f th e cla ss - sign m ay be dropped before 3 \
a nd
q o f the lst du . a n d lst pl. endi ngs , excep t when the roo t endsi n a consona n t ; a nd th e ‘
3 before a vowel -ending becomes ELorBad
a ccordi ng a s i t i s p receded by o n e o r by two consona n ts .The endi ng fg o f the 2nd . sing. imv. i s dropp ed i f the roo t endi n a vowel .
389 . I . Roots in vowels. g‘
press ’.
I nd i cati ve.Active . Middl e.
sa n a va’
s sunuma’
s sunve’
sunuva’
he sun umdhe
2. gram gram gas! $33 F i fi 333
sunuthds sunu thd sunusa'
sunvathe sunudheé
ga r?suno
’
ti sunuta’
s sun va’
n ti sun a te’
sunva te sunva’
te
The forms EE K ,
“
gala , ga’
é , fi mfi , a r e a l tern a tive wi ththose given a bove for 1st da . a nd pl. , a nd occur oftener.
1 50 Lesson XXXV.
Imper ative.
1 .WW m ent: m ama mm? w ere? WW?
3 . 3 1m i? w ere straw W mamtram
Pa r ti ciple.“
3113 3 71 . f. amp ed“
ang i na ,f. “ SIT
The o ther forms o f this tense fol low th e model o f ”
g .
39l. 1 . The root g ,
‘hea r ’, contra cts to 33 before th e cla ss
sign, forming 3
3m gnu} a nd“
53m gram a s strong an d weak s tem ;
2nd sm g . i m v. a c t. 3g ; 2ud da . 1n d . a ct. i t”o rW ,
e tc.2 . The roo t $1 shortens i ts vowel i n the p resen t-system .
Vocabulary XXXV.
Verbs : i i w/wn dti, dbunu te'
) shake .
w (a cnu té) a cqu i re , obta i n . 13 03 73071; vnzu té) co ve r ,surr o und.
m obta i n 3” cove r, etc
m (dp n dti ra rely dp nute'
) a o w Op en .
qu ire,rea ch . fi at exp la i n , m a ni fes t .
+ 3 13 , n ,or m , rea ch . an shu t .
fa“
(cindtz’
, cinu té) ga ther . mag (pa kndti) b e a bl e .+ 11 o r W t , ga ther . g (; rzzdti , pmu té) hea r .
+ fi fl t o r fafi q , decide, con E! (strp étz’
, stn zu té) sca tter, s trew .
e lude . a n sca tter.
3g 11 urge o n . fig (hindtz‘
) send.
3 (dundti) , i n tr . , burn , feel p a i n g +um wr a tydlzdr a t0 br ing ba ck .
o r d is tres s ; tr . , p a i n o r d istress
(a cc .)
mm: m ., doork eep er .
q'
m . pl. , n . p r .,certa in dem ons .
W m . , m ight , p ower .
XXXV.
‘
( H m .,ta ste , feel ing.
m g ; m .
,a Brahm a n i n the
th i rd p eri od o f hi s l ife .
fa n m .,Brahma n .
“Ea: m .
,sound ; noise ; word .
Adj . :“
a i r, f. “ Q T, n ew.
Exercise XXXV.
mm ffi a’
t fai th 3 3 3 15 611433?I
W W 3 figs : “ M au ri ti annso u
W m m ztm am fi sts a l'
é W m fi l'
UlE'
flT
WW W ailW 1W W W 331m m a nag e r {alfa
fi trt-
ezzswim 8 Im i ner-awe a n ti : a s?van
“71W
5 15 m m fifwéfi tita n 3m : (an?Elana?a fem ur
q’
tflmfi mm lélfi smfi fm anaemia : fitfi ga nim e l
new? fem?wim m a gi ifqaw mm?fi tfi fi tewmg3m m fia
t-“
am t; “ W fl w fi mfi a fl zle lm a
mew: aw ait 5 13m u so u
11 . Ha ving entered the temp l e o f th e wo rsh ip fulGF IHFUVi snu we hea rd th e ea r -entra ncing (W song -o f- the-you ngwomen (use a ?! a t end of qad) . 12. Listen to this word o f a devoted (ffi g, p a ss. p a r t.) friend. 13 . The gr eedy (w , p a ss. p a r t) ,
who a r e a lways ga theri ng riches , n ever a tta i n the enj oymen t of
lnfi n . o f g.
The i ns tr . is sometimes used to express th e m edium ,or spa ce
o r dis ta nce o r road,tra versed .
1 5 1
N ,f. °3lT, meritori ou s , holy,
a usp i ci ous .“TEL sha ring.
m ,f. 0m , en tra ncing, agree
1 5 2 Lesson XXXV . XXXVI .
them . 14. By ta s teful , well -composed p oems ye m ay a t ta i n gloryi n th e ten regions of the world (W ) . 15 . Q akun tala, mayes t thouget (imu .) a husba nd worthy-o f- thee . 16. My
- two -brothers determined to travel to Bena res . 17 . M ay the king’s-sword bring grief to
imu . o r op t.) the hea rts -o f- the-wives-o f-h is -enemi es . 18 . Cl oudscover the sky . 19. Let the doorkeep er close the door.
Lesso n XXXVI .
392 . Ver bs. Class I V. B . u -cla ss. The‘
few roots (only six)o f this sub - cla ss end a l rea dy i n ‘
c'
( except o n e,
“
in,of c o nsid
er able i rregula ri ty a nd so a dd only 3 a s cla ss - s ign . The,in
flec tio n i s qu i te tha t o f the nu-cla ss,the “
3 being guna ted i n thes trong form s
,a n d dropped (op tiona l ly, but in fa ct nea rly a lways)
before EL a nd R of 1st dua l a nd p lura l .393 . Thus ‘
a‘
i t ,‘stretch ’
,m akes WWW , afi ffi , e tc . ; lst
da am (o r am ) , s t pl am t (c r am ) ; m id Ha , was,
“
am-
g, etc . alll ike a vowel root o f the n u- cla ss .394. The roo t ‘m ake ’
,makes the s trong s tem affi ,
weak
“ 5 the cla ss- sign 3 i s a lways dropped before 1 a nd q i n lst
da . a nd lst pl. , a nd a l so before q of the op t . a ct ive. Thus
I ndi cative.Active . Middl e
Ef fi e agate raw-in“
3153W pm m gm?
Imper fe ct.
m a ss? was sta r-
é. stafifi a W W sum“ fl it W m eta m
1 5 4 Lesson XXXVI .
a nd-so ’,from bo th adj ectives a nd noun s . Thus , elf -31W f.
,
fl fi a‘
fi n .,
‘the ra nk o f a K sa tr iya’.
Vocabulary XXXVI.
Verb s “I“ make known,o r vis i
in kuru te'
) do , m ake . ble .
a ll do evi l to , ha rm (gen ., +m 395 ) p rep a re , a dorn ;
loc .
, or consecra te.
am p rep a re , a dorn . fl i t ksazzu té) wou nd .
WTfH‘
Q (aviska r o’
ti) m ak e Hi s tretch,ex
k nown,exhibi t . tend perform (a sa crifice) .
+ 3 11 do good to, ben efit (gen . , + 3 17, cau se, bri ng abou t .
n sprea d a broadh ide ; blam e , find fa u l t g i t (ddsya ti) be defiled .
w i th 141 (m a n uté) th i nk , consider.
Et a pu t a t th e head.
Hf?! p ay , recomp en se ; pun ish
(a ce. r ei , gen . ,da t . or loc . p ara ) .
SubstWfi igfifa fl; m . , p riest of a certa i n k i nd .
W m . , progeny, descenda n t .
wfi im m ” p la n ; vi ew ; Op i n ion
anf‘
o—d f . , cha rm ,
gra ce .
“ EEK m .
, a stonishmen t.
3 1glfi‘
q n . , a certa in sa crifice .
ah a m .
,name o f a tribe.
fat—a fr aid f . , vei l .
a n m .,fa u l t .
fi fi f . , condu ct o f
poli tics .313331 m . ,
k i ng .
£3 1713 n .
,kitchen .
H‘
i‘
q n .,flesh .
m n .,sa l t.
arm n . , Sp i ce .5 13m m .
,tra de.
a.
“ m .
,doubt.
1?m .
,cook .
Lesson XXXVI .
Add W ,f. dea r.
wi t-1, f. “m, b li nd . Eli fiali , f. 0 3 11, wrong, fa l se .
W , f. 0 3 11, n ecessa ry.3331,f. “ a t, good , p roper .
”a“
,f. 0 3 11, knowing . Ea ,
f. 0 3 11, rea dy.
NJ? enj oyi ng .
Exercise XXXVI.
a 38 3 3 1 W ’swa f erW i tt
”
n as n
“
fl a t m i {at a t a t”
; W il la m m a ta
‘rfi rwfi
’
rfi a m : " as "
8 . Every-
yea r a n Agn iho trm m us t p erform the Caturmasya9 . Mayest thou ,
O Gr ea t~K ing , p ro tect thy k ingdom , ben efi tting
thy friends a nd ha rm ing thy enemi es . 10 . Brahma ns find fa u l tw i th th e tra de-in o salt. 11 . W ha t the n d i ds t (mid ) , tha t d i s tressesthy fri ends even n ow. 12. M ay I recomp ense h im (da t.) who ha sdon e me a servi ce . 13 . By the comma nd of the grea t-king consecra tethe fou r p rinces a ccording to th e law (fi fi -J , 14. The
Caulukya s hel d sway (W in) i n An ah ilapataka 247 yea rs .15 . By
- the-cha rm-o f-her-fa ce the l o tus -eyed ecl ip ses (fli t?) eventhe moon . 16. I f one consecra tes a. schola r , tea ches h im , makes
Poss . cpd, cf. 374, 5 .
1 5 6 Lesson XXXVI . XXXVI I .
him holy ,then th is o n e becom es h is ch i ld 17. The k ing
o f- the-Ka l inga s wou nded his en emy in the brea s t with a n a rrow .
Lesson XXXVII.
399. Verbs. n it- cla ss. The cla ss - sign i s i n th e s trong forms
the syl la ble 711 mi [m pd] , a ccen ted, which i s a dded to the roo t ;i n the weak forms i t i s fiat 717 [fi bu t before a n i n i t ia l vowelo f a n ending th e f i o f VII m
”
[qfi m] di sa ppea rs a l together .
400 . Thus, Efl ‘buy
’: strong stem afiqn hr i pd, weak a
’
ififi
kr i n i (before a vowel,m kr
'
i za) .
I n di cati ve .Active .
Imp er fect .W e °fm
madman W e “fla re.
a fi fi am w hen w’
i a
I mper ative .
1 . afimfi r
2 . W e
3 m tg W arn m e W m
Optative.
W E
etc .
Pa r ti ci ple .fi l m, f. ”an
40 I. The ending o f the 2md sing . imv. a ct . i s fg , n ever fix;a n d there a r e no examp l es o f i ts omiss ion . Bu t roots of thi s cla ss
1 5 8 Lesson XXXVI I .
I mper ative Optative.
mfi r w
m w m m
3 . mg mam ma. m m m m mas;Pa r t. m a
cf. m or m i-fi
‘
Vocabulary XXXVII.
Verbs 3“ (apla'
va te) drench .
2“ (a pndti) ea t . a n (ba dlmdtz’
,ba dlm
'
z‘
té) bi nd ;a'
fi‘ kr
'
izzi te'
) buy . ca tch ; j oi n ; compose .
w (gr a thndtz) s tri ng toge ther ; in ( bba ti) gl eam ,gla nce .
compos e . 1“ (man) mea sure .a? grkzzi té) take, seize. fim; work , crea te .
fixhold , restra i n , check .
“
a t: (musn c‘
i ti) s tea l , rob .
Hf?! take, rece ive . 2g ; (W ) fi l‘
q s tea l .
fi'
l‘
(j dndti , j an i té) know . 23 (vm
’i té : a l so va r a
’
ya ti ,-te)
Wi t a l l ow , p ermi t . choose .2m ( pdti ) p rotect . fax vi rema i n over .
31 (p uspa’
ti) make i ncrea se o r“
a! (stmatz
’
,strai té ; see a l s o i n
grow . Vocab . XXXV) strew .
12.1 (p undti , p un i té) clea n .
“
a t (sndti) ba the .‘
Lfi (p r i pdti , a ct.,del igh t ; gvp a n remove .
m id .,rejo ice.
Subst W f .,crescen t .
m m ., a gesture o f resp ect Ejfi lf . , work (l i tera ry) .
fulgree ting .
”
335m m .
,trea sure ; trea sury .
“
( a t f . , w i sh . W m . , n .,m omen t ; t ime .
m m rise . i nfi rm n .,gold .
The two ha nds hollowed a nd op ened , a nd ra i sed toforehea d .
Lesson XXXVI I .
m a m .,demon .
m m .,snake .
a? n .,l ea di ng-rope , cord .
“
Hm 278) m . ,s tirr ing- s tick .
i n m .,sa crificia l p ost.
m n .
,forehea d .
l'
élt (c a rd) m ., su i tor , bride
groom .
2‘
ér( (vdr a ) m .,choice
, pr ivi l ege ,fa vor .
fin m a . p r . , a snak e - demonwho supp orts the ea rth .
Exercise XXXVII.
« straw353m: “ a i msire n : I
fagiti e'
fivr,W W
“
a i r it as n
fa’
éfi w amw gm ze ta m a fi a
grad"
(W e $1a u an n
“ team :went 3?!s a rm ) W a i t“ a t
wa g val-
m ag 1333”
( E j fi ta a fi—cr u a n
“
Qat a r Emmimfi a figi awtfifafi fi mm sfi mm a lm m w a t gmd
fi fa fit afi m tm m?! " 8 u a s W germ??
ae im n u n W t fi'
a’
1m mm afi a fist pa r amw w
fi
n’
i fi e‘
fw m u é u m i s ses?mfi t avn
w ere m am an famfi'
rr ue nW pi tte
9 . Allow me to go n ow . 10 . Take these j ewel s which I ha ve
W i th the suffix a?! (sometimes a ) a re ma de a dj ect ives froma dverbs , especia l ly o f t ime ; thus , Ila ‘
a ncien t ’, m 1!
‘ea rly ’,“lama o f the m orrow’
.
1 5 9
m fg-Tf . , heigh t, el eva t ion ; h igh
p osi t ion .
Adj . :
Elma?”
o f to-day .
m ffi‘
ai righ t , j us t.
ne ar (Pa rt o f M tg) k indly dis
p osed .
Adv. :
W before,i n the presen ce
o f (w. gem) .
160 Lesson XXXVI I . XXXVI I I .
given you (p a ss. 11 . Let the grea t poet w eave (M ,
i i i ) a. verse-wrea th o f word-p ea rl s 12. E very-day two
th ieves robbed the k ing’s trea sury . 13. H e who receives (p a r t )gifts from every one i s pollu ted 34. TheCrea tor formedthe world by hi s wil l (gm ) a l one . 15 . Betake thyself (an) fo rsa lva t ion to the gods’ protection . 16. Let k i ngs restra i n the w ickedby puni shments . 17. W e saw Rama ’s da ughter coming o ut
(pres . p a r t.) of th e hou se . 18 . Let the bridegroom gra sp the ma iden
’s ha nd before the fire . 19 . An Arya n mu s t no t ea t a n
other’s l eavi ngs (vi - f“ , p a ss. p a r t , n eut. sing) . 20. One mu stba the da i ly i n u nconfined (p a r t. f r om f i t wa ter. 21. M ay thethree-eyed god, th e grea t- lord whose-forehea d- i s-a dornedwith-the-crescen t
, p rotect yo u .
L esson XXXVIII .
407 . Verbs. Root-cla ss, cont’d .
* Roots endi ng in a n i—vowelo r a n u - vowel (excep t VK ‘
go’
) cha nge these in to ( a; a n d 3 1before vowel-endings i n weak forms , when not guna ted.
408 . Root ‘go ’ (a ct. , but u sed i n m i d . w i th the p rep .=affix:
‘
go over fo r oneself’, i . e . ‘rep ea t, l ea rn , rea d ’; the then becomes a s above) .
I ndi cative .Active . Middl e.
a rts {W W m ww mJ fi-t m a r-
“
tr m ifi r m i’tw
’
a “ fish
A number of roots bel onging to this cla ss a ccen t the ’ rootsyl labl e throughou t , i n weak a s wella s i n s trong form s—excep to f cours e i n the imp erfect.
Lesson XXXVI I I
Pa r ti c iple . Act . : g a i t , f.oa r
-fin M id . : gm .
4I2 . The root 32
‘say
’
,takes the u n ion -vowel J{ a fter th e root
when s trengthened,before the i n i tia l consona n t of a n ending.
* Thus
I nd icat ive .Active . Middle .
1. s ati re alas 33m as?2. a a
’
tfi r m i n a? a in’t? aria
3 . a'
q‘tfi t 33rd gafifl {a safe grab
I mperfect. Act . : w att , war-
4h , W 3“ ; wi a‘ etc . ;
pl. WW . M id . : wgfi , a i m e tc. ; 3rd pl. wi t“ .
I mper a t ive. Act . : “
5 3 , 313 , am ; 3 3 13 etc. ; 3rd pl.
gave-
j . M id . : 3 3 , 3 g e tc .
Opta tive. Act. : W etc. M id 3333
Pa rti ci ple. Act. : W CM id. : gen
‘
i r.
4l3 . Emphati c Pr onoun . The un infleeted pronomina l word
W signifies ‘self’,
‘own self’. I t is oftenes t u sed a s a nomi n
a tive , a l ong wi th words of all p ersons a nd n umbers ; but notseldom i t rep resen ts other ca ses a lso .
Vocabulary XXXVIII.
Verbs I t exp la i n , tea ch ; a nnounce .
(éti) go . fa exp la i n , e tc .
wfix (a dhi té) repea t, rea d .
“
Q (r ati ti) cry, scream .
am go away , dep a r t . fa“ scream .
affixa pproa ch . fix(coté) l i e, sleep .
m eNo f h eavenly bo dies) .‘
Q fix l i e a sl eep o n
3 ?ri se (o f heavenly bodi e s) . bri ng forth,bea r.
‘
Bq a pp roa ch . n bring forth .brzt té) speak , say, s ta te . g (sterili) pra i se .
a Specia l i rregul a riti es i n this verb a r e occa siona lly met with ,such a s art
-T, a i fl'
fg . Some o f the verbs i n ‘
3 a r e a l lowed to bei nfl ected l ike 3T, but forms so m a de a r e ra re .
Lesson XXXVI I I .
Substfar-1 m ”
n . p r . , a name o fBuddha
fi g‘
l‘
f .,tongu e .
£15 13 6 m an ' p r .
m m .,l ogic .
W n .,flower .
w m .,quest ion .
m n .,sense
,u ndersta nd i ng.
W m .
,k i l l ing, m urder.
33mi n: m .
,n . p r .
W m . ,compa n ion ; O
‘
a‘ f.
Exercise XXXVIII.
W e reti re me n ts m e
m edia wagW e me an u at. u
a shamwmma afia n a nW a ste: fi ttest W m a’r
264) {fa us ua lts WW IEIW emi tte r: I a remnant
9 3 avian“
?am am fi g am 3'
sfi wfi fi r n8 n m ammam fa fi fi eai fwfi fm m
’t a fagfi t : n u u w ere
M ase ra tfi’
rfa a‘
afi; u t“
. n e t ting-
t ur f“ silt? sta r t
wfvfi' “
( an n e nm a rsh : tamm it agar?u useesaw:
B RET: “ at feast“
? n Q nw e W I G HT: WE T-[Ti
m i a far W a rez—fi t n so u
11 . The three wive s of D aca ra tha bore fou r son s . 12. Ramaa n d L aksmana ,
fol lowed -by-Si ta , w en t i n to th e forest .
13 . W om en whose-husba nds-a r e-dead m us t sleep six m on ths . o n
th e ground . 14. A witness s ta t ing a nything other- tha n -wha t-wa s
seen -ar-hea rd is to be pun ished (f ut. p a ss. p a r t. ) 15 . Al l . gu i l tdepa rts from o ne-who -ha s-done -pena nce. 16. One m u s t not l ook
11“
m ,f. °WT, lamen ta bl e .
°3flft =1 m aking, doing.
Adv
m below,down , o n
grou nd .
164 Lesson XXXVI I I . XXXIX .
a t (n-i fix) th e ri sing o r th e se tting sun . 17. Why ha st thou come
(a far-i ) to -my-hou se w ith -w i fe a nd with-ch i ldren? 18 .
“ Pra i seVa runa” : thus the gods a ddressed Oun ahcep a who wa s bou nd toth e sa crificia l pos t . 19 . Always speak the tru th . 20. I n a kinglessla nd the ri ch do n o t s leep i n p ea ce
L esson XXXIX.
4I4 . Verbs. Root-cla ss , con t’d. Roots en ding in con son an ts.The endings o f the 2md a nd 3rd s i ng . impf. a ct . a r e genera lly dropped,a nd the resu l ti ng root-fin al trea ted a cco rdi ng
‘
to th e u su alru l es fo rfi n als
f
Cf. 239,242 . But a root end ing in a den ta l mu te some
times drops thi s fina l mu te in s tea d o f the a dded i t i n the second
p erson ; a n d, o n the other ha nd, a root o r s tem ending in a sometimes drop s thi s a i n stead o f th e a dded i t i n the third personin ei ther ca se esta bl ishi ng the ordina ry rela tion o f a a nd Q in
the second a nd third p erson s .4l5 . Roots i n q a n d EL substi tute Q for those letters before
it , Q ; a nd K (which then becomes a n d“
llbefore ‘i-x\
. Thus,
W‘Speak ’
: afa r,“
fifth“
,
‘
qf ffi (only these three form s used) .4I6 . Root Frag
‘know, (a c t . only)
I nd icative . I mp er fect .1 . fem fi rm ween i nfers
“afa r
2. 3m faw n fi rst al'
éa or skin M W e
3 . fi ts: fat-
Tm fare-
fie a ffirmI mvo z
‘é’
lfl fi t. fafa , 3a ;m , fifi fl t . fat-“
rim ; 335m
fa? ) fi fi o Opt“ fi lfl l‘l, e tc '
I n the inflection o f r o o ts with fina l consona n t , o f th i s cla ss a ndthe redup l ica ti ng a nd na sa l cla sses
,euphoni c ru l es fi nd very fr e
qu en t a p p l ica tion . The studen t i s therefore a dvi sed a t th i s p oin tto rea d ca reful ly th e chief ru l es o f euphon i c cha nge i n Wh i tn ey’sGramma r
,139—232 (the two la rger sizes of p ri n t) .
166 Lesson XXXIX .
422 . 1. h ,
‘ru l e ’ i nserts before end i ngs beginn ingwith a a ndq; thus , 2nd si ng. Q
‘
fi ffi . 2. EFL w i sh ’ i s i nwea k forms con tra cted to ER ; thu s, 3rd. pl. Bfl ffi .
423 . 313K,‘r ub ’
,
‘clea n ’ ha s vg'ddln
' i n the s trong forms,
a n d Op tiona l ly a l so i n weak forms when the endings begin with a
vowel . I n the trea tmen t o f tbe root-fin al th is verb follows theroots i n i t. Thu s , ind . 3 rd s ing . m fi ,
da . igm , pl. {Fifi-
fl o r
e
wa rm .
Vocabulary XXXIX.
Verb s u wip e o f .
“
QR (isza) ru l e , own (w. gem ) . ( “L an: ( ap am'
dlméti ) do
W (ca’
sge)+3 11 rela te ; ca l l , name . wrong.
an exp la in . a“ (va'
szi) w i sh .
f“ (dve'
sti, dvz'
sté) ha te . lfi lg (véttz'
; véda ) know, consider.I I ha te extremely. 3 1 +
“
fi fe; smi te .ti 5k (mérst
i) rub, w ip e . fa ki l l .
+ 3 11: wip e away , o ff .
Sub sti )? m .
,lip .
fi t ] m .,decay, destru cti on .
m n . ,eye .
gigm .,conqueror.
3 211“
f .,comp a ssion, p i ty .
m u m . ,destruction .
313 m . ,n . p r . , a name of Giva .
t ra m , sa cred text ; sp el l , cha rm .
I n ] ! m .,wa tch (o f the n igh t) .
3? n .,conduct.
341mm n .,gramma r .
3 113 m . ,n . p r . , a Ri sh i .
£ 351 f . , hesi ta ti on .
‘Q
’é m .
,n . p r .
,a n ame o f i a .
“
EJFI n .
,l ea rni ng.
Hfi m crea ti on .
fQ fiTf . , condi ti on , existence .
Adj . :
3 15 1, f. “HT, blam eworthy, cul
pah le .
Lesson XXXIX .
Exercise XXXIX.
W a m zfi fi m am fl'
éfi t a fi am
fi fe W e s w an t u as u
am m ‘fé efia use?gw f r‘
fi u a: u
gi n—ti W igw am u a u 118?{Fri ma : fi rem
a n? 313 m : " a n ufswfii’
wfi i f'
ili Hi m mfi r. n a lug fwm fifmfi m fl rfi s un
'
s 1 8 i t
m fi fe vi a a t?fm a fifirfifi éam nun aft salsa a ft a'
r
W ilm a?w fi rfi r m fa a wis h “ : w a s]: fag : u a n
fu au: u e u vii a t ri a “ é m afi a " rio uw m afit fi i
fi afzm § 374, 6)“
as?” W m u as n
12 . Hea r the words o f th e l ea rned m a n who exp la i ns (p res.
p a r t.) the -science o f-gramma r. 13 . Know tha t Rama is th eso n
, famous i n the - three-worlds , o f D aca ra tba , a nd the conqueroro f Ravana , l ord- o f-Lanka. 14. Havi ng sipped (Err- Q R) wa terthrice , o n e wip es the l ips twice ; a ccordi ng to others , o n ce .
H15 . Two
wa rri ors smote (wfi i -gfl ) with a rrows the king-o f- the-Afiga s, whoha d mu rdered thei r compa n ions . 16. Kill wi thou t h es i ta ti on even
(Wfil) a tea cher who a pproa ches ( p a st . p a ss. p a r t. ) i n order to ki llyou . 17 . Why dost thou consider (fag) me a Cfi dra , though knowing (W ger .) my l ea rn ing-and- conduct? 18 . Do no t ha te the sonso f-Pandu. 19. The women whose-son s -wer e -dea d
,ha vi ng lam en ted
grea tly, wip ed the tea rs from the i r eyes . 20 . Thou, O Lord , rules t
over bip eds a nd qua drupeds (gem ) .
Refers to fa l s e w i tnes s before a cou rt. An u n tru th wheresma llbea sts (sheep , etc .) a r e concerned , i nvolve s th e des tructiono f five a ncestors ; where ca t tle a re concerned , o f ten , etc .
168 Lesson XL .
L esson XL .
424. Verbs. Root-cla ss, cont’d. m ‘s i t ’ I n die.
we . w e , w e ; w ere e tc . ; m e. any . w e. Imp f .
a rts . W K , m a c . I mv. m i w est, m ete . Par t
W (un iqu e) .425 . The rootm ,
comma nd substi tutes i n th e weakforms w ith consona n t - endings the weakened stem wi ll; thus ,i ndi e. sing . mfg etc . ; da . fm etc. ; but 3rd pl. m .
Imp f . : 3 1mm , 3 1mg , m“; m etc . ; but 3rd pl.
m . Imv. 2nd s i ng .‘mfiq ; 3rd pl: 311115 .
426. The extremely common root ‘be ’ (a ct . l oses i tsvowel m weak forms , excep t when p rotected by the a ugmen t . The
2n d sing. imv. i s Q fix; i n the 2nd s ing . i n dic . o n e a is om i ttedi n the 2nd a nd 3rd s i ng . imp f. i i s i n serted before the ending.Thus
I n di ca t ive. Imper fect.1 . safer era are W a re :
2. arts e m ta sum m a m
3 .
I mp er a tive.
1. w fi r were 3mm Opt . : a rm etc . ; 3rd pl. gm.
2 . ufa g m“
Q 1 Pa r t . : W ef. m i}.
3 . a s m as427. Roots i n g (excep t fag a nd g
‘
g) combi ne g with i t ,u; a n d q i n to 3 , a nd then l engthen p receding 3 1, ”
a ; before
K 1 g becomes q; i n 2nd a nd 3rd s ing. impf. a ct . (where theendings a r e dropp ed) the
‘
g becomes z. Thus , fag ‘ l ick ’
(a ct.
a nd I mp f . a ct . : W , W Wag ; m , m ,
O r o r m (imv. , impf ) .See 4I4. Wfl li is sa i d to be u sed i n 2nd p ers . a l so.
1 70 Lesson XL .
i i i; n—fa (p r a vica'
la ti) m ovesti r
fag (dégdhz‘
) smea r .
gig (do'
gdhi , dugdhé) milk .
HO
TEL f‘
v‘
l shu t (theeyes) .
( i weep .
fa g (lédhz‘
,lidhé) l ick .
3 13 l ick .
Sub st“ W m . ,
enj oymen t.35“ m .
,h a i r .
m n .
,gift
,generos i ty .
3 1611 f . , girl , m a iden .13“ m . , n .
,club , p es tl e .
( fia t n .,blood.
a i r n .
,sa crifice.
Gra i l m n . p r . ,th e sun god
Sa vi ta r the sun .
‘1‘
Exercise XL.
fa r-( a,
vii fafaym a t?an g em;
a ah“. em fim'
g 113 31 an t ri m5 11213 E11 11m m ; 3 711-7 1?at
m urm ur: ufi rw fm r ef 71
'611—1: 11 ac 11
find as? 155 53 grm was !) ( ra i s i ns: mfi xmfi rfimgrrct 11 9 11 fiva rfi m
‘
fig a fw fi rfa gfm ns nwa
afa né-i nw m fixm fang: 13s"
Elq‘
d 11 a 11
After Hg , the i ni tia l {t o f Q " a n d w i s dropped ; thus ,3 mm for W Q TfiR.
rm 8 111“
a pproa ch .
m (pi ste) comma nd, govern .33K brea the .
i f!“
o r“
3 111“ brea the gently,
revive .
f’et be confiden t, tru st (w. gen .
or 10 0 . of p ers . )
Q 1 a gi‘
(u ttistha ti) a ri se.
“
G ila m .,sh ou lder .
Adj‘Efi t ,
f. firm,resolu te .
fi gm, f . °3 fl3 shrewd, sk i l led .
Emmi .0 3 1 , righ t, prop er .
m ,f. “ Q T, ca rel ess .
I n declIl
‘
l'
ai
‘
g ea rly, i n th e morn ing .322114; grea tly, m uch .
Lesson XL . XL I . 1 7 1
re fra i n?fi fsmf‘
a sa'
i fi: M W 11 8 11 gemnarrate magm as Sta r-em n ew 531151 11 14 11 W t
afi rt u 11W aiter fw v fi'
fiqfi fi vu u s 11 Wa s : g age mi fine : a s} a g ufi i fam a
‘
fi mgm z 11 c u
n em esi s : 3:11m“
v1 Gi raffe 11 e 11 (”ream 3
ll. Long m ay th e grea t-king govern the ea rth a ccording tolaw . 12. There wa s a mighty k ing , Na la by name ( inn ) , son o f
Vi ra sen a . 13 . The l ion, sa tia ted -wi th- th e-blood-o f- the - sla i n-gazel le,l icked his m ou th w i th his tongue . 14. Let the householder say tothe gues t : “ where dids t thou s leep d uring the n igh t ”? 15 . Thecowherd milked the cows tw i ce da i ly. 16. The boy ,
bea ten byhis fa ther
,wep t bi tterly 17 . W hose da ughter a r t thou ,
girl? 18 . Know tha t tha t by which thou l ives t , a nd the wholeworld l ives
,is the world-sp i ri t . 19. Ha vi ng a ri sen i n the m orn ing,
reverence the sun (W ) . 20 . I f yo u do n o t p ra i s e Rama , therew i l l be no sa lva tio n for you (use m , in p res.
Lesson XLI .
430 . Verbs. Redupli catin g Cla ss. This cla ss form s th e p resen tstem by pr efix ing a redup l ica tion to the roo t .“
4SI. The ru les govern ing the redup l ica tio n a r e a s fol lows1. The consona n t o f the redup l i ca ti ng syl lable i s i n genera l
th e firs t consona n t of the roo t ; thus , W . But, (a ) a n o n -a s
p i ra te i s substi tu ted for a n a sp i ra te ; a nd (b) a p a la ta l for a gu ttu ra l
Only a sma l l p re portion o f the roots o f th is cla ss reta i n thea ccen t o n the roo t- syl lab l e i n the strong forms . I n the grea t m a
jo r i ty, the a ccen t i s o n the redup l i ca t ion , both i n the s trong form sa nd i n those weak form s whose endings begin with vowels .
1 7 2 Lesson XL I .
o r 3 ; thus , m . em ; fisg , fs fs g ; i t , fins) ; (0) i f th e rootbegin with a s ibi la n t fol lowed by a non-na sa l mu te
,the la tter i s
rep ea ted (with observa nce o f a ), n o t the sib i lant ; thus , E n, N T
2 . A long vow el i s shortened i n the redup l ica ting syl labl e ;a nd "33 i s rep la ced by I ; thus , Q T-{T a nd {i n a bove ; “
aft, fa ifi ;
432 . The p resent-s tem gun a tes the root-vowel i n the strongform s ; thus , fa ifi ,
s trong fa'
fi ; fa il, s trong fa irs.
433 .
‘The verbs o f th is cla ss l ose the 1 from the endings o fthe 3rd pl. i n the a ctive a s wella s i n the m iddl e ; a nd i n the 3d 151.impf. a ct. a lways tak e 3 K , b efore which a fina l ra dical vowel h a s
swim ; thus , s temm434. Roo t 32, bea r, ca rry
’. F o r 2nd a nd 3rd s i ng. imp f. a ct. ,
of. l22, 4I4.
I ndi cative.
1 .
a fi ufii3-fa ufii
m utant s
2 . 3 1fmrg s trangest s tage W m“
s temli a is e :
I mp er a tive.L fmm fin faun a fem
-( m fan? fi rm s? fi lm s?
fe ign finge r fHHW TR
tangent fawn teams; fsm am.Opt. a et . :
“
Fa tima e tc. ; m i d. : farm etc.Pa r t. a et. : q fi lHFfi ; m i d. : tea m .
435 . The roots lg‘
l‘
,
‘give ’, a nd 1111 ,‘
p u t’, lose their ra di
calvowel i a the weak forms,l ea ving the weak stems {g a nd {21 .
firm fa?
fim fa fags
I mper f ect .
farm’
s
1 74 Lesson XL I .
fi i ffi‘
a nd fi g} before consona nt- endi ngs , fi rq a nd fi rg beforevowel- endi ngs ; thu s , 3rd p erson s indi e . fi nfifi
‘
, fi rfl‘fi ‘
, fim’
fi .
439 . 3“ ‘
pour, sa crifice ’ (a c t . a nd“
m akes the 2nd sing .
imv. ss fi i ; 3rd p ersons imp f W m 3 1W , W .
440 . 1 .
‘
afi ,
‘fea r ’ m ay shorten i ts vowel i n weak forms ;thus
, fami ne o r fafi rm . few o r fi finmt . 2 . f r,‘be
a shamed ’ cha nges i ts weak stem fa? to fa ir
“ beforevowel - endings ; thu s, i ndie . 3rd p ersons fi i fa , fi fi
’taq, fa
Vocabulary XLI.
i n pu t on ; (mid) take , receive .131 (dadali , da tte
’
) give. +‘
Fc1 a rra nge,orda i n .
I ! en trus t . HQ un i te, pu t together ; lay o n .
1211 (dadha ti , dhu tte’
) pu t, p la ce . 13 1 (j dha ti) qu i t, aba n do n , n eglect.“Fi fi ! close , shu t. i f} (j ihre
'
tz) be a shamed .
Sub st formed the ablu tion custom a ry
313131 n . ,sa fety ; feel ing of sa fety. a t the en d of rel igiou s pup i lage.
wilt m .,demon . Adj
ens-
f a f. , obla t ion . as ,f. as, d ivi n e .
31 n m .,n . p r . raffl e ; f. “ a ,
excell en t,rema rk
1611?m .
,gazell e . a b le.
fa? n ., possessi on s , wea l th . Adv. :
i s m ., n . ,
rest,rema i nder . am a t even ing.
m m . , o n e who h a s p er
Exercise XLl.
fi fi ufi efi sfi fim firm fe n so u
Lesson XL I . XL I I .
11131 m a in"
sen 212111 1111111 1311: 1
a s fafii m h m vfi“
vim fiesta 11 as 11
21: 115 113 1211 9 121 Hara re m a dam a fawfi r e
a 31111 1 1 fafi fa 11 C1 11 em mafiwmfi was a rmwra 11 a 11 a 3 a usi fan s
-
1? nsfii W a nd (sati re 11 a 11
ii i Em m a sm a m mfafi fim 11 3 11w w fsmsn mfi
2611 31113 111331 fa rm and 1113111 W 11 t1 11 fi 1s1i a1s“
fi i (vo c s ins f i i i fi i wra th fi i fi i swi m "£11 11311 611 111
N W vrri 115 1) 11 1 11?‘
v1 W e 11 s 11 a s sum-
gm m i
ftrcn ue fiwqfifi ea rn e as fam e w e 11 11 113311
211111 (pa rts a ce . pk) $31 s fim fag wi th : m am 11 c 11
m fw fi i 1111111gnaw-611 gre w 11 so 11
1 1 . Let the Adhva ryus p ou r the sa crificia l offerings i n to thefire . 12. The seers orda in forty sa craments i n th e law-books
(agfa ) . 13 . D a ea r a tha en trus ted his son s to Va sistha a s s chol a rs .14. Meeti ng a woma n in th e fores t, one should say to h er : “ S ister
,
be n o t a fra id 15 . Let a Snataka ca rry (wea r) a ga rla nd , a nd a n
umbrel la -a nd-shoes . 16. One who takes p a r t.) roots -fru i ts-or -gra i nfrom a s tra nge -fi eld, i s to be pun ished . 17. Let th e two doorkeep ersclose the door. 18 . Do no t n egl ect th e tea cher’s comm a nd . 19. Theroya l - sage
,who wore mu ch j ewelry
,shon e (“Fa-HT) with grea t
bri ll ia ncy, l ike th e sun . 20. The schola rs who -have- no t- l ea rnedtheir - lesson s a re a shamed before thei r tea cher (a ce . or
L esson XLII.
44I. Ve rbs. N a sal cla ss . All roots o f th i s cla ss end i n co n
sona nts . As cla ss-sign they i nsert a n a sa l before the fina l con
W i th th e su ffix W ,f. a r e formed adj ectives s ign i fyi ng
‘m a de o r composed o r consi sti ng o f ’. I n the second l i n e,
‘bc a r
th e name ’ m erely,i . e . a r e not i n rea l i ty such .
1 76 Lesson XLI I .
sonan t , u nl ess o n e b e there a l rea dy (a s i n Hi ) ; th i s n a sa l i sa da p ted to the consona n t , excep t in the strong forms , where i t i sexpa nded to th e syl la bl e
‘
v'
I [m], whi ch bea rs the a ccen t.442 . The combina ti o n o f the fina l radi ca l consona nts wi th
those o f the persona l endings i s i n a ccordance wi th the rul es al
ready given fo r the root a nd redup l ica ti ng cla sses .443 . Thus
,133k
‘j o i n ’; s trong stem weak g i ’
I ndi cative.A ctive . Middl e.
as“
steam"
11111 11 as
Imp e rfect.
Imp e ra tive.
W 311 531
$135 313
WOpt. a ct. : m etc . ; m i d. : ga
g“! etc .
Pa r t. a ct. : ga a \1f. ga Ffi ; m i d. : W .
444. Root W‘obs truct ’; s trong stem ( ant , weak
I n di cative.Active . Middl e.
w i fe 11“ “ a 113 131“
w e v?
m fg fem a% W’
s
I nstead o f gqam , W ,a nd the l ike , i t i s a l lowed
(a nd more u sua l) to wri te M ,W et a l soW , fl ew ,
in stea d of ( 1 3 K etc. ; i n ea ch ca s e omi tti ng the consona n t imm edia tely fol lowing the na sa l .
l78 Lesson XLI I .
SubstW T f . , condi ti on , sta te .
m f . , dawn ; a l so p ersonifiedU sa s, the Dawn .
m m m .,thorn ; enemy .
“
m g m bite,mou thful .
3 33 m rela tive.
Exercise XLII.
W va n?gfi i w fi t a s 1s 1
Ra m a‘
s-11 tes ts =1 th
is ? 11 as 11
amt £1m W fi fis {1111211111 1
111311 am m i W m a 11 as 11
fi na fs aa$1 fi 1fl fi a a éaam 1
m fi fi s fi'
fia fi m’
fi m a m n 38 11
3 711 W 711 $1111”
was”
. ma fia? feas ts 11611111 111
farm 11 s 11 Sfiaw fi alias w as ( 13 1 151n 3113 111
FETTW W 11 Q 1lw am a fia 3fi 1‘
mfl a’
fifi rei'
i r fi s’t
mafi a 11 3 11“
( i f M m : 3
513 : WWWs m fi W E fi 11 8 11 mafi a a raw a m
as simfi am ia fifsa fii ( a mfi fi vfi ajfla u s 11 th
W m ffi fi ug“
ana emi a 3 13111311 a na turism .
fi r aya : 8 1111 11 15 11 a s? nfaafi r fa fa fi ifa a fa m isfi t
smar t? 11ms 1913 13 1111213 fag : 11 so 11
1 1. After J aya sinha had l ong besi eged G ir in aga ra , he des troyed
The a n teceden t o f th i s rel a ti ve i s th e subj ect of ElamTra nsla te a s though da t i ve .
W n . , wr i t i ng, Copyi ng.
fsna i vm . , the H imalaya Mts .
“
i n? su i tabl e fo r K sa tr iya s.
Ila domest i c.
Hfm ,f. 0m ,
u nfa vora ble .C\
“
g“,f. WT, sp l endi d , bea utiful ,
excel len t.
Lesson XLI I'
I .
(11a ) i t a t la s t . 12 . An a scetic sha l l ea t only 240 mou thf uls i n a
month 13 .
“ Kindl e th e fi r e ;'
ou t bra nches fo r firewood
(M ) ; milk the cows ; grind g ra i n ” : thus sa id o n e priestto a nother ea rly i n th e morning. 14. The tea cher en trus ted (fa -
gal)
the s chola rs w i th ' th e copyi ng o f th e books (cp d , 15 . Themounta i n - r a nge H im a va n t checks the cours e o f the cl oudsw i th i ts exce edingly-high peaks . 16. The doers -o f -ri gh t ( 03m)a r e ha ppy i n Heaven , enj oyi ng th e fru i ts-o f- that
’
r -works . 17 . Ak i ng who h a s conquered a foreign rea lm mus t n ot extermina t ethe roya l- family . 18. Arya n s mu st k i ndle the domesti c-fi re a t th etim e -o f- the -w edding . 19. W om en p ounded the r i ce w i th p es tl es .
Lesson XLIII.
447 . Verbs. Per fect-System . I n the la ter la nguage th e p erfectsystem comp r i ses only a n i nd ica t ive m ode a n d a p a rticip l e, ea chboth a ctive a nd middl e . I ts forma t io n is e ssen tia l ly a l ike i n all
verbs ; i ts cha ra cteri sti cs a r e : l. r eduplica tio n ; 2 . di s tinctio n o f s tronga nd weak forms ; 3 . endi ngs i n some respects p ecu l ia r ; 4. the fr equen t u se o f the u nion -vowel
448 . Redupli cati on . 1. I ni tia l consona n ts a r e redup l ica ted a c
cordi ng to the rul es given in Less . XLI for th e redup l ica ted p r es ent- stem .
2. Media l a nd fina l vow el s, short a n d l ong, a re represen ted byth e correspond ing short vowel , diphthongs by thei r s econd element ;but
”
a (o r Q I ) i s represen ted a lways by i t, n ever by a s i n theredup l ica ted presen t -s tem . Thus , M , W ; Q T, HQ I ;m ,
fafi lfl sfia f sfia g m 611114 1 3 31
3 . I n i tia l El, fol lowed by a s ingl e consona n t, becomes WT
(through Gall-fin) ; thus , mg , m g .
4. I n itia l a nd ‘3 fol low the sam e a na l ogy ; but i n th e s trong
1 80 Lesson XLI I I .
forms, where the root-vowel i s guna ted, the redup l ica ti ng vowel i s
p rotected from combina tio n by the i nserti on o f a o r a thu s ,“
( I t s trong p erfect s tem m (i -y- as) weak i n (i . e . 1'
“ 1
s tr ong (u-v -oc), weak W (u -u c) .
5 . Roots b eginning w i th vowel s l ong by na tu re o r posi tion don o t i n genera l mak e the ordina ry p erfect- system ,
bu t use i ns teada p eriphra stic forma t ion (see bel ow) . But m i s a n excep tion ,m ak i ng the cons ta n t p erfect-stem 3 111 ; a nd a few roots wi th i ni tia l3 ] o r EH show the a nom a l ou s redup l ica ti on m i n the p er fe ctfi.e
449. Str ong an d weak form s. I n th e three persons s i ng. a ct:
the root - syl la bl e i s a ccented , a nd exhibi ts u sua l ly a stronger form .
As rega rds the s trengthen ing1 . I n roots w i th media l vowel s long by n a tu re o r position ,
a nd i n those wi th i n i tia l 3B the d i ff erence o f s trong a nd wea k form s
does n o t a ppea r , excep t i n a ccented texts .2. Media l a nd i n i tia l vowel s a re gu na ted , i f p ossibl e, i n th e
s trong forms ; thu s , fi g , w . W , s . fafig ; {no w .
“
i i , 3 .
W ; W 1 w . w , s. a ah-er 448
,
3 . Media l 3 1 before a s ingl e fina l con sona n t i s vr i ddh i ed i n th e3rd p ers . , a nd Op tiona l ly i n th e lst ; thu s , from W ,
i n lst s ing.ei ther one ]; or worst, i n 2nd qui p, i n 3rd m .
4 . A fina l voweltakes ei ther guzza o r amid/11° i n the lst p erson ,
guzza i n the 2nd, vrddbi i n the 3 rd ; thus , from fl ,i n lst fi t?o r
F615 ,2nd ras, sra fi fi
45 0 . The roo t “
cli m akes, i rregula rly, th e perfect-stem a1i, a nd
a dds Ha
before a vowel-ending .
4SI. Some roots,i nstea d of strengthening the vowel i n th e
The gramma ria ns prescribe (doubtless fa l sely) th i s r eduplica t i on for allverbs begin n ing w i th w o r fl fol lowed by m ore thanone conson a nt.
1 82 Lesson XL I I I .
da . 1. fa fafié, 2. W .3 . faw
’ei ; p1 2. fa ra fi .
3 . fa fafic.
2. an} : Act. : Sing. 1 . fame: o r fi reman a f ar-mm o r fa éfiw,
3 . fa afira ; da . 1 . fa fa fa a . 2 WEIR ; pl 1 . fa
45 6. I I . Roots i n 3 o r 3 1“ follow th e modelo f th e la st-mentio ned .
Thus, g : Act. : S ing . 1 . fing er o r 32 13 ,
2. gg‘m (n o t g
'
gfsm
see § 45 3 , du . L iliga , 2 . ggagq, 3 . fl aw“
act
Act. : da . gg fa a‘ etc .
45 7 . i s i rregu la r i n the p erfect . (Cf.Active. Middl e .
3 a ma s nags; W E 3 315 ! 3 1 3 13
45 8 . I I I . Roots m ag . (se c § 45 3 ,
1 stars am s a
ga my 1131 sagas a s“?s a ga s at
a i r-
«11a s a ga E1131 11111111
So a l so ii , (2, 23‘choose ’. 2. The other roots i n a m ake the
first p erson s thu s : from 3 , m o r W I , 36 13 , afiaa ;
45 9. I f the fina l “
113 be preceded by more tha n o n e conson a n t,the forma tio n i s a s foll ows : fig, 1 . W o r
“
am , 2. Bari ,
3 . m ; du . emf-
( a , W ar, e tc. th e as being guna ted .
460 . IV. Roots i n WT (i n cl udi ng those wri tten by the n a tiveswi th ‘
Q‘
o r i o r ah ). These tak e i f) i n lst a nd 3 rd si ng . a ct. ; a nd
the “
i n i s l ost before vowel-endi ngs a nd E. 1 . 1m
1 . an’
i af fix
-
61 afim a? arm M2. afim avatar as afl ffl
“
0 113 afim
avast asa as aw? afar?2. 351 , a nd sim i la r roots , mak e the ir weak forms from the
Lesson XLI I I . l83
s imp l er root-form s tfi‘
, 3" etc. ; a nd 3 1 m akes i ts s trong form s a ls o
from 3 ; thu s , $33 o r 3 31 3 etc .
B. Roots in finalconsonants.
46l. I . W i th m edi alvowel capable o f guzza .
1 . flag : Act : Si ng . l. fafi‘
gfl . fafiq , 3 . fm ; du . fi f t i
fg‘
a etc . pl. fafiq fl e tc. M id. : fa fi i g etc. 2. So from FigFir-fig e tc . 3 . from g a p: 1 . 33
13, 2. « fi re; or m ;
da . g‘
gfila e tc .462 . I I . W i th i n i t ial vowel capable o f guna .
1 . ( a : S ing . 1 . ( i ts ,2. ( aims , 3 . ( a s ; du . 1. {fa
-dr,
2. i nsist , 3 . {crazy pl. 1 . i f“ , 2. i s ,3 . {HQ 2. agar
‘
B‘
éfia etc. 3 . The roo t ‘
go’
, a l so fol low s th i s r u le, form ing
{W etc . , 3rd . pl. m . 4. W makes (see § 448 ,5 ) W E
‘
,
463 . I I I . Wi th i n i ti al i t.
w , 3 e e tc . ; alg , m e tc. But m (origi na l ly afa r)
m akes m ain etc. 448,
464 . I V . Wi th med ialat.
1. am : Act . : s ing . o r aren a , 2. arm-“first, 3 .
11mm ;
du . amfiqa etc . M i d. : awai t e tc .Thu s allsuch roots beginn ing with more tha n o ne consona n t,
o r w i th a n a sp i ra te, a gu ttura l m u te,o r g.
465 . 2. Roots i n ge nera l ha vi ng media l "
5 ! before a s i ngl efina l consona n t
,a nd begi n n ing a lso wi th a si ngl e consona n t which
i s r epea ted uncha nged i n th e redupl ica tion i . e . n o t a n a sp i ra te,a gu ttura l , or g con tra ct w i th the redup l i ca tion i n to o n e syl la ble ,w i th ”
Q a s i ts vowel , i n the weak forms ; a nd thi s is a l l owed a l soThus
, Ufl .i n 2nd s ing . a ct. when the u n ion -vowel i s taken .8 . 12m? a nd m , w . 3?
Severa l roots no t ha vi ng the form here defined a r e sa id tou ndergo th e same contra ction
,m ost of them opt iona l ly.
184 Lesson XLI I I .
W . htaw 33 3Kin fi rst?
‘
fia i’ix fi ffl i a
466 . 3 . Certa i n roots begin n ing with at c a (a lso o n e wi th a ya )
a nd endi ng i n o n e consona n t, redup l ica te wi th the sy llabl e ”
3 (theo n e root j us t mentioned , wi th f ), a nd a bbrevia te the a (a ) of theroo t to B i n w eak forms . They a re trea ted l ike roots w i th
i ni tia l 3 § 463) bu t reta in th e fu ll root form in th e strong
p ersons . These roots a r e 3 1 , fi g , HQ , 3 1 11, W‘dwel l ’, a n d
“
erg ; a l so Th us , fl : Act . s ing . 1 . m o r W , 2.
“
a a
‘
éf-wo r B affi n 3 . W 3 ; du . 3 513 ? (u -uc - i -va ) etc . M id . Bifi‘ etc.
f lat : Act . s ing . 1 . {2131 o r 2 . {W o r (m , 3 . ( ma ;
da . {F313 etc . M id . {is} etc .
467 . 4. Severa l roots which have m edia l 3 between singl econsona nts, bu t ca nno t fol low the ru l e o f 465
,drop o ut the a t
from the weak forms . These roots a r e , i n the cl a ssica l l a nguage,
m , m , m , g?“ a nd a l so 3131 , which might b e exp ected tofol low § 465 . They form the weak stems fi g , Elm , W e mg ;
a n d Elfi\
. Thus, am o r HQ W etc.
, a fg a etc. 3 31 m akes i tsstrong stem m a nd El“ .
468 . 5 . The roots 3 1g , @1 ,a nd o n e o r two oth ers
,r edupli
ca te from the semivowel,a nd contra ct a a n d a to 1 a n d
”
B i nweak forms . Thu s
,strong gm o r W , weak
469. 1 . The roo t ‘ag‘
,
‘sp ea k ’, is found only i n thi s tense,a nd only in the fol lowing forms : s ing. 2. W , 3 . m g ; du . 2 .
"3"
3 93m 3 . mm ; pl. 3 . m . These forms ha ve only the va lu eo f the presen t . —2. The root lfi g ,
‘know makes a p erfect w i thoutredup l ica tion , but o therwi se regu la r, which ha s only p resen t-va lue ;see § 4l7 . 2f
‘
élg ,
‘find ’, forms the regula r ”
raga.
470 . The roots fa , fa il, fin, a nd fg ,form a s p erfect- stem s
fa tes, fa rm . fa fi r, a n d fa te .
186 Lesson XLI I I . XLIV.
o f 15 . Thus , from W 3 , p f. am tnq o r am iqm t ;
from i n ,
474. F o r ce o f th e Per fect . I n cla ss ica l Sa nskri t the perfectcoi ncides i n mea n ing wi th the imp erfect , a s a tense o f na rra tion ,bu t is l es s often met w i th .
L esso n XLIV.
475 . Ver bs. F u tur e-System (and Condi t ion al) . The verb h astwo futures : I . The s imp l e , or s- fu ture , which i s by fa r th e older,a nd m uch m ore common, tha n the other ; a nd I I . th e p eriphra sti cfuture .
476 . I . Simple F utur e. Thi s ten se con ta i n s a n i ndica tive m odea nd a p a rticip l e, a ctive a nd m iddl e. I t m ay be m a de from all
verbs . The tense-sign i s th e syl la bl e Q ,added to the root ei ther
d i r ectly, o r by th e u ni on-vow e l (i n the la tter ca se becomingm ) .
The roo t ha s th e gu ild - strengthen i ng when possibl e ; a nd some rootswi th m edia l “
a; guna te w i th i nstea d o f g ig . The inflection i s
preci sely l ike tha t of the p resen t i ndica t ive o f a verb of thea -conjuga ti on ; thu s , from ufawfi r, °af
477 . W hen is n o t taken,final ra dica l consona n ts su ff er the
sam e cha nges before “
Q : a s before a i n the i nflection of th e roo tcla ss o r redup l ica ti ng o r n a sa l cla ss . Thu s
,from gg, M ;
Hi t. wh a rf flag , W e ; w e “ fi t; “ ( a fifl ffl ; fifi bfifa rfii ; fm ,W i
tt-l; a . g a ffe
-l. The roo t HQ dwell ’,m akes
478 . 1. Most roots ending i n vow el s rej ect th us, {1
‘
Erra ; m , merra s fa . 3 1min ; 3
55. W e . 2. Bu t all roots i n2 3; take thu s
, iii . ELM “; g, W fi f ; a nd a l so the roots I f}(afi mrfa) a n d amt
—slam) 3 . a s makesm in.
Lesson XLIV 18 7
479. I n genera l , the verbs which take i n the i nfin i tive a nd
p eriphra sti c fu ture (see b el ow) , tak e i t a lso i n th is tense . But the
a ccordance i s fa r from comp l e te ; a n d these pa rts shou ld be lea rned ,a s a ma tte r o f usage, for a ny given verb .
480 . S tems o f ca usa tive i nflection,a nd denomi na t ives i n ER] ,
m ake thei r fu ture- s tem s i n “
film ; thus , fig , WW W ?
Pa r ti ci p le . The p a r ticip l es , a c t. a nd m id. ,a re ma de from
the fu tu re-s tem precisely a s from the p resen t- s tem ; thus , 3T, 31(f' ow ), E g a n ; 3 , a rm , fi tmm Cf' 260)
262 .
482 . Condi ti on al. A tense ca l l ed the condi t ion a l (i ndie . only)i s ma de from the s tem of the s imp l e fu ture p reci sely a s th e im
p erfect i s made from the p res en t- s tem ,a nd s im ila rly inflected .
Thu s , W Q R, m ; fl qrfi , fi fi fi I t i s of extremelyra re occurrence .
483 . I I . Per i ph ra st i c F utur e . Thi s tense, which i s a l l owed tobe m a de from allverbs
,con ta i n s a singl e i n dica tive tense, a ctive ,“
I t i s formed by the n omen aigen tis i n 31, ha vi ng th e va lu e o f a fu turea ctive pa rticip l e, to the nom . s ing. o f which (m ) a r e a dded
,i n th e
lst a nd 2nd p erson s o f all numbers , the corresp ondi ng i nflectedforms o f th e pres . o f 13m
‘be ’. I n th e 3 rd p erson s the n omen
agen tia i s used a lone,i n the proper number , w i thou t the a uxil ia ry .
484 . The roo t h a s i n mos t ca se s the same form before thesuffix g wh ich i t takes befo re the an o f the infin i tive . Thus
,
mg ; “fl it ;”
35. 6 5 ; W , m g48 5 . The inflecti on i s then a s fol low s
The Hi ndus a l so prescribe a middl e forma t io n ; i t ha s, howe ver
, p ra ctica l ly n o exis tence .
188 Lesson XLIV.
Aorist-System.
486. The a oris t compri s es three qu i te d is ti nct forma ti on s , ea chwith certa i n sub-va rieti es ; bu t all a re bound toge ther i n to o n e
comp l ex sys tem by certa i n corresp ondences o f form a nd mea ni ng .
I n cla ss ica l Sa nsk ri t a oris ts a re compa ra t ively ra re. Their va luei s qu i te tha t of impf. or p f. a s ten ses o f narra ti on . But they a r e
used a l so (though n o t n ea rly so often a s the p rohi b i tive o p t. ) wi ththe p a rticl e m ,
i n p rohibi t i on s , the a ugmen t being then omi tted ;thus , I“ QT:
‘do not give m fi ffi: ‘do n o t fea r ’. W i th th is excep tio n the a oris t a lways ha s th e a ugmen t i n cla ss ica l Sa nsk ri t.The tense comprises, i n the la ter la ngua ge, only a n i ndica tive m ode .
‘
The m a i n va rieti e s of a ori s t a r e three : I . Simp l e Aoris t ; I I . Redu
p l ica ted Aoris t ; I I I . S ibila n t Aorist.487 . I . Simple a or i st . (1) Root a or i st . This a oris t i s precisely
l ike a n i mp erfect o f th e roo t-cla ss . I t i s l imi ted to the a ct ive voiceo f a few roots i n WT, a nd o f I i E . g .
lg‘
l‘
bi1 W W ' fi lm W 3 1313 3 13531
2 a ga r w as wa s m it t slam was
0
Like at : W . m ;”
en . W W ; m ; "T‘
3 0 3 3 "
488 . (2) The a -aor i st . This i s l ike a n i mp erfect o f th e a -cla ss ,a ctive a nd middl e . Thu s
,fromm , lst p ersons safe“ ,
‘Hfi fi flm
m ; Wfi fi ) m g a W m fs I n genera l the root
The p r ecat ive i s strictly a p ecu l ia r a o r . op ta t ive ; but i t i s sora re tha t i ts forma tion u sed no t be expla i ned here .
190 Lesson XLIV. XLV.
mfi rs ; du . 1 . otasérra 2.o fw m . 3 .
oam ; pl 1.ofawfis,
2.”rm , 3 .
°femfi This is the o nly'
a o r ist o f which forms a r ema de i n the seconda ry a nd denomina t ive conj uga tion s (but forca u sa tives a nd denom i na t ives i n W . cf.
493 . (6) The sis-ao ri st i s a ctive only
,the corresp ondi ng middle
being of the s- form . An exampl e w i l l suffix here . 111 : s i ng. 1 . w
m fg“ etc .,qu i te l ik e th e i nflectio n o f the is-a oris t .
494. (7) The sa -aor i st. m : Act. s i ng. 1 .
“
mfg“ , 2.Pfi q,
3 . a n d so o n , l ike a n i mpf. o f the a - conj uga tio n . But i n them id . the gramma ria ns p rescribe th e 1st. s i ng.m ,
a nd 2nd a nd
3rd du .
“
am a nd cm .
495 . Aor i st Pa ssive. G enera l ly the middle forms o f a orists 4,
5 , o r 7, a re u sed a l so fo r th e p a ss ive . Roots which do no t ordina r ily take a orists of th ese forms , m ay make them l ike 4 or 5 espec ially fo r the pa ss ive .
496 . But a 3rd pers . s i ng., o f p ecu l ia r forma ti on , ha s become
a recognized p a rt o f the p a ss ive conjuga ti on . I t i s formed by a dd
i ng to th e root,wh ich takes a l so the a ugm en t
,a nd i s u sua l ly
s trengthened , i n some ca ses by guzza , i n o th ers by vrddhi . Afterfina l an i s a dded 11 . Thu s
, fi r. starts ; as, m o re ; 35, are n’
t ;
a i r. wants ; bu t ea . alarm g e t. wzfi‘
i ; at, watts .
L esson XLV.
Derivative or Secondary Conjugations.497 . Seconda ry conj uga tions a re those i n which a whol e
system o f forms,more o r less comp l e te, i s ma de from a deriva t ive
conj uga tion -stem,th is wh ole sys tem being u sua l ly conn ected w i th
a certa i n defin i te modifica tion of th e origina l radica l s ense. Theseconjuga tions a r e : I . Pa ssive . I I . I n tens ive . I I I . Desidera tive .
IV. Cau sa t ive . V. Denomina tive .
Lesson XLV . 19 I
498 . I . Pa ssive. The presen t- sys tem o f th e pa ss ive ha s beendescribed ; a s a l so the pecu l ia r 3 rd p ers . s ing. u sed a s a o r . p a ss ,
th e p a s t p a ss . p a rticip l e i n a o r‘
a‘
,a nd the fu t. p a ss . pa rti cip l e s
o r gerund ives . I n all other p a rts o f the verb m iddl e forms a re
u sed,i f n ecessa ry , w i th p a ss ive m ea n ing.499 . I I . I n ten si ve . The intens ive conj uga t io n sign ifie s th e
i n tensifica tio n o r th e rep eti tio n o f th e a ctio n exp ressed by th e
p rima ry conjuga tio n o f a root . F orm s ou tside th e presen t-sys tema r e too ra re to n eed no ti ce here ; i ndeed , even w i thin tha t systemthey a r e by n o mea ns common i n the la ter la nguage . I n tens ivesfa l l i n to two cla sses .
5 00 . 1 . The verbs o f the firs t cl a s s (only a c t.) form thei r intens ive-stem by redup l ica t ion , a nd the redup l ica ti ng syl la bl e isstrengthened. a . Radica l i n a n d
“
ea a r e redupl ica ted w i th i s“,
a nd i with Q , 3 a n d 3?w i th W} ; thu s , W , w , fi at}, “h i .
6 . Som etimes the redup l i ca ting syl labl e ha s a finalconsona nt , takenfrom the end o f the root ; thu s , fi x, a ria . 0 . Som etimes theredup l ica ti on i s d i ssyl la bi c , a n i -vow el being inserted a fter th efinal con sona n t o f the redup l i ca ti ng syl la bl e ; thus , W '
The m ode l o f i nflection i s the p resen t- system o f th e redup l i ca ti ngcla ss, but devi a tions a r e n o t ra re ; i n p a rti cu la r, a n J
{ is sometimesi nser ted between s tem a nd endi ng.
5 0l. 2. F rom the in tens ive - stem a s jus t described m ay be formeda nother
,form a l ly iden tica l w i th a p a ssive- stem by th e su ffix 37°
I t takes m iddl e i nflection , bu t ha s n o p a ssive va lu e,being u sed
p recisely a s i s th e i n tens ive j us t m en ti oned . Thu s , 5 31 ,‘
fl‘
émfi .
5 02 . A few i n tens ives ha vi ng los t thei r va lue a s su ch,com e
to be used a s p resents , a nd a re trea ted by th e n a t ive gramma ria nsa s simp l e roots . Thus 31 13 ,
rea l ly i n ten s ive o f 1!‘wake ’
,i s
a ssigned to the root-cl a ss : p res . m i rfi i etc . , da . aw etc . ;imp f. 1 . 1m m , 2 . wa n ts , 3 . m ; da . w ga e tc So
192 Lesson XLV.
a lso ( frat , i n tens . o f a“ ‘
r un’
,u sed a s a p resen t w i th th e sense
‘be p oor ’. fi ri l ‘wa sh ’,
a nd som e others , u se th e i n tensive
p resen t - sys tem i n the same way ,a nd a re a ssign ed to th e r e
dup l i ca ting cl a s s ; thu s , 3rd si ng. fi'
fi ffi , 3rd pl. W E .
I n ten sive form s ou tside the p res en t-system a r e very ra re .5 03 . I I I . D esi de ra tive . By this conjuga tion i s denoted a desi re
for the a ction o r condi tion denoted by th e simp l e root ; thus ,fi rmfi rr ‘I drink ’
, desid . fi tnm fi ‘I w i sh to drink ’.5 04. To form the desidera tive- s tem the roo t is redup l ica ted,
a nd . a dds a ,sometimes “ C
The consona n t o f th e redup l ica tio ni s determined by the u sua l ru l es ; the vowel o f redupl i ca t ion i si f the roo t ha s a n a -vow el , a n i -vow el
, o r a ,a n d
‘
3 i f th e roo tha s a n u vowel Thus
, a t , fi mufi ; fa, fi vfi afi ; are:W e ;
at, fi afl éfi ; fi g fi fi refi ; fi st fi fe-
na
5 05 . A number o f roots form a n a bbrevia ted desidera t ives tem ; thus , m , W E ; QT, fgmfi .
5 06 . The conj uga tio n i n the p resen t- system i s l ike tha t o f
o ther a -s tems . Ou tside o f tha t desidera tive forms a r e qu i te i nfrequ en t. The p erfect i s th e p eriphra stic. The a oris t i s o f th ef.;
-form ; thu s , m ,m ; Elf‘
afi-‘
ffi g . The fu tures a r e m a dewith th e a uxilia ry vowel thu s
, W fi , i fiq g . Theverba l n ouns a re m ade wi th i n all forms where tha t vowel isever taken . A pa ss ive m ay be ma de ; thus, fi tqfi ‘ i t i s desi redto be obta i ned ’; pa rt fiftqa‘
.
5 07 . IV. Cau sat ive. l. The present- system o f the ca usa tiveh a s been trea ted o f a l rea dy . 2 . The p erfect i s the p eriphra stic,the deriva tive n oun i n WT being formed from the cau sa tive-stem ;thus, W am . 3 . The a ori st i s th e redup l i ca ted, m a de i ngenera l d i rectly from the root, a nd form a l ly unconnected wi th theca u sa tive- s tem ; thus , E3, WW ’m an . I n a few i nsta nces
,
where the root ha s a ssumed a p ecul ia r form before the cau sa tivesign
,the redup l i ca ted a or i s t i s m ade from th is form ,
not from the
1 94 I . Sa nskri t-Engl i sh G lossa ry .
Glossary to the Exercises.
F o r the a lpha beti c order o f Sa nskri t words se e p .
l. Sanskrit-English.
Adj ectives i n -a form thei r feminin e i n -d,u nl ess otherw i se sta ted .
a ksa m . , d ie , d i ce . a dba s a dv.,bel ow ,
down .
a ksa n (a ksi z275 ) n .
,eye . a dlza std t a dv.
,below ; p rep .
, w .
aym’
m ., fire ; a s n . p r .
,Agni
,th e ge n .
, u ndernea th .
g0 d Of fire . a dln'
, adv.,over, a bove, o n .
agm'
hotrz’
n m .,a ki nd of p rie s t. a dhika a .
,a ddi ti ona l ; superior .
agr a n .
,front ; ti p , en d. a dlzi ta pa rt . o f a dhi - i .
a h’
ya n ., l imb ; body. a dhun a adv. ,
now .
a figz‘
r a s (25 3) m .
,certa i n mythi ca l a dhva ryu m . , p ri es t who reci tes
ch a ra cters . th e Ya j urveda .
a fij a h’
m ., a gesture (Vo c . 1/a n 429) brea the ;
m m a .,sma l l ; a s n .
, a tom . pm brea the ; l ive .a ta s a dv. , hence . a n
, before cons . a , nega tive p refix .
a tz’
a dv . , a cross, p a s t ; i n cpds, a n aduh (278) m . ,
o x .
to excess . a n a n ta r am adv.,a fte r , imm edia tely
a ti thi m . , gues t . a fterwa rd ; a s p rep . , w . abl. ,
a tr a a dv. ,here
,hi ther . right a fter.
a tba a dv. ,then ; thereupon . a n a r tba m . ,
misfortu ne .a tha rva veda m .
,the fourth Veda . a n a va dya a .
, fa u l tl ess .a da s (a sdu : 287) pron .
,tha t one ; a n a hilap d ta ka n .
,n . p r .
,a ci ty.
so - a nd-so . a nu a dv.,a fter, a long, towa rd .
a dya a dv.,to - day . a nukflla a .
,favo r able ; a s n .
,fa vor .
a dya ta n a a dj , o f to -day . a nuj fid f . , p ermissi on .
a dr oba m .,fa i thfu l n ess . a nurz
’
tp a a .,su i ta bl e.
a dha rm a m .
,i nj u s tice
,wxo ng . ameka a , severa l .
I . Sa nskri t-E ngl ish G l ossa ry .
a nrta n . ,u ntru th .
a n ta m e nd ; i n lo c . , a t l a s t .a n tam a . ,
i n n er ; a s n ., i n teri or,
middle ; i n terva l , difference ; o cca s ion
,j uncture . Of . 376 , 4.
a n dha a .,bl i n d .
a nd/er a m . ,n . p r . , a p eop l e .
a n n a n .,food , fodder .
a nya (23 I) pron . a dj . , other.a nya tr a a dv . ,
el sewhere .a nva fic (272) a . , fol low i ng.
unua ga m . , descenda nt , progeny .
ap (277) f. pl. , wa ter .ap a r a (233) p ron . a dj . , hinder ;o ther .
ap z’
( I90) a dv.
,u n to ; further ; a s
conj . , a l s o, even .
ap sa r a s f. , hea venly nymph .
a bhaya n .,feel ing o f sa fety ; sa fe
ty .
a b/n'
a dv. ,to
,un to .
a bhv’
p r c‘
iya m .
, p l a n , des ign ; vi ew .
a bbydsa m . ,s tudy, reci ta tion .
amrta a .,immorta l ; a s n . ,
n ecta r .a mbe
‘
r (273) f . , m o ther .a yam same a s idam .
a r i m .,e nemy.
a r t/m m .
, purpose ; m ea n ing ;w ea l th .
1/a r thaya (den a r tha’
ya te) a sk
fo r (w . two + p r a i dem .
a ryama n (284) m .,n . p r .
V a rh (a'
rha ti) deserve ; ha ve a
right to ; w . i n f. be a bl e .alam a dv. , enough ; very ; w . i ns tr .
,
enough o f, away wi th ; w . da t.,
su i tab l e fo r .
ali m . , bee .
a va a dv . , down , o ff.
a va pya a . , n ecessa ry .
a va sthd f . , condi ti on , sta te .0 1262750 (272) a . , downwa rd .
j/la c (a pnu té) a cqu i re,obta i n ;
sam -up a idem .
V 2a ; (a gnéti) ea t ; ca u s . ( d cdyati ) make ea t, give to e a t .
a pi ti (332) num .,eigh ty .
a pr u n .,tea r .
a pva m .,horse .
a cm’
n m . du . ,72. p r .
, the Acvins(th e I ndia n ALB; xofipoz) .
d ata (332) n um .,eigh t.
a smda pa (332) n um .,eighteen .
astdvifica ti num .,twen ty
eigh t .Vla s (a
’
sti : 426) b e , exis t .V
'
Q a s (a'
sya tz) throw ,hu rl ;
a bhi rep ea t, s tudy , l ea rn ;m
’ entrust ; p r a throwforwa rd o r i n to .
a si m .
,sword .
a sur a m .,demon .
a sd u same a s a da s.
a sika n (usthi : 275 ) n .,bone .
a smud same a s vayam ; a s s temi n cpds, cf. 35 2 , 4.
a ba n (a ba r , a i ms : n .,day.
a ham (223) p ron .
,I .
a hi ta a .,d i sa greea ble .
a ho ex cl . , o h la h l
a bor d tr a n .,a day a nd a n ight .
d (| 30) adv. , h i th er , u nto ; a s prep .,
w . a bl. , hi ther from ; u n ti l .dkc
'
i r a m .,form
,figure .
dkdca m a i r, sky .
dkrsta p a rt . of (“
i -k m.
dkrd n ta p a rt . o f
13“
196 I . Sa nskri t-E ngl i sh G l ossa ry.
dga ma n a n .,a rriva l .
d cd r a m . ,
“ wa lk a n d conversat ion ” ; conduct ; observa nce .
d cd rya m .,tea cher .
dj fid f. , comma nd.
atma n m .,soul
,sel f ; often s imp l e
reflexive p ronoun .ddi m . , beginning ; i n cpds, cf.375
, 1 .
c’
zdz'
tya m . , su n .
d deca m .,comma nd, prescrip tion .
V dp a cqu i re , rea ch ;—+ a va
, p m ,o r am t -pm ,
idem ;8 am idem ; fin ish .
dp a d f .,ca lami ty.
ap ta pa rt . o f dp ,trus tworthy ; fi t.
dyusma n t (263) a .,l ong- l ived.
d vista , pa rt . o f vi9 + d en tered(by) , i . e . fill ed (with)
dca f . , h 0 pe .
dgu a .
,sw i ft.
dcr ama m .,hermi tage .
V as (dste : 424) si t ; ca u s . (asa
’
zya tz’
) p l a ce ; up a si t by ;
wa i t upon ; reverence .(wa n d. n .
,sea t
,cha i r.
dba r azza n .,bringing .
dhc‘
i ra m .,food .
dhu ti f . , obla tion , off ering.
1/i (étz‘ go a dhi
m id .,go over
,repea t , read ;
ca us . (a dhydp a'
ya ti) tea ch ;+ a nu follow ; ap a go away ;+ a bhi a pproa ch ; a stam
(lit’
ly go home) se t (of the sun ,ud ri se ; up a a p
p roa ch ; + p r a go forth ; die .
i coba f. , wish .
i ta ra (23 I) pron . a dj . , o ther.i ta s a dv.
,hence .
i ti a dv.,thus , so .
i ttham a dv.,i n thi s way, so .
{dam (285—286) p ron .,th i s
,th i s
here .i dh ia db (inddlze
'
: 444) k indl e,l igh t .indu m .
,moon .
indra m . , n . p r . ,the god I ndra .
indr ap r a stha n . ,n . p r .
,D elhi .
i n dr dzzi f . , n . p r . ,a goddess .
z’
ya n t (263) a .,so grea t ; so mu ch .
{yam fem . o f o'
dam .
iva adv., po stpos.
,a s ; l ike .
V'
lz'
s (i cchdti : | 09 ) w i sh, des ire .{an m . , a rrow .
ilza a dv.,here
,h i ther .
1/t ics (iksa te) see , behold ; + up a
n eglect ; +p r a tz’ exp ect .
i drc, f. a . ,su ch .
Vic (fate : 422) ru l e , own (gen ) .i pva r a m .
,m a ster ; l ord ; rich m a n .
u cchrz’
ta pa r t. o f ud-
crz'
,high .
ud a dv.,u p , up forth o r o ut .
uda iic (272) a .,northwa rd .
uda dhi m .
,ocea n .
udaya m .,ri se .
uda ra n . ,bel ly.
udya ta p a rt . o f ud-
yam ,rea dy.
udydn a n .
,ga rden .
udyoga m .,d il igence .
udyogz’
n a . ,diligent , energetic.
up a a dv. , to, towa rd .
up a n aya n a n .,i n i tia tion .
up am’
sa d f. , certa i n Vedi c works .up a bhoga m . ,
enj oymen t.
198 I . Sa nskri t-E ngl ish Glossa ry.
kama m .,desi re
,l ove ; a s n . p r .
,
the go d o f l ove .kdma dugha a .
,gra n ting w i shes ;
a s f. subst . , se . dbenu,the fab
ulo us W onder-cow .
kama duh a . ,i dem .
kdya m .,body.
kar a zza n .,rea son , ca use.
-kar in a . ,ca u si ng
,m ak ing.
kdrya n . , bu siness , concern .kdla m .
,time .
kalidasa m .
,n . p r . , a poet.
kc'
wya n ., p oem .
kdci f . , 72. p r . ,a ci ty, Bena res .
kdsflza n . , fagot ; wood .
kdsthamaya a . , made o f wood.
kim n eu t . o f Ira ; w . tu,however.
kiya n t (263) p ron . a dj . , how
grea t?ki r ti f .
,glory .
kuta s a dv. ,whence?why?
ku tm a dv. ,where?whither?
kun ta m . , sp ea r.Vkup (kdpya tz
’
) be a ngry (gen .
o r
kum c‘
i r a m . , boy, p ri nce .kucala a . , abl e ; cl ever ; l ea rned.
V ka ra té: 394-5 ) make ,do , p erform ; a d/n
'
pu t a t
the hea d,m ake rul er over
ap a do evi l to , ha rm (gen . ,lo c .
, a ce . ) ap a-d p ay ;
alam p repa re , a dorn ; ac t'
s
(avi ska r otz’
) make known,ex
bibi t ; up a do good to , ben efi t (gen . , ti r a s (ti
r a sk.) hide ; blame ; p a r a s
p u t a t th e hea d ; + p r a tz’
pay ,
recomp ense , punish (a cc . rei ,
gen .,da t . , or 10 0 .
+ p r ada s m ake known o r vi s ibl e ;m m (395 ) p rep a re , a dorn .
1/2kr s trew,sca tter ;
vi,idem .
j/Icg‘
t IIO) cut , cut o ff ;
ava idem .
krti f . , work (l i tera ry) .krtrz
’
ma a .,adop ted .
krtsn a a .,whole
,en tire .
krp a zza a ., poor ; n igga rdly .
kfp d f . , gra ciou sness, p i ty .
V km draw ; a drawo n o r up ; (kraatz
’
) p l ough .
kg'
si f , agricu l ture .kg
'
si vala m . , husba ndm an , p ea sa nt.kgrszta a . ,
bla ck ; a s m . ,n . p r .
,th e
go d Krsna .
V klp (lcailp a te) be i n order ; te ndo r conduce to ca u s . (kalp a
'
ya ti ,-te) orda i n , a pp oi n t .
ketu m . ,ba nner .
keca m . ,ha i r.
ka ilasa m . ,n . p r .
,a moun ta in .
kogi f . , p ea k ; poin t, t ip .
kop a m . , a nger .kosa m . ,
trea su re ; trea sury.
kd un teya m .,n . p r .
kausalyd f . , n . p r .
Vkr am kr a’
m a te : l34)step ; a ti p a ss beyond ;tra nsgress ; p a ss (of t ime) ;d stride up to , a tta ck ;71129 go o u t .
1/kr i kr i n i té) buy .
kr idc’
i f . , game, Sport .kr udb (kmidbya tz
’
) be a ngry (gen .o r
krodlza m . , a nger.
l
I . Sa nskri t-E ngl ish Glossa ry.
kva a dv .,where?whither? ci t
som etimes,ever .
ksazza m . n .,m oment ; time .
ksa tr z’
ya m . ,wa rrior , m a n o f the
second ca ste .ksaya m .
,decay, des tru ction .
1/ksa n ksa auté) hurt .wound .
y’
ksal(ksdldya ti) wa sh ;idemkad ir a a . , su i tabl e for K sa tr iyas .
1/West (ksin o’
ti) destroy .
ksz’
tz’
p a m .,k i ng.
1/lost}? hurl,throw .
ksizza p a rt . of 2ksi , reduced, decayed, ru i n ed .
ksi r a n .
,milk .
ksudra a .
,l i ttl e, sma l l .
ksudh f. , hunger .ksetra n .
,field.
j/kba n (kha'
n a ti) d ig.
kka r a m .,a ss.
ga figc’
z f . , n . p r .,the Ga nges .
gaj a m . ,el epha n t .
Vgazza ya (den . : gazza'
ya tz‘
) number,coun t ; a va desp i se .ga tz
'
f .,ga i t ; cours e .
ga nd/za m .,odo r
, p erfume .ga ndha rva m .
,a Ga ndha rva ,
o n e
o f a ba nd o f cel es tia l s i ngers .l/gam (gdccba ti : l00) go ; + a nu
fol low ; a bhi vi s i t,a t tend ;
a va unders ta nd ; a stam
go down , se t (cf. i o stam) ;d come ; ud ri se ;m
‘
s come forth ; proceed from ;
199
sam (m id.) com e together ,mee t
ga r iya s comp .
,very honora ble .
1/29a (gei
ya tz’
) s ing.gd ndlza r va , f. - i
,a .
,i n the ma nner
o f Ga ndha rva s .n h (gciha te) p lunge ; a va
d i ve o r p l unge u nder (a ce ) .gir f . , voice
,song.
gz’
r i m .
,moun ta i n .
gi ta n .,song ; s i nging .
guzza m ., qua l i ty , excell ence .
gur u m .,tea cher .
Vguh (gtiha ti : I0 !) h ide , concea l ;
ca us . (ga/zdya ti) idem .
gukc‘
t f . , ca ve .gri m n .
,hou se .
grha stba m .,householder
,hea d of
family .
grbya a ., domesti c.
go (209) m .,f . , bul l , steer, cow ;
a s f . , fig .,Speech .
gotva n ., ox
-na ture , stup idi ty.
gap a m .,cowherd
,shepherd ;
gua rd ia n .1/gop dg/a (de n . goPa
'
ya tz'
) he keeper ; gu a rd .
gdur a va n . , weight ; digni ty.
j/gr a n t/z s tri ng toge ther ; compose .gr a n tha m . , l i tera ry work , book .
gr a b (gr/Inci ti , grbn'
i té) rece ive ,s eize ; m
' hold,restra in ,
check ; p rali take .grama m .
,vi l lage .
grasa m .,bi te
,mou thful .
gha ta m . , p o t, vessel .
200 I . Sa nskri t-Engl i sh Glossa ry .
ghasa m .
,fodder, hay.
ghrta n .,cla rified bu tter ; ghee.
Vghr d (j z’
ghr a ti : IO2) smell.
ca encl . conj . , a nd, a l so, r e, -
gu e ;
some times i f.ca kr a n .
, wheel .oa ks (caste : see , behold ;
a rela te ; ca l l , name ;vi - d exp la i n .
ca ksus n . , eye .
ca tur (332) n um . , fou r .ca tur tba , f. 4 ,
a ., fourth .
ca tur da ga (332) n um .
,fou rteen .
ca tusp a d (282) a .
,qu adrup ed .
ca tvd r i r’
zca t (332) n um .,forty.
ca ndr a m . , moon .ca n drama s m .
,moon .
y’
cam ,u sed only w i th d (acdma ti)
sip ; ri nse the mou th .
cama tkd r a m . , a stonishment .1/ca r (ca
'
r a ti ) go , wa nder ; gra ze(of ca ttl e) ; tr .
, p erform ,commi t ;
it perform ,comp lete , do ;
sum - ii idem ; ud ca u spronou nce , say.
ca r a a .
,movi ng, going.
ca r a zza m .,n .
,foot, l eg .
ca r i ta n .,beha vi or , l i fe .
ca rma n n . ,hide , sk i n ; l ea ther .
ca rm am aga a .,l ea thern .
V cal sti r ; p r a moveo n
,ma rch ; +p r a
-vi, tr .
,move ,
s ti r.cd turmdsga n .
,a certa in sa crifice .
cdm ika r a n ., gold.
cd r a m ., spy.
cd ru a . ,bea u ti ful .
Vc i cinu té) ga ther ;
m’
s or vi -m’
s decide , conclude ;+ p r a ga the r ; vi idem ;+ sam col l ect .
c i tta n . ,notice ; thought ; mind.
V cin t (cin ta’
ga ti) cons ide r .efr am a dv . ,
lon g, a l ong time .V cud pm i n caus . (p r a coddga ti),i mpel .
V cur (cordga tz’
) s tea l .cfida f .
,top
-knot , sca lp .
ced a dv., po stpo s.
,i f.
V cest - te) s ti r , be a l ive .cdulukga m .
,n . p r . ,
a p eop l e .V ega (cgdva te) tot ter, fa l l + vi
fa l l away .
cha ttr a n .,umbrella .
chagd f . , sha de .V chid ckz
’
ndd/zé) cut, cu t
o ff ; + a va idem ; + d tak eaway, remove ; + ud extermina te .
j aga t n . ,tha t which moves ; men
a nd bea sts ; the world .
Vj a n (jail/a te I5 S ; j a n a'
ga ti) tra ns .(j a n aiga ti a nd a ctive forms) , beget ,produce ; i n tra ns . (j c
’
iga te a n d
middl e forms) be born (mother i na rise, sp ri ng up ; ud
(ujj dya te) be born , a ri sep m or sam idem .
j a n a m . , m a n ; pl. , a n d col l . ins ing .
, p eop l e , folks .j a n a ka m . , fa ther .j a n a n i f . , mother.j a nm a n n .
,birth exis tence .
j aga m . ,vi ctory .
j a r a s (280) f . , old age .
202 I . Sa nskri t-Engl i sh G lossa ry.
j/tus(tdsga ti) rej oice, take p lea surei n (w .
V tr cross over ; a va
descend ; ud emerge ; pm
i n cau s . deceive .trtiga ,
f. -a a .,th ird .
Vtrp (tfp ga ti) sa tisfy onesel f.trszza f .
,th irs t , des ire .
tej a svz’
n a . , coura geous .Vtgaj (tga
'
j a ti) l ea ve , a ba ndon ;+ p a r z
' l ea ve ofl'
, give u p .
tr agoda ca (3 32) n um .
,thirteen .
tr i (332) n um . , three .
tr iviga t (332) n um ., th irty.
triloka n .
,-ki f.
,the threefold
world.
trivrt a .,trip l e , threefold .
lr igi rsa n a .
,three -hea ded .
tr istubh f . , n ame o f a metre .trgagi tz
'
num . , eighty -three .tva s tem o f pron . of 2d p ers . (226 ;cf. 3 5 2
,
tva d so - called s tem of p ron . tva .
tvaszr m .,n . p r . , a go d, Tva sta r .
Vda ri c (daga ti) b i te .da ristra f . , tooth .daksa m .
,n . p r .
da ksz'
zza a .,right -ha nd ; sou thern .
da ada m .,st ick ; pun ishmen t .
V da ndaga (de n . : dazzda'
ga tz’
) pun
i sh .
da dba n (da dhi : 275 ) n .
,cu rds .
da dbga fic (weakes t -dhi o) m . ,n . p r .
V dam (damga ti I3 !) control ; ca us .(damdga ti) tame ; compel .da ga f. , compa ssion , p i ty.
da r idr a a ., poor.
da rca n a n . , phi losophica l system .
da ca (332) n um . , ten .
da pa ra tha m .,n . p r .
da sga pa rt . o f “da ri c .
V da h (da’
ha fi) burn .
Vlda (da'
da ti , da tté : 436) give ; i nca n s . (dap a
'
ga ti) ma ke give o r
p ay ; a take (3 I2) ; + p r a
en tru s t ; give i n ma rriage .V 2da (dga
'
ti : I32) cu t .
datr m .,giver ; a s a dj . gen
~
e ro us.
dan a n . ,gift
, p resen t ; generos i ty .
dana va m .,demon .
dasa m . , sla ve , groom .
dasi f .,fema l e S lave
,Serva n t .
diva n . ,day .
div (277) f. (ra rely sky .
diva sa m .,day.
divga a .
,h eavenly, d ivin e.
Vdip (digdti ) Show , poin t o u t ;a comma nd ; up a tea ch ,i n stru ct .dip f.
, poi n t , ca rdina l p oin t ;qua rter , region ; d irection .
Vdi/z (de'
gahi 428 ) Smea r .di rgba a .
,l ong ; am a dv. , a fa r .
di rghagus a . , l ong- l ived .
Vd i v (d i vga ti ) p lay .
Vdu i n tr .,b urn
,feel dis
tres sed ; tr .,d is tress
dukkha n . ,misery ; misfortun e .
dugdha n .,milk .
durj a n a m .,scamp , rogue .
da r a’a ga f. , misfortune .
durla bha a .,ha rd to fi nd or rea ch ;
dificult .
V dus (ddsga ti) b e defiled .
dusp r ayukta a .
,ba dly a rra nged .
dussa n ta m .,n . p r .
I . Sa nskri t-E ngl i sh Gl ossa ry.
dus insep . prefix , ba d ; ha rd .
V duh (ddgdbi , dugalle'
: 428) milkduhi tr f . , daugh ter .data m . , m essenger, envoy.
V dr i n ca us . (dara'
ga ti) vi tea rop en .
V df g (I27) see ; ca us . (da rpa'
ga ti)Show ; pa ss . (drcga
'
te) seem ,
l ook .
drc f . , l ook , gla u ce ; eye .
deva m .,god ; f. -
'
i , goddess ;queen .
deva ki f . , n . p r .
deva kula n .
,temp l e .
deva ta f . , d ivin i ty, dei ty .
dega m .
,region , la nd .
da iva , f. -i, d ivi n e .
dosa m .,fa u l t .
dguti f . , bri ll ia ncy.
dr a vya n ., p roperty ; obj ect.
dr a str m . ,seer ; a u thor (of Vedi c
hymns ,V dru (dr a
'
va ti) r un .
V dr uh (dr zibga ti) be hosti le , offenddva (332) n um .
,two .
dvaltstha m .,doorkeep er .
dvar f. , door, ga te .avifa m . ,
Arya n .
dvij ati m .,Arya n .
dvi tiga (3 35 ) a ., second .
dvip a d (282) a .
,biped .
Vdvis (dve’
sti , avisté) hate ;p r a h a te extremely.dvis m . , enemy .
dvis a dv. , twice .dvip in m .
, pa nther.
dha n a n .,money , ri ches .
dlza n in a ., wea l thy.
a nu
dha nus a .
, bow;
dba rma m .,righ t ; law ; vi rtue.
V1dha (dddlzati , dba tté : 435 ) put ,
p la ce ; ap i close, cover,keep Shu t ; a p ut on ; m id .
,
rece ive ; sam -a lay o r p la ceon ; vi lay down ;p a rz i n ca us . -dbap dga ti) , m akepu t o n
, clothe i n (twovi a rra nge
,orda i n ;
sam pu t together , u n i te ; lay on .
V2dba (dhdga ti : l26) suck .
dhatr m . , crea tor.dbanya n . , gra i n .
dlzarmika a ., right, ju s t.
t av (dbdva ti ) run ;
r un a fte r .dbava na n .
,runn ing ; course .
dh‘
i f ., u nders ta nding , i nsight.dbima n t a .
,wise
, p rudent .dhi r a a .
,s teadfa s t
,firm , bra ve .
V din? (dlmnoti , dhunute'
: 39I) ,shake .
V dizr i n ca u s . (dhar a'
ya ti ) bea r.dbrti f . , firmness ; cou ra ge .d/wnu f .
, cow .
diza irga n . ,s teadfa stn ess .
V dhga'
(dhgaga ti) th i nk , po nder .
n a adv.,not ; w i th Opt . , cf. 207 .
n aksa tr a n .,luna r ma ns ion .
n aga r a n .,
-
'
i f.,city .
n a d i f . , river .Vn a nd (n a
’
nda ti,
-te) a bbi r e
j oice i n,gr ee t j oyful ly
V i tam i n tr . , bow , bend ;tr .
,honor
,reverence
n ama s n . ,honor, glory.
m m m .,ma n (vir a nd homo) .
204: I . Sa nskri t-E ngl ish G lossa ry .
n a r aka m .,h el l .
n a rm a da f .,n . p r . ,
a r iver i n I ndia .
n ala m .,n . p r .
n a va a .
,n ew.
n a va (332) n um . n in e .n a va ti (3 32) n um .
,n inety.
n ava da ca (332) n um .
,n in eteen .
n a vi na a . , n ew .
V a a g (n a'
cga ti) p erish ;p erish ; d i sappea r.Vn ak (n dhga ti) bi nd ; sam
gird,equ ip onesel f.
n aga m .,snake .
n a taka n .,drama
, p lay .
n ama n n .
,n ame ; mama a dv.
,by
name.n ar i f . , woma n , w i fe.a dli f .
, p ip e, condu i t.vaca m . , des tru ction .
m’
a dv.,down ; i n , i n to .
vi tya a .
, con sta n t ; da ily ; - am a s
a dv.,a lways , da i ly.
midega m .,comma nd.
Vmind (n inda ti) bl ame.n ip uzza a .
,shrewd
,Sk i l l ed .
n iga ta , p a rt. of i i i - ya m, orda i ned, fixed, p erma nen t.
n i rdaga a ., p i ti less .
n irvrti f. , con tentment, happ i n ess .n is a dv.
,o u t
,forth .
n iccaga m .,decis i on
,certa i n ty.
Vm (n aga ti ; caus . n aga'
ga ti) l ea dgu ide ; ap a l ead away ;a bri ng ; up a i n trodu ce ,
consecra te,i n i tia te ; n is
bring to a n end,determin e ,
settl e ; p a r i l ea d a bout ;m a rry.
n i ca a,low .
3
n i ti f. , conduct o f l ife ; ethi cs , poli ti es .
n i ruj a .,hea l thy, wel l .
n ila kamba m . ,n . p r .
Vn r t (m‘tga ti) da nce .
nrtta n . ,da nce, dancing .
urp a m .,king.
vrp a ti m . , k ing.n etr m .
,l eader.
n etr a n ., l eadi ng-rop e , cord ; eyc .
mi n f .,ship .
nga fic (272) a ., low .
nga’
g/a m . ,l ogic .
agagga a .,right , p rop er.
p aksa m .
,wing
,S ide ; pa rty.
p a ksia m .,bird.
p a ir/ca n .
,m ud
, bog.
Vp a c (p a’
ca ti ) cook .
p a ri ca (332) n um ., fi ve .
p a r‘
i ca da ga (332) n um . ,fifteen .
p a ii cap a iicapa (334) a . , fi fty-fi fth .
p a ri ca'
ca t (332) n um .,fifty.
Vp a t (p agdga ti) sp l i t Op en .p a in a .
,sk i lled.
Vp a th (p a’
tka ti) reci te , rea d .
p a ri i m . pl. , n . p r .,certa i n demons .
p andi ta m . ,l ea rned m a n ; pa ndi t.
Vp a t (patali) fa l l , fly ; ud
fly up .
p a ti (274) m .
,l ord
,ma s ter ; hus
ba nd.
p a ttr a n . , l ea f, l etter.p a tn i f . , w i fe , consort .p a thi same a s p a n tba n .
p a tlaya a . , wholesome .p a d (282) m .
,foot .
Vp a d (p adga te) go ; vi -a i ncau s . (vgap ada
'
ga ti) k il l ;
20G I . Sa nsk ri t-E ngli sh Glossa ry.
p autr a m . , gra ndson .
p aur a m .,ci tizen .
p a (pyaga te) swel l , get stou t .p ra a dv.
,forwa rd , forth .
p ra kacin a . ,bright
,gl isten i ng ;
a ct.,i l lumina ting.
Vp r a ch (prccha'
ti) a sk , a sk a bou t .p r aj a f . , crea ture , subj ect .p r a ti a dv. and prep .
, ba ck , ba ck ,aga i n ; towa rds (po stp o s. w
pr a tiki’
tla a . ,u n fa vora bl e .
p r a tga ii c (272) a . ,ba ckwa rd , west
wa rd .
p r a tga ham a dv.,da i ly .
Vp r a th i n ca us . (p r a thdya ti)spread ; p rocla im .
p r a tham a (335 ) a . , firs t.p ra bhava m . , might , pow er .p r a bhi
’
t ta a .,much ; ma ny.
p r ama tta a . , ca rel ess .p r agaga m .
,n . p r .
,Allahabad.
p r a gukta p a rt. o f p r a-
guj .
p ra yoktr m .,a rra nger
,u ser .
p r alaya m .,destructio n .
p r a ch a m .,qu estion .
p r a sa nn a , p a rt . o f p ra -sa d,well
d i sposed .
p ra ha r a m .,s troke
,Shot ; w ound
p raho (272) forwa rd, ea stwa rd .
p razi a m . , ofte n pl. , brea th , l i fe .p rah in m .
,li vi ng crea ture .
p r ata r a dv .,ea rly, i n the morn i ng.
p raga cci tta n . , p ena nce , exp ia tion .
p r agezza a dv.,commonly.
p r asada m ., pa la ce .
p r iya a .
,dea r .
p r igaka rma n a ., k ind.
p r iga vac a . , saying p l ea sa n t thi ngs,
sociabl e .p r iga vadin a . , idem .
Vp r i ( p r inati’
,a ct . , de
l ight ; m id.
,rej oi ce ; ca us . (p r i
zi a'
ga ti), m ak e glad, p l ea se .Vplu (pla
'
va te) a drench .
p hala n . , fru i t, rewa rd .p hala va n t a .
,fru i tfu l .
V ba nd/z (ba dhn a ti , ba dhn i té) bind ;enta ngl e
,ca tch ; j oin ; co m
pose .ba ndhu m . , rela t ive .bala n . , s trength , might .bala va n t a .
,strong
,mighty .
balisg‘
ha a .,stronges t .
ba hu a .,mu ch
,m a ny .
bala a .
, young ; a s m .,chi ld , boy ;
f. - a,girl .
baspa m .,tea r
,tears .
bahu m .,a rm .
bin du m .
,drop .
buddha p a rt . o f budh, awakened ;enl ighten ed.
buddhi f., prudence , i n tel l igence .
buddbim a n t a ., p ruden t.
V budh (bo'
dha ti,-te bi idhga ti ,
- te) ,wake ; know .
budha m .,w i se m a n , sage .
br a hma ca rga n .,l ife of hol in ess,
esp . religious s tuden tship .
br a hm a car i n a .
,s tu dyi ng sa cred
know ledge ; a s m .,Brahma n
Studen t.br a
'
hma n n .
, devotion ; sa cred word(of Go d) ; sa cred know ledge ;world - sp i ri t .br a hm a
’
n (a p ersonifica tion of bra
I . Sa nskri t-E ngl ish Glossa ry .
hma n) m .,th e supreme Al l-So ul ;
Bra hma,the Crea tor.
br a hma ha n (283) m i , kil l i ng a
Brahma n .
brahma n a m ., pries t, Brahma n .
Vbr t‘
t (br a vi ti , bra té) , Speak , say ;
+ vi exp la i n , a nnounce .
bha kta a .,devo ted, tru e .
bha kti f., devo tion ; honor .
V bha ks (bha ksa'
ga ti) e a t .
bhaksa n a n .
,ea ti ng.
bhaga va n t a .,honora bl e, bl essed .
'
bhasa f .,sp eech , la ngua ge .
bhasva n t a .
,Shi n i ng
,bri ll ia n t .
V bhiks (bhiksa tc) beg , ge t by begging .
bhiksa f. , a l ms .bhiksu m . , begga r ; a sce ti c .Vbhid (hhin a
’
tti,bhinddhé) Sp l i t.
Vbhi (bibhéti) fea r ; i n ca u s . (bhisag/a te, bhagaga ti) terrify .
V2bhttj (bhun a'
kti , bhur‘
zkté) ea t,
enj oy ; ca us . (bhoj a'
ga ti) feed ;up a enjoy .
-bhuj a . ,enj oyi ng.
bhuj gu m .
,n . p r .
,a Vedic p erson .
Vbhaj (bha'
j a ti , -te) d ivide ; + vi bhuva n a n .,world.
d i s tribu te .V bha iij (bha n a
'
kti) break , des troy .
bha dr a a .,good
, p l ea sa nt ; a s n .
,
fortun e .bhaga n .
,fea r .
bha r a takhaztda m .,n . p r . , I ndia .
bha r tr m .,supporter ; preserver ;
l o rd,m a ster ; husba nd .
bha va m . , n . p r . , a name of i a .
bha va n t,f. bha va ti‘ ; i n vo c . bhos
,
f. bha va ti ; u sed i n respectfu la ddress i n s tead o f pronoun o f
2nd p erson . Cf. § 264.
bha sma n n .,a shes .
Vbha (bhati) gleam , gla nce ;a o r vi idem .
bhaga m ., p a rt, p i ece, Share .
-bhaj a .
,Sha ri ng.
bhanu m . , sun .
bha r a m .,burden .
bha rya f. , w i fe , woma n .V bhas (I/hasa te) Speak ; +p ra ti
a nsw er (a ce . o f sam
converse .
Vbha (bhava ti , - tc) become ; be,exist ; a bhi overpower ;
p a r i desp i se ; p r a
a ri se ; be m ighty , ru l e ; valere.
67212 f. , ea rth, grou nd .
bha ta p a rt. o f M n ; a s n . subs t .,being, crea ture .
bhizti f., p rosperi ty, blessing.
bhz‘
tbhuj m .,king.
bhabhrt m .,king ; moun ta i n .
bhi‘
tm i f. , ea rth , ground, la nd.
bhaga s (340) comp . a dj . , more ;-
ya s a dv. ,mostly.
bhasana n . ,ornament .
Vbhr (bhar a ti, -te) support (l i t . a nd
bhrguka ccha n n . p r . ,Ba roch
, a
holy p la ce i n I ndia .
bhr taka m .,serva n t .
bhrtga m ., serva n t.
bhrcam a dv. , grea tly, m uch .bheka m .
, frog .
bhoga m .,enj oymen t .
bhoj a n a n . ,mea l .
208 I . Sa nskri t-E ngl ish G lossa ry.
bhos see bha va n t.
Vbhram (bhra'
mga ti : IBI) wa ndera bou t
,fl i t ; + p a r i idem .
bhra tr m . , brother.bhr t
‘
t f . , eyebrow.
maksika f. , fly, gna t .m agha va n (270) m .
, I ndra .
Vm ajj (majj a ti) si nk ; m 1d emmazi i m .
, j ewel .m a ti f . , mind .
m a tima n t a . , shrewd, p ruden t .ma tsya m .
,fish .
ma thi same a s m a n tha n .
m a d ca l l ed s tem o f a ham ; cf.3 5 2, 4.
Vm a d (madga tz) get drunk ;p r a be ca reless .
m a dhu n .,honey.
m a dhup a rka m .,sweet dri nk .
m a dhulih m .,bee .
m a dhya a . ,middl e ; a s n . , middl e ;
wa i st .Vma n (manga tc ; m a n a te
’
) thi nkSupp ose ; sam honor.m a n a s n . , mind.
m a n usya m . , m an (homo) .
ma n ora tha m ., wish .
ma noha ra a .,a greea ble ; en tra no
i ng.m a n tr a m .
, sa cred text ; Sp el l,cha rm .
m a n tr in m .
,m i n i s ter ; counci l l or .
Vm a n th (m a thnati) s tir .m a n tha n (278) m . ,
stirring-stick .
m anda r a m .,n . p r .
,a m ounta i n .
ma rana n . , dea th .ma ru t m .
,w i nd ; , pl. , n . p r . ,
theS torm-gods .
amt
m a sta ka n head .
m a ha n t a .,grea t.
m a han a sa n . , k i tchen .
ma haraj a m . ,grea t k ing.
m a hisa m .
,n . p r .
m a his'
i f .,queen .
Vlma (mati ; m im i té : 438) m ea
sure ; n is work,crea te .
ma a dv. a nd conj . , not ; u sed i np roh ibi ti o ns , e tc. , l ike L a t. a c,greek jun
'
of. I9S.
m ansa n .,flesh .
matr f. , mother .madhurga n .
,sweetness .
mana va m . , m a n (homo) .
m a n a sa n .,sense ; u nders ta ndi ng .
manusa , f. - i,huma n .
marga m .
,road , way, street .
mala f . , garla nd .m asa m .
,month .
m i tr a n .,fri e nd .
m i tr a druh (249) a friend-be
traying .
m i n a m .,fish .
Vm il (m ila ti) wink ; + a i closethe eyes .
mukta f. , p ea rl .mukti f . , sa lva ti on , del ivera nce .mukha n . ,
mou th,fa ce .
mukhya a . , p rincip a l , firs t .Vmuc (muri ca
'
ti : free,rel ea se ;
muktva , withou t (3 I2) .Vmud (mo
’
da te) rej oi ce ;a l l ow.
mum’
m .
,sage ; a sceti c .
Vmus (muszza'
ti) s tea l , r o b.
musala m . n . ,club, p estl e .
Vmuh (mahga ti) be confused orda zed or s tup i d .
2 10
r a tha m .,wagon .
r a thya f. , s treet.’
V r a bh (r a'
bha te) gra sp ; a
ta ke hold o n,begi n .
V r am (r a'
ma te) amuse on esel f ;vi (vi r a
'
ma ti ) cea ser a cm i m .
,r ay ; rei n .
r a sa m . ,ta ste, feel ing .
r a sa va n t a .,ta s teful .
r aksa sa m ., dem on .
V r aj (r a'
j a ti , -tc) d irect , ru l e ;shine ; be i llus tri ous .
r aj a n m .,k i ng .
r ajya n .,k i ngdom .
r a tr i f.,n igh t .
V r adh (rad/m ate) su cceed ap a
do w rong.
r ama m .,n . p r .
, a hero .r amaya zi a n .
,a noted p oem .
r ava aa m .,n . p r .
, a demon .r aci m .
,hea p .
V ru (r adi i : 4I0) cry, scream ;vi idem .
V ruc (r dca tc) p l ea se (da t . ,r aj f . , s ickness , d isea se.Vr a a (r ddi ti : 429) w eep .
r a daha, pa rt . o f r udh ,
bes i eged,
surrou nded ; suff used .
V r udh (rup a'
ddhi,
r unddhé) o h
s tru ct, check, bes iege ; ap a
besiege .r udhi r a n .
,blood.
Vr uh (r o'
ha ti) rise , spri ng up ,
grow ; ca u s . (r oha’ga ti , r op aga ti)m ak e ri se o r grow
, p la n t ;a va descend ; a cl imb
,
moun t, a scend ; p r a growup .
raksa a .,ha rsh
,rough .
I . Sa nsk ri t-E ngl ish Glossa ry .
rap a n .,form
,bea u ty.
r i tp a ka n .,gold-
p i ece .m i (277) m . (ra rely) f . , possessions,wea l th .
r ohizzi f. , n . p r .
la ksa n ., a hundred thou sa nd .
la ksm i (276) f. , goddess o f fo r
tune .Vlag (Ia
'
ga ti) a t ta ch , ha ng, cl i ng.laghu , f. -
ghu o r -
ghvi , a . ,l igh t ;
sma l l,l i ttl e .
la i'
i ka f.,n . p r .
, Ceyl on .Vlap (la
'
p a ti) p ra te ; vi c om
p la i n .
Vla bh (la'
bha Zc) receive , take ;ca us . (Ia mbha
'
ga ti) make rece ive ,give .[a lata n .
,forehea d.
la va na n . ,sa l t .
la iigala n . , plough .
labha m .,a cqu i si ti on , ga i n .
V likh (likhdti) scra tch , wri te .Vlip (limp a
'
li) smea r.Vlih (le
'
dhi Iidhé : 427) l i ck ;a va idem .
Vlumh (luzztha'
ga ti) n is r ob .
Vlap (lump dti) break to p i eces ;deva sta te ; p lunder .Vla bh (li ibhya ti) cove t (da t. ,lchba n a n .
,w ri ting
,copying .
l
loka m . ,world ; sing. a nd pl. ,
p eop l e .lohba m .
,desi re
,a va rice .
lom a n n . ,h a i r.
loha n .,meta l ; iron .
va nga m ra ce,family .
va kr a a .,crooked
,ben t.
I . Sa nskri t-E ngl ish Glossa ry.
va ksa s n .,ches t , brea st .
Vva c (va'
kti : 4l5 ) speak , say ;
name ; ca us . (vaca'
ga ti) m a ke ( awri tten lea f) Sp ea k, i . e . read.
va zzij m .,mercha nt .
va tsa m .,ca l f.
Vva d (va'
da ti) sp eak , say ;
a bhi i n ca ns. (a bhivada'
ga ti)greet ; vi (m id .) d i spu te,a rgu e .
va dha m .,k i l l i ng , murder .
va dht‘
z f .,woma n ; w i fe .
va na n .,woods , fores t.
va n a vasin a .
,forest-dwel l i ng .
Vva nd (vanda te) gree t, honor.V vap (vap a ti ) sca tter ; sow .
vap a s n ., body ; figure .
vagam (223) p ron . , w e .vaga s n .
, a ge .
lva ra'
m .,su i tor, bridegroom .
2va’
ra m .,choice, p rwrlege ; fa vor.
3va ra a .,bes t ; better (w.
tha n) .va r dha m .
,boa r .
va r a ri a m .,n . p r .
,a go d .
va rzza m .,color ; ca ste .
Vva rztaga (va rzza'
ga ti) descr ibepor tray .
va r tin a . , a biding, being.
va rsa n ., yea r.
valla bha a .
,dea r.
Vva c (vdsgi ) w i sh .
Vva s (va'
sa ti) dwel l ; m’
in
h abi t , dwel l ; + p ra go awayo n a j ourney ; p r a ti i n
h a b i t .va sa ti f . , dwell i ng.
va su n .,wea l th , money.
va sudeva m .,n . p r .
va stra n . ,ga rmen t .
V e a h (vaha ti) tr . , ca rry ,bea r ;
i n tr ., p roceed ; flow ; blow .
c d encl .,o r .
vac f.,voice ; word .
vacga a .,blameworthy , cu lp
abl e .vazt ijga a tra de .va ta m . ,
w i nd .
van ap r a stha m . , a Brahma n i nthe th i rd stage o f his l i fe.
vap i f. , cis tern .
vaga sa m .,crow .
vagu m . ,w i nd .
va r i n .,wa ter .
vi a dv.,a pa rt, away, o ut.
vihga (334) a . ,twenti eth .
vihpa ti (332) n um .,twen ty .
vihca ti tam a (334) a .,twenti eth .
vikr amadi tga a .,n . p r .
,a king.
Vvij (c ij ati) tremb l e ; a d i nca ns. (udvej a
’
gati ) terrify .
vi tta n . , possess ion s ; wea l th .
Vvid (vétti ; véda : —4l7) know ,
consider ; cau s . (veda'
ga ti) i n formn i ca u s .
,idem .
V2vid (vi nda'
ti ,-te) find , a cqu i re .
-vid a .,know i ng.
vidga f. , know ledge , l ea rni ng .
vidvahs a .
,know i ng, wise .
vidvista p a ss . p a rt . o f vi -dvis,
detes ted .
vidhi m .
,ru l e
,fa te ; Brahma .
vidheya a .,obedi en t .
vinaya m .,obed i ence .
viva p rep . , w i thou t (w i th i nstr .o r a cc .
,ofte n p o stpo s) .
vip aka m . ,ripeni ng ; recompen se .
vip ra m .
,Brahma n .
14‘
219 I . Sa nsk ri t-Engl ish G lossa ry.
vibhu , f. -bhea,a . p erva ding, fa r
rea ching ; omnip resent, mighty .
vivaha m .,weddi ng , m a rriage .
vivekin a .,shrewd .
Vvic (vica'
tz) en ter ; sam -a
a pproa ch ; up a sea t o n eself ; p r a enter , p enetra te .
vic m . pl. , p eop l e ; the Vaicyaca s te .
vigista p a r t. o f vi -cis , excellen trem a rka ble .
vicr uta pa rt. o f vi cru , famou s .vicva a .
,all(Ved i c) .
vicvasa m .
,trus t
,confidence .
visa n ., poi son .
viszm m .,n . p r . , a go d .
vihaga m .,b ird .
vihi ta p a rt . o f vi -dha , orda in ed .
V lvr (umati , vrnu té) cover, sur
rou nd ; a cover ; + ap a- a
Op en ; vi exp la i n ; ma nifes t ;sam Shu t .
V2vr (vm i té va r a'
ga ti ,- te) choose,
Select .vrka m .
,wolf.
vrksa m .,tree .
V vrt (c ar ta te) turn ; exi s t, subsis t,be
, becom e + n i r eturn home+p r a get a -going
,brea k o u t
a ri se ; con ti nu e ; ca us . (a c t.) co nti nus (tra ns ) .
vrtta n . ,conduct.
vrttan ta m .,s ta te o f a ff a irs ;
n ews .vr tr a m . ,
n . p r . , a demon .vrddha p a rt. o f vrdh, old.
V vrdh (va’
rdha te) grow ; ca u s .(va r dha
'
ga ti ,-te) m ake grow ;
bring up .
e s (va’
rsa ti) ra i n , give ra i n ;fig .
,shower down ; overwhelm .
veda m . , Sci ence, knowledge ; esp .
sa cred know l edge, holy writ .vcda n a f .
, p a i n .vedan ta m . ,
a system o f p hi loSophy .
vedi f . , a l ta r .va i a ssev. p a rti cle , to be sure , i nsooth ; often u ntra nsla ted.
’
va igga m . ,m a n o f the third ca ste .
vga iij a n a n .,Sp ice .
vvga th i n ca us . (vga thaga ti) torment.Vvga dh (vidhga ti) h i t, p i erce .vgalika a .
,fa ls e
,w rong.
vga va har a m . , tria l , law -su i t ; tra de.vgaka ra zza n .
,gramma r .
vgaghr a m . , tiger .vgadha m .
,hun ter.
vgadhi m .,d i sea se, i l l ness .
vyadhi ta a .,S i ck
,i l l .
vgasa m . ,n . p r .
Vvr aj (vraj a ti , - te) p roceed ;wa nder forth ; become a n a s
ceti cvr a n a m .
,wound .
vr a ta n ., vow ,
obl iga tion ; du ty .
Vga hs (ca usa ti) pra i se ; procla im ;p ra p rocla im .
Vgale (ca kndti) be a ble ; som etimesp a s s . , cf. 322 .
ca ka m . ,Scythia n .
caka ta m ., ca r .
ca kun tala f. , n . p r .
ca it/ca f . , hesi ta ti on .
ga ta (332 - 333) n . , a hundred .
ga ta tama a .,hundredth .
214 I . Sa nskri t-Engl i sh G lossa ry .
sodaca (332) n um .,six teen .
sa i iigulcta p a rt. o f sam -
guj , pro
vided wi th .
samva tsa ra m ., yea r.
sa i ii caga m ., doub t.
sakrt a dv.,once .
sa ktha n (sakthi : 275 ) n .
,thigh .
sa khi (274) m . ,friend .
sa khi f.,fema l e comp a nion , friend
sajj a a .,rea dy.
V sa fij (saj a ti sajj aile : cf. i n Vo c .
22) ha ng o n,be fa s tened o n
sa tka r a m .,hosp i ta l i ty .
sa ttra n .,sa cr ifice .
sa tya n ., tru th , righteou sness .
Vsa d (si da ti) sit ; settl e down ; beovercome o r exha us ted ; a
approa ch ; + sam-a sea t o n esel f ; ca us . -sadaga ti) meet, encoun ter ; i t i si t down ;p r a be fa vorabl e .
sa da a dv. , a lways .sa drca , f. - i
,a .
,S imi la r ; worthy.
sa n'
tdigdha a .
,doubtful ; u nstea dy .
sa iizdhga f. , tw i l igh t.sa n t, p a r t. o f la s, being , existing ;good ; a s m .
,good m a n ; a s f.
sa ti , good woma n , esp ecia l ly a
w idow . wh o i mmola tes herself.cap ta (332) n um .
,seven .
sap ta ti (332) n um .,seven ty .
sap ta da ga (332) n um .,seven teen .
sa hha f.,counci l
,meeting
,cour t .
sa m a dv., a l ong wi th ; comp l etely .
samaksam a dv .
,before
,i n the
presence of (gen ) .sama r tha a .
,ca pa ble , a ble.
samagama m .,meeti ng, encounter .
samaj a m . , conven tion , compa ny .
sam idh f.,fagot.
sam ip a a .,nea r ; a s n .
,v i ci n i ty,
nea rness, p resence .samudr a m .
,ocea n .
samunn a ti f .,heigh t
,el eva ti on ;
high p osi tion .
sameta a . , provided w i th .
samp ilrzi a p a rt. o f lpr sam,
full .samga k a dv .
,wel l
, properly .
samraj m .,grea t k ing ; emperor .
sa r i t f.,rive r .
sa rga m .
,crea tion .
sa rp a m .,snake .
sa rva a . , all.
sa rva tr a a . ,everywhere .
sa vi tr m .
,n . p r .
,the Sun -god Se
vi ta r ; sun .
Vsa h (sa’
ha te) endure .sa ha a dv.
,together ; prep . , often
p o stp o s.
,wi th a l ong w i th
,
sa ha ca r a m .
,comp a n ion ; - i f.
,
w i fe .sa ha sa a dv.
,suddenly, qu ick ly .
sa ha sr a n . ,a .
,thousa nd .
sa haya m .,comp a nion , help er .
saksin m .,w i tn ess .
sadha na n .
,mea ns , devi ce .
sadhu m . , holy m a n,sa i n t .
sama n n . ,Vedi c melody ,
song ;pl. , the Sam aveda .
sama n ta m . , va ssa l .samp r a tam a dv. , a t p resen t.saga m a dv.
,a t evening.
sar a sa m . , cra ne.sihha m . ,
l i on .
I . S a nskri t-E ngl i sh G lossa ry .
V sic (si ii ca'
ti) drip , drop , mois ten ;+ a bhi a noi n t a s k ing .
Vlsidh (se'
dha ti) repel ; +p r a ti
hold ba ck ; forbid .
V2si dh (sidhga ti) succeed ; i n ca ns(sadha
'
ga ti) p erform ; a cqu i re .sindhu m . ,
n . p r .,the I ndus .
sima n f .,border
,bounda ry ; o u t
sk i r ts .eu a dv . , w el l ; ea sy ; very.
V eu (sun dti , sum tte'
) p ress .sukha n .
,fortu ne
,lu ck
,ha ppi n ess
sunda r a,f. - i
,a . ,bea u ti fu l .
suma n a s a .,fa vora bly-minded ; a s
f. , flower .sa rap a m .
,drunka rd .
suva rzza n . , gold .
suhrd m .,fri end .
V871 (sitte'
) genera te , bring forth ;+p r a genera te .
sakta n . , Vedi c hymn .
sitta m . , driver , cha rio teer.silda m . , cook .
sti rga m . , su n .
V sr (sa'
r a ti) flow ; + a nu fol lowup ; + ap a go away ; i n ca us .-sardga ti ) drive away.
Vsrj (srj a'
ti) l e t go, crea te ;+ na l e t l oose or o u t ; ra i se (thevoi ce) .
Vsrp (sa'
rp a tz) m ove p ra i dem .
creti f , crea tion .setu m . ,
bridge, dike .
semi f . , a rmy.
Vsev (séva te) serve, honor ;vi dwel l ; devote oneself to ;a tten d .
sa in ika m .,soldier.
sa inya n ., a rmy .
sozna m ., the i n tox i ca ting fermen t
ed j u ice o f the Some -
p l a n t .ska ndha m . ,
Shou lder .V siu (stati ti : 4II) p ra is e .stuti f . , song o f pra i s e ; p ra i se .V sir (strpdti , straa te
'
; strpati ,
strai té) sca tter, s trew ; ap a
sca tter,bestrew .
sten a m ., th ief.
sto tr a n .,song of p ra i s e .
etr i (276) f. , woma n .V stha (tistha ti) s ta nd , i n tr. ; be i no r o n
,etc .
,b e S i tua ted ; ca u s .
(sthap a'
ya ti) put, p la ce ; a ppoin t ;s top ; a dhi mou n t
,s ta nd
over ; ru l e , govern ; a nu
fo llow o u t,a ccompl i sh ; (cf. a l s o
p . 96, la s t n ote) ; ud a ri se ,ri se (cf. Vo c . ap a a p
p roa ch rea ch ; p r a m id. ,
s ta rt o ff ; i n ca us . send ;+ sam i n ca usfi, ca us e to rema i n
sthan a n . , p la ce, loca l i ty ; s tea d.
siki ta p a rt . o f stha ; cf. 290 , e nd .siki ti f .
,condi tion .
Vsna (saati) ba the .snataka m .
,one who ha s perform
ed th e a blutions custom a ry a t
the en d o f rel igious pup i lage .sn an a n . ,
ba th ing , ba th .
snagu. m .,tendon
,bowstring .
sn igdha pa rt . o f sn ih, a ffectiona te .V sn ih (sh ibga ti) feel i ncl i ned to ,l ove (gen .
,
sn usa f. , da ughter i n law .
t/w e (Sprcdti) touchVsprh (sprhaga tz) desxre8ma en cl . , sl ightly a ssev. ; o ftena ccompan ies a p resen t tens e,
2 16 I . Sa nskri t-E ngl ish Glossa ry.
givi ng i t th e force o f a n h isto ri ca l te nse .V sm r (smara ti ) remember ; thi nko n ; ca l l to mind ; tea ch ; eSp . i np a ss . sma rga te ‘i t i s ta ught, i . e .tradi tiona l’.
smrti f . , tra di t ion ; law-book .
sr aj f . , ga rla nd .
sr astr m .,crea tor.
sva a .
,own ; one’s own .
V sva iij (sc a'
fate) embra ce ;p a r i (Cf . Vo c . 21) idem .
sva drc a .,s imila r.
V sc ap (sva’
p i ti : 429) sleep .
svap n a m .,s leep , dream .
sva gam p ron . , own self, sel f.svagambhiza .
,self- exis ten t ; a s m .
,
ep i the t o f Bra hma .
sva rga m .,heaven .
sva sr f . , sis ter .svadu a .
,sweet .
svadhga‘
ga m . , p riva te recita tio no f sa cred texts .
svamin m ., p ossessor, lord .
sva i r am a dv. , a t plea sur .
ha ta pa rt . o f he n .
Vha n (ha'
n ti : 4l9) kill ; ca u s . (ghataga ti) , ha ve k i ll ed ; ap a
remove ; a bh i smi te ;sam -a wou nd ; i t i k i l l ;+p ra ti hinder ; i nj ure, offend ;
sam wri te .-ha n (283) a . , ki l l ing .
ha nu f ., jaw.
ha numa n t m . , n . p r ., a mo nkey
k ing .
ha n tr m . ,kill er
,slayer.
ha r i m .
,n . p r .
,a god.
ha r in a m .,gazel l e.
hala m . n ., p lough .
ha vis n .,obla ti on .
ha sta m .,hand.
ha sti n m .,elepha n t .
V lba (j a'
ha ti) a ba ndon , give up ;n eglect.V2ba (j ihi te : 438) move .V hi (hindti) s end ; + p ra idem .
hi a ssev. p article , surely ; ca usa l ,for
,beca u se.
Vhi hs (hinasti) i nj ure, des troy .
hi ta p a r t . o f ldha'
; a s a dj .
,ad
va n tageo us ; a s n . , a dva n tage .hima va n t a .
,snowy ; a s m ., the
H imalaya Mts .hi na pa rt . of lha ,
a bandoned ;wa n ting i n ; w . i nstr .
,w i thou t .
t (j akati , j uhu té) sa crifice.hu ta bhuj (nom .
-bhuk) m .,fire .
V hit see hva .
yhr (ha'
r a ti) take away ; stea l ;p lu nder ; ap a idem ;a a ct. a nd m id .
,fetch
,bring ;
na-a‘ ci te
,m en tion ;
p r a ty-a bring ba ck ; ud
sa ve,rescu e .
hrd n . ,hea rt.
hrdaga n . ,hea r t.
V hrs (harsa ti , hfsga tz) rej oice, bedelighted ; p r a idem .
he i n terj .,O
,ho .
hema n ta m .,win ter.
hr a svam a dv. , n ea r by.
Vhr i (j ihr e'
ti) be a shamed .hr i f .
,modes ty , ba shful ness .
Vhva'
(hva’
ga ti) ca l l ; i n ca ns . (hva
ga’
ga ti) ha ve ca l l ed ; +a ca ll ,Summon .
2 18 I I . Engl ish -Sa nskri t Glossa ry .
ba t tl e : r a n a m . n . ; yuddha n .
be,to : bba ; vrt ; (be s i tua ted)
stha .
bea r,to : bhf ; (bri ng forth) si t ;
sit +p r a .
bea r : rksa m .
bea t, to : tad.
bea utiful : sunda ra ; rap a va n t.
beau ty : r ap a n .becom e
,to : hint ; vrt.
bee : ali m . ; ma dhulih m .
beg , to : bhiks.
begin , to : r a bh + a .
behind : p a pcat (w .
behold,to : i ka.
Bena res : kapi f.b end
,to : n am .
benefit,to ; 1kr + up a .
beseech,to : p a d+p r a .
besi ege, to : r u dh ; r udh+ up a .
best : pr estha ; jyestha .
betake oneself, to : ya ; pr i + a .
better : pr ega s ; j gaga s.
bi nd,to : ba ndh .
biped : dvip a d.
bird : vihaga m . ; p a ksin m .
b irth : j ati f . ; j a nma n n .
bla ck : krazza .
blame,to : n ind ; lkr+ ti r a s.
blessed : bhaga va n t ; (a s p refix)pr i .
b l ood : r udhir a n .blow , to va h . i f . ; p ur f.boa t : n au f.body : pa r i r a n . ; vap a s n . ; kaya
su n , jyo tis n .
bone : a sika n n .
book : (ma nuscrip t) pustaka n . ;
(work) gr a n tha m .
born , to be : j a n ; j a n + a d.
both : a bha da .
bow,to : n am.
boy : bala m . ; kamar a m .
Brahma n : brahma na m . ; de ij a m . ;
dvijati m . ; vip ra m .
bra nch : pakha f.bra ve : dhi r abrea s t : a r a s n . ; va ksa s n .
bridegroom : va r a' m .
bring,to : n i + a ,
~ hr + a .
broa d : p rtha a r a .
brother : bhr atr m .
bu rn,to : da h.
bus i n ess : krya n .
but : ta ; Ici n’
tta ; p a n a r .
ca l l , to : bad ; (name) va c ; va d .
capa ble : sama r tha .
ca ste : j ati f .
ca t tl e : go m . pl.
cea se,to : pam ; r am + vi .
cel ebra ted : vipr a ta pr ima n t.
cha i n : har a m .
cha rioteer ; sata m .
cha rm : kan ti f . .
check,to : dam , ca us . ; ra dh .
ches t : va hea s n . ; a r a s n .
child : bala m . ; pipa m .
choose,to : 2vr .
cistern : vap i f.ci tizen : p aur a m .
ci ty : n aga r acleverness : buddhi f.cl imb
,to : r a h a .
close,to : lvr sam ; ldha ap i .
cloud : m egha m .
coa chma n : mm mcome
,to : gam + a ; ga + a ; i +
I I . E ngl ish - Sa nskri t Glossa ry.
a bhi o r a ; come o u t : gam n ie
ga n is.
comma nd , to : dip+a , j ii d+a cau s .comma nd : aj ria f. ; n idepa m .
commi t,to : ca r a ; lhr .
compa nion : sa haya m . ; saha ca
r a m .
compa ny : samaj a m .
comp ose , to : m e.
conduct : vr tta n .
confin e,to : r a dh n i .
conquer , to : j i .consecra te, to : a i ap a .
consider, to : cin t ; lvid.
consort : p a tn i f.cook
,to : p a c .
copy i ng : lchba n a n .cord
,sa cred : ap a vi ta 0 .
cou n t,to : ga aaga .
coura geou s : tej a svin .
course : ga ti'
f .
cover,to : 1v
_r (m id.) lvr sam
cow : dhen a f . ; go f.cowherd : gop a m .
crea te,to : srj .
crea to r : dhatr m . ; sra sgr m .
crea ture : p r azzin m . ; j aga t n .
crescen t : kala f.cross
,to : tr .
crow : vaya sa m .
curds : da dha n n .
c ut,to : krt ; chid .
cu t o ff , to : krt a va ; chid a va
da i ly : n i tga ; (a dv. ) h i tyam ; p ra
tga ham .
da ncing : nrtta n .
2 19
da ughter : ka nga f. ; p a tr i f . ; dah itr f.day : diva sa m . ; din a n . ; a ha n n . ;
d . by d . : din e din e ; p r a tga ham ;
a day a nd a n ight : a horatr a n .
dea d : m r ta ; vip a nn a .
decide , to (settl e) : n i n is.
deed : ka rm a n n .
dei ty : deva ta f.del ica te : ta r a n a .
del ight , to ta s, ca us .del ivera nce : m a kti f.demon : r aksa sa m .
depa r t, to : i ap a .
describe , to : c a rp aya .
desire,to : labh.
destroy, to : M a ny.
desp i se, to : ma n a va ; bha p a ri .
determ ine, to : ci n is o r vi -n is.
devoted : bhakta ; sn igdha .
devo tion : bhakti f.di e : a ksa m .
di e, to : mg‘ ; i + p r a ; p a d + vi .
difficu l t : da rla bha daska r a .
d ig, to : kha n .
di l igence : a dgoga m .
d i l igen tly : bhrpam .
disa pp ea r, to : n a p + vi .
di sea se : r aj f . ; vgadhi m .
di smoun t,to : r a h a va .
di sown, to : hkya
'
p r a ti-a .
d ispu te , to : va d vi .
d i stress,to : da .
dis tribu te,to : bhaj vi .
d ivi ne : divga .
do,to : lhr ; ca r + sam ~a .
dom es tic : grhga .
dog : pva n m . ; pan i f.door : (Ivar f.
220 I I . E ngli sh -Sa nskri t-Glossa ry.
doork eep er : dvahstha m .
dove : kap o ta m .
draw,to : va h .
dri nk , to : lp a .
driver : sata m .
drop , to : si c .
drop : binda m .
dwel l,to : 3va s ; va s a i ; dwel l
o n sa fij .
ea r : ka raa m .
ea rth : p rthivi f . ; bha f . ; bham i f.ea s t, ea s tern : p ra ii c ; the E . : p raci
f ., se . dip.
ea t, to ; a d ; 2a p; bha ks; bhaj .
e a ting : bhaksazza n .ecl ip se , to : Her tir a s.
eight : asta .
eighth : e stama .
e igh ty : a pi ti f.eightie th : a pi ti tama .
eldes t : j gestha .
elepha n t : gaj a m . ; ha stin m .
e l even th : ekada pa .
em erge,to : tr a d.
emin en t,to be : cubh .
emp eror : samr aj m .
encompa ss, to : lvr ; chid ava .
end : a n ta m .
endure,to : sa h.
enemy : a r i m . ; pa tra m . ; dvism .
enj oy, to : bhaj .
enjoyment : bhoga m .
enter, to : vic p r a .
entra ncing : m a n oha r a .
envoy : data m .
en trus t, to : I da p r a .
equ ip , to : n a h sa m.
eu logy : sto tra n .
even ap i .
every : sa rva .
evi l (a dj . ) p ap a ; (subs t .) p ap a n .exceedingly : a ti .exp la i n , to : bra vi ; lvr vi ,
ca ks vi -a .
extermina te,to : chid a d .
eye : n etr a n . ; caksas n . ; a ksan n . ;
loca n a n .
fa ce : makha n .
fagot : sam idh f.fa ir : sa nda r a .
fa l l , to : p a t ; p a t + n i ; fa l l toone’s lot : r ; fa l le n (k i l led) :p a ti ta ; myta .
fam e ; ki r ti f . ; ya pas n .family : va asa m .
fam ous : vipr a ta .
fa s t (firm) : draba .
fa sten,to : ba n dh .
fa t : p i n a ; p a sta .
fa ther : j a n aka m . ; p i tr m .
fa u l t,to fi nd : llcr + tir a s.
fa u l tless : a n ava dga .
fea r : bhaga n .field : ksetr a n .
fifth : p a ficama .
fight,to : ya dh .
fil led : pa raa ; samp arzza .
fina l ly : a n te.
find , to : 2vid .
fin ish,to : ap sam .
fire : agn i m . ; ha ta bhaj m .
firewood : samidh f.firs t : p r a thama ; a t firs t : p rathamam .
fish : m a tsga m . m i na m .
fit,to : yaj .
222 I I . Engl ish-Sa nskri t G lossa ry.
ha ppy, to be : ma d. i nj us tice : a dha rma m .
ha rd to find : da rla bha . i n tel l igence : buddhi f.ha rm
,to : 1hr + ap a . i ron : loha n .
h a te, to : dvis; da is p r a .
hea r, to : pr a . jaw : ha na f.hea rt : hrdaga n . ; brd n . j ew el : m aai m . ; ra tn a n . ; bha
hea ven : sva rga m . sa g a n .heavy : ga ra .
hel l : n a r a ka m .
here : a tr a ; iha .
hero : par a m . ; vi r a m .
hesi ta tion : pa r-
aka f.high : a cchr i ta .
high wa ter : p ar a m .
hold shu t, to : ldha ap i .
holy : sci dha .
holy wri t : pr a ti f.home grham .
honey : m a dha n .honor
,to : p aj ; 71am ; sev.
h0 pe : apa f.horse : a pva m .
house : grha n . : m a ster o f the hgrhastha m .
householder : grha stha m .
house-p riest : p a r chi ta m .
h ow ?: ka tham .
huma n : man a sa .
hun ter : vga'
dha m .
hurl , to : 2a s ; ksip .
hu sba nd : p a ti m . ; bha r tg‘ m .
hymn : sit/eta n .
I : a ham .
impa r t , to : I vid a i,ca u s .
i ncl i n ed, to be : sa ih :in crea se
, to : vrdh.
I ndia : bha r a takhazzda m .
i n i tia te,to : i ti ap a .
k i ll , to : mr , ca u s . ; ha n ; ha n , ca us.
k i ndl e,to : iah .
king : a rp a m . ; nrp a ti m . ; p a~
r thiva m . ; r aj a n m . ; bhabhajm . ; bhabhgr t m .
k i ngdom : r aj ya u .
know,to : lvid ; j iia .
knowl edge : vidya f. j nana n .
lament,to : lap vi .
la nd : depa m .
la nguage : bhasa f.l a st , a t : a n te .
law : dha rma m . ; vidhi m .
law - book : smrti f . ; dha rma pa
str a n .
law -su i t : vga va har a tn .
l ea d,to : n i .
l ea der : n etr.
lea rn, to : gam a va ; lvid ; i
a dhi .
l ea rned : vidvans ; p andita kapala .
l ea rni ng : vidga f.l ea ther : ca rma n n .
l ea vi ngs : a cchista n .l esson : a dhgaga m .
l i ck , to : lih ; lih a va .
l i fe : j i vi ta n . ; agas n . ; ca r i ta n .
l ight : j yotis n .
l ight (not heavy) : lagha .
l ike : iva .
I I . E ngl i sh-Sa nskri t Gl ossa ry.
l imb : a i iga n .
l i on : sihha m .
lip : ostha m .
l i s ten, to : pr a .
l ive,to : j i v ; vrt ; a n p r a .
l ong : d i rgha ; (adv . ) ci r am .
l ook a t , to : i hs p r a .
l ord : i pva r a m . p a ti m .
l o tus : p a dm a m . n .
l ove,to : sn ih.
l ove , god of l. : kama m .
luna r m a nsion : n a ksa tra n .
m a iden : ka nga'
f . ; bola f.tn a idse r va n t : dasi f.m ake, to : i hr .
m a n (vir ) : n a r a m . ; puma/i s m . ;
p a r a sa m . ; (homo) : j a n a m . ;
man a va m . ; ma n a sga m . ; n a r a m .
ma nk ind : j a n a m . pl.
m a ny : ba ha ; p r a bhata .
m a rch , to : cal+p ra .
ma rria ge : vivaha m .
m a rry, to : a i p a r i .
m a s ter : bha r tr m . ; p a ti m .
m a t : ka ta m .
m ea ns : sadha n a n .
m edi ci n e : aasa dha I ] .
m eet , to gam sam
m eeting : sama‘
gama m .
m el ted but ter : ghrta n .
m ention,to : hr + a d-a .
m ercha n t : va nii m .
m eri t : p anga n .
mighty : balin ; bala va n t; vibhu .
milk,to : duh .
milk : ksi r a n . ; p a gas n .
m i nd : m a n as n . ; ma ti f.m inis te r : m a n tr in m .
223 .
misfortun e : da hkha n . ; ap a d f.modes ty : kr i f.mois ten , to : sic .
mona rch ; samr aj m .
money : dha n a n . ; va sa n .month : masa m .
moon : ca ndr am as m . ; ca ndr a m . ;
in da m .
mostly : bhaga s .
m orn ing, i n the : p ra ta r .
mother : matr f . ; amba f.mother-in -law : pva pr a f.mounta i n : gir i m . ; p a rva ta m .
m ou th : makha nm uch : p r a bhata ; baha .
mou th fu l : grasa m .
murder , to : mr, ca us . ; ha n ; ha n ,ca us .m u st f: a rh ; cf. § 320 a nd Ex er-J
ci se 30 .
name : n ama n n . ;'
by n . : n ama .
name , to : va c ; va d ; (reckon)ganaya .
n eck : kantha m .
n eglect, to : lha .
n et : j ala n .
n ever : n a Ica da ap i , cid,o r
ca n a .
n ew s : vrttan ta m .
n igh t : r a tr i f.n o one : n a ka + op i , cid, o r ca n a .
north,northern : a da iic ; the N . :
a di c i f., 8 0 . dip.
n o t : n o ; ma .
noth ing : n a Ieim ap i , cid , o r
ca n a .
now : a dhuna samp ra tam .
224 I I . E ngl i sh-Sa nskri t G lossa ry .
0 : he.
obed i en t : vidhega .
obla tion : ha vis n .
occu r, to : di p, p a ss . 2vid, p a s s .
ocea n : a da dhi m . ; samudr a m .
off end, to : ha n +p ra ti ; lha .
offeri ng (sa crificia l) : havis n .old : vrddha ; O lder : j gaga s.om nip resen t : vibhu .
once : sa ky’t.o n e : eka .
on ly : eva .
Op i n ion ; m a ti f. ; m a ta n .
o r ; va, po stp o s. ; a tha va .
orda i n , to : klp , ca us . ; 1dha + vi ;orda i n ed : vihi ta .
order,to : j ii a + a , ca u s .
other ; a nga ; i ta r a , ap a r a .
ou tskirts : sima n f.overcome
,to : 2p r .
overwhelm,to : vrs.
own , one’s own : sva .
o x : a n adah m .
pa i r : yagma n .p a la ce : p rasada m .
p a ren ts : p i tr , m . du .
p a rt : bhaga m .
p a th : marga m . p a n tha n m .
p ea rl : ma kta f.p ea sa n t : krsi vala m .
p ena nce : tap a s n . p raga pci tta n .
p eop l e : j a n a , pl. ; loka , s . and pl.
p erform , to : sidh,cau s . ; ca r ,
ca r +sam -a ; (a sa crifice) ta n .
p erfum e : ga ndha m .
p erish , to : n a p+ o i .p es tle : ma sala m . n .
p ierce, to : vga dh .
p i lgrima ge : ti r thaga’
tra f.p i ou s : sadhu .
p la ce , to : ldha ; dha + sam-a .
p la ce : p a da n . ; depa m .
p la n : a bhip r aga m .
p la n t, to : r a h, caus .p lay, to : di v.
p l ea se, to : r a c .
p l ea sure : sakha n . ; wi th p .
, p l ea sa n tly z
'
sa khen a ; (wish , choice)i ccha f. kama m . a t p . : sve
cchaga .
p l ough : la ngala n . ; hala m . n .
p l ough, to : krs.
p lunder, to : luath ; hr ; lap .
p oem : kavya n .poet : ka vi m .
poi n t o ut : to ; dip.pol luted, to be : das.p oor : da r idr a .
p ossess ions : dha n a 11 .
post, sa crificia l : gap a m .
po t : gha ta m .
pou nd, to : p is.
p ou r, to : ha .
power : bala n .
powerfu l : balin ; bala va n t.pra ise, song Of p . sta ti f. stotra n .
p ra i se , to : pans; sta .
p ray for, to : a r th .
prescrip tio n : adepa m .
p resence : sam ip a n .p revi ou s ; p arva .
p ries t : rtvij m .
p rinc e : kamara m .
prop erty : va sa n . ; dhana n .prosperi ty : bhati f.protect, to : r a ks 2p a ; p a , caus .p rotection ; pa r a na n .
226 I I . Engl ish-Sa nskri t G lossa ry.
second : dvi tiga .
see , to : p a p ; di p ; i ks; iks p r a .
s eer : rsi m .
send,to : stha +p r a , ca u s .
serva n t : bhrtya m . ; bhrta ka m .
serve : sev.
set, to : (pl a ce) ldha ; (in tr . , o f
su n , e tc .) i a stam ; ga in o stam .
Shade : chaga f.she , etc . : sa, f. Of ta .
sh i n e,to : pa bh ; r aj ; bha vi .
Ship : n aa f.shoe : ap an a h f.Show
,to : di p, ca us .
shrewd : p a ta .
Shu t,to : ldha ap i ; leg
:
sam .
S i ck : vgadhi ta ; r agna .
S ide : p a ksa m .
S i n p ap a n . ; ena s n .S ing, to : 29a .
S ingi ng : gi ta n .
sip , to : cam a .
si s ter : sva sr f.S i t
,to : sa d ; sa d a i .
s i tua ted,t o be : vrt.
S ix : sa s.s ix th : sastha .
sk i l led : p a ta .
sky : div f . ; dip f. p i . ; akapa n .
Sla ve : dasa m . ; dasi f.slay, to : mgr , ca u s . ; ha n .
sl eep , to : so ap ; pi .smell
,to ; ghr a .
smite,to : hr p r a ; ha n a bhi .
so : i ti ; evam : ta tha .
soldi er : sa in ika m .
some eka pl. ; some take,to : do a ; gr a b ; gr ah
ers : kc ci t ke c i t . p r a ti .
sometimes : kr a ci t. ta ke p la ce, to : j a n ; bba
son : p a tr a m . ; mm m .
so n -i n -law : j ama tr m .
song : gir f . ; gi ta n . ; (o f pra i se)sto tr a n .
sou l : atma n m .
sow, to : vap .
Sp eak , to : va d ; va c ; bhas.
spea r : k an ta m .
sp eech : vac f . ; bhasa f.Spoon : j a ha f.sta nd , to stha .
sta te,to : bra .
s tea l,t o : ca r ; ma s; la ngh.
steer : go m .
s t ick : da nda m .
Ston e : drsa d f. ; (preciou s)mani m .
stop , to r a dh .
s tra nge p a r a .
s treet : r a thga f. ; marga m .
s trike,to : tad.
Strive,to : ya t.
stronges t : balistha .
study, to : i -la dhi 2a s
a bhi .
subj ect : p r aj a f.such : i drp.
su fferi ng : duhkha n .
su ffused : r a ddha .
su i ta bl e : a n a rap a .
summi t : pikha r a 111 .
Su n : bhana m . ; aditya m .
su rv ive, to : pis a d.
sweet : svada .
sw i ft : apa .
sword : a si m .
I I . Engl ish-Sa n skri t G l ossa ry.
tak e refuge,to : p a d +p r a .
ta steful : r a sa va n t.ta x : ka r a m .
tea ch,to : i + a dhi
,ca u s . ; dip
ap a .
t ea cher : ga r a m . ; acarga m .
tea r : a pr a n . ; basp a m .
tell,to : ka tha ga ; va d .
temp l e : deva kala n .ten ; da pa .
tend to,to : kip .
terrify , to : bhi , ca us . ; vij +ca u s .text- book : pa str a n .tha t : ta ; a yam ; a saa .
then : ta da .
there : ta tr a .
thereupon : ta ta s.
th i ef : sten a m . ; caura m .
think , to : c in t ; ma n ; thi nk o n :
sms; dhga .
th ird : tg'tiga .
th irty : tr inpa t.thirty- th ree : tr aga strznpa t.th is : ta ; a ga m .
thou : to a m .
three : tr i .threefold : tr ivrt.thrice : tr is.thu s : i ti , evam ; ta tha.
t ime : kala m .
to -day : a dya .
to -morrow : pva s.
tongue : j ihad f.tormen t
, to : p id; vga th, cau s.touch
,to : sprp.
tra de : vga va har a m . ; vangga .
tra vel , to : w e p r a ; ctha p r a
n .
trea su ry : kosa m .
tree : vrksa m . ; ta r a m .
tremble,to : kamp .
tru e : sa tga ; (fa i thful) bhakta .
tru th : sa tga n .
twelfth : dvada pa .
twelve : dvada pa .
twenty-eight : a stavznpa ti .twen ty- seven : sap ta vinpa ti .tw ice : dvis.
tw i l ight : sandhya f.tw i ne : ba n dh .
two : dva .
umbrel la : cha ttr a n .
understa nd, to : gam a va .
un i te,to ga m sam
u n tru th : a nrta n . ; a sa tga n .
upa ni sad : up a n isa d f.useful , to be : sev.
va ssa l : sama n ta m.
Veda : veda m .
verse : ploka m . ; (of Rigveda ) re f.vessel : p atra n .
victori ous , to b e : j t .vi ctory : j aga m .
vi ew (Op i n ion) : ma ti f . ; m a ta n .vi l lage : grama m .
vi rtu e : dha rma m . ; p unya n .
vi s i t,to : ga m a bhi .
voice : vac f . ; g ir f.
wagon : r a tha m .
wa rrior : ksa tr iga m .
wa sh , to : ksal; sp rp.
wa ter : j a la n . ; t‘ar i n . ; ap f. pl.
wa ve : vi c i m .
we : vagam .
I I . Engl i sh-Sa nskri t G lossa ry.
wea r, to : dhr , ca u s . ; bhr .
wea ry,to become : pr am .
w ea ve, to : gr a n th ; bandh.
w edding : vivaha m .
w eep , to : r a d .
wes t,western : p ra tga n c ; the
W est : p r a ti c i f . , 8 0 . dip.
wha t ya .
wheel : cakr a n .when ya da .
when?: ka da .
whence?: ka ta s.
where ga tr a .
where?: kva ; ka tr a .
wh i ch ya .
which (Of ka ta r a .
whi te : pveta .
whi ther?: kva ; ka tr a .
who ya .
who ?: ka .
whoever : ya ka ap i , aid o r
ca n a ; often by rel . a l one .whol e : krtsn a .
why?: ka ta s ; ka smai .
w i cked : p ap a .
w i fe : bharga f . ; nar i f . ; p a tn i f.wi n
,to : j i .
wind : vaya m . ; vata m .
w i n ter : hema n ta m .
w ip e, to : mrj ; mrj ap a o r p a r i .
w i sh,to ° is.
w i th : sa ha , w . i n st . ; o r by i nstr .a l one .w i thered : mlan a .
w i thou t : vin a ( instr . ,w i tn ess : saksin m .
wol f : vi ka m .
woma n : n ar i f. ; va dha f. ; str i f.
woma n -serva nt : dasi f.wood : kasthd n . ; (forest) va n a 11 .
word : vac f . ; pa bda m .
work : ka rma n n . ; (l i tera ry) gr an tha m .
world : loka m . j aga t n . ; bha
va na nworld-sp i ri t : br a
’
hma n n .
worship , to : p aj .
worthy : sa drpa .
wound, to : ksa n .
wrea th : ma ia f . ; sr aj f.
yea r : sa ihva tsa r a m . ; va rsa m . n .
yoke , to : yaj , ca us .yonder : ta tr a .
young : gava n .
230 A ppendix .
p r i mi tive , w i th the li mi ta ti on s given i n l. b. ; thus, r a'hka , rdr’
zkava ;
garga , gdrgya h, but garggdga ni . A n a tura l ly short vowel i n thep enult, i f fol lowed by a group o f consona n ts con ta i ni ng 3; o r v,
does n o t genera l ly become long by position ; thus , pr o’
bala , p r a'
ba
lgam ; akta , akta va t.
3 . I n verbs a nd verba l deriva t ives joi ned wi th p reposi ti on s , i na ugmented a n d redup l ica ted forms , a nd som etimes in declensionalforms
,the a ccen t i s recess ive, i f the roo t o r s tem- syl la bl e be Short ;
thu s,dgama t, an a tam ,
a nasihi tam ,bu t a tkz
‘
stam ,n i raktam ; dgama t,
a'
ksip a t, bu t bibha’
r ti,ta stava , j aga
'
a . Polysyl la bic p repositio ns, whenp refixed to o ther w ords , reta i n the ir own a ccen t a s seconda ry a ccen t ;thu s , ap agizccha ti , ap agdma tam .
4. I n comp ounds , un less the firs t member be a monosyllabi cword
,ea ch p a r t genera l ly reta i ns i ts ow n a ccen t, bu t tha t o f th e
p ri ncipa l member i s the s trongest ; thus , rdj apar a sa m, p drva ta pi
kha rakar am ba t anmakham,diggaj a m, p r a pisya m .
The d ivisio n o f sylla bl es is much m ore a ppa ren t i n Sa nskri ttha n i n Engl i sh . In rea di ng Sa nskri t p rose the H i ndu s genera l lydrop i n to a sort Of s i ng- song r ec i’ta tivo . Verses a r e a lways cha nted .
